JP2020127447A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game by executing performances of a variety of modes as performances related to the game.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided with operation detection means, start storage means, and prior determination means, and includes operation value calculation means and prediction performance execution means. The prediction performance execution means changes an execution ratio of a prediction performance according to an operation value, and executes, as the prediction performance, a first prediction performance that predicts and reports a content of a predetermined performance related to a variable display game being executed, and a second prediction performance that predicts and reports a content of the predetermined performance that appears in at least one of a plurality of the variable display games based on a determination result of the prior determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 183

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine including control means capable of generating a special game state in which a player is provided with a game value when a display result of a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed is a special result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine capable of executing an effect related to a game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-105770 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the production of the game tends to be monotonous, there is room for improving the interest of the game.

It is an object of the present invention to improve the enjoyment of a game by performing various aspects of the game as a game-related effect.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed, an operation detection means capable of detecting an operation by a player, and a start operation. Before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the start storage means capable of storing the start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the condition, And a pre-judgment means for judging execution information of the variable display game regarding starting memory, wherein the effect control means calculates an operation value as a value that changes in response to the operation detection means detecting the operation of the player. Operation value calculation means, and when the operation detection means detects the operation of the player, has a predictive effect execution means capable of executing a predictive effect of predicting and notifying the content of the predetermined effect, The predictive effect executing unit changes the execution ratio of the predictive effect according to the operation value, and predicts and informs the content of the predetermined effect related to the variable display game being executed as the predictive effect. A first predictive effect, and a second predictive effect that predicts and informs the content of the predetermined effect that appears in at least one of the plurality of variable display games, based on the determination result of the advance determination means. It is feasible.

According to one aspect of the present invention, various modes of predictive effects can be performed as effects related to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display device. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the game microcomputer of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of game state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of a special figure variation display game with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is the figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game for each setting. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure change. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design fluctuation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of general-purpose game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of external information edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of external information edit processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus during changing probability setting (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (2) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (3) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (4) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 5) of the batch display apparatus during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (6) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows another structure of a collective display device. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining a chance eye stop design mode in a chance eye pre-reading production concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example which chooses a chance eye stop design mode concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (1) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (2) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the game machine according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a front view when the board production device of the game board according to the third embodiment operates. It is a front view when the frame production device of the glass frame which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operates. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the movable body control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing which concerns on the comparative example of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing at the time of receiving a set value concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a table for deciding the initial light emission mode of setting suggestion production of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare production setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of setting suggestion production of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of ending production setting processing concerning a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing at the time of reception of the number of out balls concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of RTC reading processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the count information setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device when it becomes a big hit. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of a display apparatus when it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the display mode of setting suggestion production in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 4th embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when it is in hall setting mode. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device when it is in the player setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game at the time of the special display fluctuation pending display of a pending digestion area changing. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a predetermined production|generation produces in a production display area. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and another example of the screen transition of the whole game at the time of a predetermined production|generation generate|occur|produces in a holding digestion area or an effect display area. Is. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the character code (character code) and the character corresponding to it which concern on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the initialization command transmitted to the LED driver concerning 6th Embodiment, and a latch. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the LED driver initial setting processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the LED command and latch which are transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and FIG. 78(A) is a figure which shows the detail of the character role ratio display part which comprises a state display apparatus and displays a character rate. FIG. 78(B) is a diagram showing the details of the discharged ball number display section for displaying the number of discharged balls and the coin output rate display section for displaying the coin output rate, which constitutes the state display device. It is a timing chart which shows an initial setting command transmitted to the driver for a winning combination ratio concerning a 1st modification of a 6th embodiment, and a driver for a ball output rate / number of discharged balls. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the initialization processing of the driver for a winning combination and the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharge balls concerning a 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for role ratio and the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharge balls concerning a 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning a 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the batch setting driver concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment, the driver for combination ratio, and the initialization command sent to the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharge balls. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the initialization processing of the driver for a lump concerning a 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment, the driver for combination ratio, and the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharge balls. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the batch driver, the driver for combination ratio, and the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting value change processing concerning a 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of changing the setting of 7th Embodiment when the lighting pattern data transmitted to a probability setting value display apparatus and the test-shooting test signal transmitted to a test-shooting test apparatus are displayed. It is a schematic diagram at the time of the setting change of the 1st modification of 7th Embodiment at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to a probability setting value display apparatus, and the test-shooting test signal transmitted to a test-shooting test apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the probability set value change processing concerning the 2nd modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of the setting change of the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment when the lighting pattern data transmitted to a probability setting value display apparatus and the test-shooting test signal transmitted to a test-shooting test apparatus are displayed. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (the 1) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (the 2) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. Timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when changing settings according to the ninth embodiment It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of external information output at the time of the setting determination concerning 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. 9 is another example in which the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment is changed. In 10th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the symbol number, the 1st special figure fluctuation|variation display part 51 of a batch display device corresponding to the said symbol number, and the lighting pattern of a probability setting value. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which displays the information regarding the payout rate which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which displays the number which shows the probability setting value which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which illustrates a big hit probability and a small hit probability of a special figure change display game concerning an 11th embodiment to each setting (each set value). It is a figure (the 2) which illustrates a big hit probability and a small hit probability of a special figure change display game concerning an 11th embodiment to each setting (each set value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an opening mode (small hit opening pattern) of the special variation winning device in the small hit state. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram exemplifying the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game for each setting (each set value). In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device waiting for a customer. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the light emission aspect of a special figure fluctuation display part. It is a figure which shows the external device which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure showing signs that a removable part concerning a 12th embodiment is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows roughly the structural example of the game board and parts which concern on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and parts which concern on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the parallel serial conversion part of the identification board which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the identification board|substrate (especially parallel-serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the identification board|substrate (especially parallel-serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the identification board which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main processing of the production control device concerning a 12th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of parts collation processing concerning a 12th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reference table which matches model designation|designated command and model identification information in 12th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning a 13th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on (power restoration) of the game machine concerning a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting value change processing concerning a 13th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of setting value reception which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of segment LED edit processing concerning a 13th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode at the time of setting change of the state display apparatus concerning the 2nd modification of 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change concerning a 13th embodiment. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display screen of a display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing a display mode of a probability set value in a game machine of a 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 1st modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is the 2nd modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment, Comparing the display mode of the probability setting value at the time of setting change with the display mode of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram showing the 3rd modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 4th modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 5th modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change pattern setting processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of 2-byte distribution processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit end processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability which concern on 15th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) according to the 15th embodiment for each setting. It is a figure which shows the selection rate table which defines the selection rate of the number (fluctuation pattern group number) of the variation group tables AE which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table A (in the case of a probability change state and deviation) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table B (in the case of a probability change state and deviation) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table C (in the case of a probability change state and deviation) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group tables D and D'(in the case of a probability change state and a deviation) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group tables E and E'(in the case of a probability change state and a deviation) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table A (in the case of a probability change state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table B (in the case of a probability change state and small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the change group table C (in the case of a probability change state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group tables D and D'(probability change state and small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group tables E and E'(in the case of a probability change state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit end processing concerning the modification of a 15th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit end processing concerning the modification of a 15th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board concerning 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot probability and effect pattern concerning 16th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a figure which illustrates another example of the jackpot probability and effect pattern concerning 16th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change production setting processing concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change processing concerning a 16th embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change processing according to the sixteenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the latter half notice distribution group table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading effect distribution table setting processing concerning a 16th embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch effect distribution table setting processing according to the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the prefetching effect distribution table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lucky number distribution table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the change pattern of the lucky number distribution table set corresponding to a set value and the last lucky number in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting processing concerning the modification of a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change group table change processing concerning the modification of a 16th embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the variable group table changing process according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the variation group table which concerns on the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of an effect control system of a game machine concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main processing of the production control device concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the touch sensor input processing concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the prediction production process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the prediction production process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the friendship degree information production processing concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of the one-time announcement lottery, the holding content announcement lottery, and the SP reach content announcement lottery according to the seventeenth embodiment for each degree of affection. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of the variation content announcement lottery, continuation suggestion announcement lottery, and setting suggestion announcement lottery for each degree of affection according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of the line lottery concerning 17th Embodiment with respect to each intimacy degree. In the seventeenth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device when each character appears in the effect of SP reach. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of the friendship degree increase value lottery with respect to each set value according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the design command processing concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the single command system command processing concerning a 17th embodiment. In the seventeenth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the notification lottery is performed a plurality of times in the variable display game within the single hold. .. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change production setting processing concerning a 17th embodiment. In the seventeenth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and the screen transition of the entire game when the variable display game is played a plurality of times based on a plurality of stored starting memories. This is an example (No. 1). In the seventeenth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and the screen transition of the entire game when the variable display game is played a plurality of times based on a plurality of stored starting memories. Is an example (No. 2). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production button input processing concerning the modification of a 17th embodiment. In a modification of the seventeenth embodiment, it is a front view of the game board during the button operation effective period. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the 2nd modification of 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the touch game processing concerning the 2nd modification of a 17th embodiment. In the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment, it is a front view of the game board during the touch game period. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change production setting processing concerning an 18th embodiment. It is a table which shows the priority of a some character display displayed at the same time which concerns on 18th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the expectation degree of the big hit of the character display without aloud and the character display with aloud concerning a 18th embodiment, using the character display of a serif as an example. It is an example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen which concerns on 18th Embodiment by the time series (the 1). It is an example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen which concerns on 18th Embodiment by the time series (the 2). It is a modification of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen which concerns on 18th Embodiment in time series. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change production setting processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production button input processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is an example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen which concerns on 19th Embodiment by the time series (the 1). It is an example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen which concerns on 19th Embodiment by the time series (the 2). It is a timing chart explaining a non-operation effect and an operation effect in a 19th embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged at the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to a game state
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided that extends in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side). Projection production unit 1
3 is a production device for performing a light emission production or the like according to the progress state of the game. Projection production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a short-time state as a specific game state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable change state, probability change state), big hit state (
It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (multi-turn type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided and specified. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device has a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. And a lower plate 23 are provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device is the force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area.
It is possible to change the launch force corresponding to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and to launch the game ball in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin,
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window serving as a display area of a variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a production display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
There is provided an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the, and a stage portion 40b capable of rolling the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37,
The game ball rolled on the stage 40b is easy to win in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is achieved by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning openings 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a condition for starting the special figure variation display game, and immediately below that is a second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). An ordinary variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called toro-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is normally opened to change to an open state in which the game balls normally flow into the variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure changing display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure changing display game to be higher than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the easy prize winning state than the easy prize winning state, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that the probability change state (
Even when the latent latency change state is excluded), a time saving state (universal support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 in the lower right of the normal variation winning device 37, the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (
(See FIG. 3), a special variation winning device 39 having an attacker-type opening/closing door 39c that opens the big winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts a state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and a big prize is awarded. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. In addition, in the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39 and in the vicinity (around the special winning opening), the special winning opening is illuminated 1
One or a plurality of special winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) are arranged.

General winning a prize mouth 35, starting winning a prize mouth 36, normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37, and special fluctuation winning a prize device 39
When a game ball wins the special winning opening, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Also, the regular variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, there is an outlet 30 for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.
b is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 is a first special view variable display section 5 for a variable display game including a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
1 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D)
2) and the fluctuation display section 53 for the general picture fluctuation display game (general picture display, lamps D8, D10, D
18) and a storage display unit (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56) for informing the number of starting (holding) memories of each variable display game. ing. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special Figure 2 Hold indicator 55 is the lamp D
13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for notifying that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) D7),
The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when the time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, the probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on becomes a high probability state. The third game status display section 59 (third game status display, probability status display section, lamp D9) that indicates that the round display at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 39) The section 60 (lamps D3 to D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit,
It may be configured by a group of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked) and cyclically turned on (either one). One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs may be turned on/off (blinking) or cyclic lighting. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the public figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1, the special figure 2 display 52 can be configured as appropriate.

The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) that executes a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighting display and a non-lighting display as a symbol (a fourth special symbol described later), and the start of each special symbol variable display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). The variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the universal figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, whereas the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display parts 5 and 6 (special figure 2 holding LED1, special figure 2 holding LED2) display the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but displays the number of holdings when the jackpot state is not in effect (including the case where a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41). To do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is paid out through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

A random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored in the universal figure starting memory, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game is won and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in the lighted state and a deviation when the light is in the off state. By blinking the LED, the ordinary figure information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state, and is in the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
In addition to being stored with a predetermined upper limit number, the game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as start winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored with a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning storages for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The number of special figure start prize winning memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and at the same time, the display device 4 is displayed.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. In addition, the game control device 100, the special figure 2 display 52 special figure 2 based on the winning or the second start memory to the normal variation winning device 37.
Run the floating display game.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), the identification information in the special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52 ( It is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol). Also,
On the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling is started in a predetermined order, the changing symbols are stopped in sequence after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are displayed for the purpose of improving the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as the other special special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is repeatedly displayed (flashing) on and off in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start when the lamp is off, when it is out, and when it is a big hit or a small hit, it is on.

When the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the big hit state (
It becomes a special game state). In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) is energized to convert the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens greatly until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the small hit state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time. In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain a game more than in the big hit state. Value (number of balls acquired)
Less is. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the special winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

The big hit is a special result involving the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result not involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

Regarding the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36 is
a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) in the normal variation winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine. Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in a centralized manner, and has a CPU section for a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are included in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , Game microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 for generating and outputting.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after being supplied to the built-in RAM) and during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) is set by a turning operation of the operator or the like to turn on the set value related to the game condition (game). Set value change switch 102 capable of changing the set value related to the game condition
And In the present embodiment, the setting value related to the game condition (game) is the probability setting value of the big hit probability, but other game conditions other than the big hit probability (such as the small hit probability and the probability variation plunge rate) also depend on the probability setting value. Can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are
A setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition is configured. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as the confirmation signal for confirming the set value, but an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. The signal from the enter button switch may be provided in the game control device 100 and used as an enter signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are arranged at a position (an inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 1 such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400.
It may be provided at a position where it cannot be accessed unless 2 (main body frame) is opened.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 9
When 3 is in the ON state, the operator sets the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button).
By operating, it is possible to change the setting (setting value) relating to the game conditions such as the probability of a big hit and the probability of sudden change. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is the setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotationally operates the setting key switch 93 to turn it to the ON position to turn on the power, a setting variable state corresponding to a state during setting change is set. The variable setting state may be notified by voice from a speaker. It should be noted that when the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be the setting variable state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be variable.

In the present embodiment, the setting values relating to the game conditions are defined in 6 stages, and the setting value 1 (setting 1), the setting value 2 (setting 2), the setting value 3 (setting 3), the setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and the setting value 6
Is the most advantageous setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the set value change processing, the operator sets the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).
Each time is operated, the set value (setting) is changed as follows: set value 1→set value 2→set value 3→set value 4→set value 5→set value 6→set value 1→set value 2→... Change to and select. The setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value changing button. The set value is not limited to 6 levels. Then, the selected setting values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment type display. Note that the probability set value display device 143 uses the electric circuit to set the set value change switch 102.
The display may be changed by directly interlocking with the operation of. As will be described later, by displaying the selected set values of 1 to 6 on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and/or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. Good.

When the operator touches the operation handle 24, a touch switch signal is transmitted to the game control device 1
When it is input to 00, the selected (changed) setting value (that is, the setting) is confirmed and stored in the probability setting value area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting value changing process ends. Note that, regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after changing the setting value or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting variable state, the game control device 100 confirms and stores the setting value (that is, setting). It is also possible to have a configuration.

On the other hand, after turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotationally operated to change from the off state to the on state, the set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state)
become. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected 1 to 6 setting values may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and/or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. .. The set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from a speaker.

The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is a RAM initialization switch (RA
It can also be used as an M clear switch), and an initialization switch signal is generated when the initialization switch is in the ON state when the power is turned on (power restoration), and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 11
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 1 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. ROM111b or RAM11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Further, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (as a reach effect system) in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected value is different)
N Reach, Special 1 Reach (SP1 Reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach are set. It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach.
In addition, the reach state is at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game (
It is included in the variable display mode in the case of a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining a big hit random number for determining a big hit in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for pattern random numbers, fluctuation patterns in special display variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a executes the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure variation display game game result (big hit or miss), the special figure variation display game probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) as the current gaming state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 11
The reference numeral 1a constitutes a variation allocation information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball payout request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a in second start winning opening 37
, Winning a prize switch 35a, is connected to the special winning a prize device 39 large winning a prize switch 39a,
An interface chip (proximity I) that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts the signal into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/F) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are the third input port 1
24 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Signals are input from the switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102, and plays a game microcomputer via the data bus 140. Supply to 111.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. The overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, the out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch are fetched, and the gaming microcomputer 1 via the data bus 140.
A first input port 122 is provided to supply 11 to. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not. In this embodiment,
The out ball detection switch (not shown) detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13 is also provided.
0 to each port. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. It should be noted that the reset signal RST corresponds to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine, which is an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that it is in the impossible state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-injection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-fire testing device.

In addition, the opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variation winning device 37 and the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variation winning device 39 are output to the output unit 130. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON/OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability set value display output port) for outputting information on the set value (probability set value) to the probability set value display device 143.
In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), but the setting value (probability setting value) information is output from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (
It may be output to the probability set value display device 143 via an LED driver).

Furthermore, the output unit 130 has a universal solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
c and a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening/closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and a segment on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 Second driver 1 for outputting line on/off drive signal
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the collective display device 50
12V DC is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of FIG. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S3, and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth output of external information signal to external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. Photo coupler 13
9, the game microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a driver 150 that receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives the status display device 152. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot portions) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The state display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (
This is an 8-segment type display including the dot portion), and it is possible to display the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls. The state display device 152 is not limited to a device that directly displays the character ratio, the ball output rate, and the number of balls discharged, but may also indirectly display the number of ball discharged, the ball ratio, and the character ratio. Good.
That is, the state display device 152 may display information about the character ratio, the ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
Is the total of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of discharged balls, which is the number of game balls discharged from the ball discharge device to the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out-ball detecting switch. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are the general winning openings 35,
The starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and a special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) are included. The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) is counted. The number of discharged balls may be displayed by counting up from "00" to "99".

The payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shots), (
Calculated as (number of balls acquired/number of balls discharged)×100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (the total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

In the present embodiment, the payout rate is easily calculated from the number of balls acquired from when the number of discharged balls becomes 100 to 100 when the number of discharged balls becomes 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is counted up to 100 (predetermined number). Every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest winning rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) is displayed on the state display device 152 as it is, the payout rate is displayed.

For example, the winning character ratio is in the state of big hit among the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the special winning opening (=so-called continuous character ratio). In addition, the ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=the big prize hole ratio), out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize hole and the ordinary variable prize device 37 (the second starting prize hole) (=the so-called character ratio (general character ratio) that is generally used. )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 including a ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain the stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.), are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, and the sound source LSI 314.
To perform reproduction sound instruction, lighting of a decorative lamp, drive control of a motor or a solenoid, management of effect time, and the like.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
Through the 31, the decorative special figure reservation number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is received as an effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG. The panel display device 46 includes the above-mentioned lamp display device 8
It may include 0.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools each part of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. The judgment result is compared with the judgment value, and the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the public figure display, the general figure variability display game is displayed in which it is stopped. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the off-result mode on the general-picture display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Make up.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit. Let In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening.

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the special winning opening until such a condition is achieved, and this is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (repetition) control (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed such that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since the control is performed so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. It should be noted that even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplication support is executed by overlapping and shortening the state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned general figure fluctuation display game (general figure fluctuation time)
It is possible to perform a time-shortening variation to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher than the ordinary probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the normal operation state, the movable member 3
You may set so that 7b may not be opened (universal figure probability is 0). Further, in the case of a win, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the time saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flow chart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). As a result, the setting key switch 93,
Setting value change switch 102, glass frame opening detection switch 63, front frame opening detection switch 6
The signal from 4 (main frame opening detection switch) can be read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 forming the main control means
Waiting time for waiting until the program of the secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 (for example, 3
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
(00, etc.) to form a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of (00 etc.).

In addition, the power supply delay timer measures the time using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

Note that the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3), and the standby time By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of, the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are operated and the power is turned on after waiting for the waiting time. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect it by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting value change switch 102 cannot be accepted.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A1008).
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus and checks the number of times (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

If the power failure monitoring signal is ON, the game control device 100 (the result of A1009 is "Y
)), it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 for determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "
N"), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1012). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”).
) That is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read/write memory (Read/Write Memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output). Set to (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Furthermore, the driver 15 that drives the status display device 152
0 is initialized (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used by the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). The duty ratio of the driver 150 may be made smaller than usual in order to darken each LED with power saving. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four. The control data corresponding to the number of used digits is used by the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (A101
The result of 7 is "Y"), and it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. Calculation processing is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power off match (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is “Y”), the RAM 111c is normal and the RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to remove the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area is an initial value random number area for storing various initial value random numbers,
It includes a fluctuation pattern random number area for storing fluctuation pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power failure inspection area 1, the power failure inspection area 2, the checksum area, and the like. The random number area may be excluded from the clear area #2. The clear area #2 includes a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 such as a character ratio, and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152. I can't.

In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area and the game control stack area. Further, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also,
The stack area for status display may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area (the bottom of FIG. 5C) at the end of FIG. 5C may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during setting variable state, setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of changing the probability setting in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value is changing.

If the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100,
It is determined whether the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is input, the front frame 1
It can be determined that 2 (main body frame) is in an open state. In step A1023, the front frame 1
Instead of 2, it may be determined whether or not the glass frame 15 is in the open state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 may be in the open state. When the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024).
When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the setting (setting value) can be changed. Therefore, the RAM initial state in the setting changing state of steps A1036-A1041 is set. Processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state), the game control device 100
(The result of A1023 is “N”), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
The result of 4 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1).
025). When the set value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is "N
)), the normal processing at power-on (at power restoration) of steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1
If the result of 025 is “Y”), the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing of steps A1042-A1045 is executed. Since the setting key switch 93 is turned off by operating (pressing) the setting value changing switch 102 when the power is turned on, the setting value changing switch 102 is the RAM initialization switch ( It is used as a RAM clear switch). It should be noted that the setting value change switch 102 is not actually turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (result of A1023 is “N”). The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100
Serves as an initialization unit that initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N” or the result of A1018 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1020 is “N”), there is an abnormality in the RAM 111c, and the process proceeds to the processing for dealing with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, R
The AM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the clear target RAM area. R to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 1.
The AM area is set to clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #1 includes a game control work area (including a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area #1 does not include a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1027). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

The game control device 100, when the front frame 12 is in the open state (the result of A1027 is "Y
)), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is turned on (result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting value can be changed. Therefore, the RAM in the setting variable state of steps A1036-A1041 is set.
Initialization processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed. Note that RA in this case
The RAM area to be cleared in the M initialization process is the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore,
RAM abnormality can be resolved.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state), the game control device 100
(The result of A1027 is “N”), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
When the result of No. 8 is “N”), the command of the setting change instruction for urging the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to change the setting displays a setting change instruction display that prompts the player to change the setting on the display device 41. By the setting change instruction display, the player tries to change the setting and the setting key switch 93 is turned on (the result of A1028 is “Y”), and the RAM abnormality processing is solved by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of the setting change. it can.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (A10
30), stand by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

Next, the normal processing when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (
A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area #2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, in the control information area, a power failure inspection area,
A checksum area and an area related to error fraud monitoring are included. The payout control device 200
Also clears the busy signal status area for storing the state of the pay-out busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, and is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the pay-out busy signal is not fixed. After that, the game control device 100 checks the area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is the high probability state (A1032).

Here, when the game state is not the high-probability state (result of A1032 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processes of step A1033 and step A1034, and shifts to the process of step A1035. If the game state is a high probability state (A1
The result of 032 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033),
For example, the ON (lighting) data of the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 59, error display) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and step A1046 is executed. Move to processing.

Next, the RAM initialization processing (RAM in the variable setting state of steps A1036-A1041)
The clearing process) and the process during setting change will be described.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036).
.. When the RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the RAM area to be cleared is set to the RAM clear start address 2. Therefore, the clear area #2 of FIG. 5C is set.
Becomes When the RAM 111c is abnormal (result of A1020 is “N”), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, and therefore the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C is set. That is, RAM
The probability setting value area is not cleared when the RAM is normal, but the probability setting value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this point, it is premised that the front frame 12 is in an open state, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main frame) is opened. It will be possible to output what was done to an external device (such as a hall computer). If the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved as an initial value in the probability setting value area.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag indicating that the setting is changeable (that is, the setting is being changed) so that the setting can be changed (A1038).
Then, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value is set. It is saved in the work probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A104).
0). Next, a command in the process of changing the probability setting indicating that the setting is in the variable state (changing the probability setting) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and step A104 is performed.
The processing shifts to 6. The effect control device 300 can recognize that it is in the setting variable state (probability setting is being changed) by the command that is changing the probability setting.

Next, the processing of the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear top address 2 (A1042),
The RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear start address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. For this reason, the RAM initialization by operating the RAM initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) (
In the RAM clear processing, the probability setting value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for the RAM initialization is used as the effect control device 300.
It is transmitted to (production control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1035 and step A1
The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of 045 includes a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command and a decorative special figure 2 reserved number indicating the reserved numbers of special figures 1 and 2. A command and a probability information command indicating a state of probability are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, a recovery screen command is displayed when the special figure variation display game is running when the power is turned off, and a customer wait demo command when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. , A power-on command indicating that the power is turned on is included. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command), the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 (RAM). Clear) notification 3
Perform for 0 seconds.

Further, the command for power failure recovery and the command for RAM initialization include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information that is information on the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10. Be done. The game control device 100 need only send the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 includes a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Start (A104
6). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC in the random number generation circuit
The code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit is set in the update permission register (C).
It is performed by the PU 111a. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), small number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of ordinary figure (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol of ordinary figure (random number to hit symbol) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1048).
), the interrupt is permitted (A1049). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is C
It is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of PU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number is the CTC output that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt process that is the processing unit of the program ( CTC (CTC) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on TC2)).

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random method update in which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle.
That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit design random number and the hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1050, the game control device 100 determines the power supply device 40.
The number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read through the port and the data bus and checked is set (A1051), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
52). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is “N”), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number updating process of 1050. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number updating process (A1050), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait. Note that during the setting change (during the setting variable state), the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the initial value random number update need not be executed.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1050 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. There is an advantage that it simplifies the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 10
In 0, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051 (A1053). If the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (result of A1053 is “N”), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1054), and off data is output to all output ports (A105).
5).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (
A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059).
). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the game machine stands by until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the activation of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, the input process of reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Based on the output data set by various processes, solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 39b)
An output process for performing drive control of the actuators such as is executed (A1304). If the firing prohibition signal is output in step A1005 of the main process,
By performing this output process, the firing permission signal is output, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100, the random number update process 1 (A1305), the random number update process 2 (A1).
306) is executed. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Note that the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 do not have to be executed when the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state).
After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 39a is monitored to see if there is a normal signal input, and the error is monitored (front frame or A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for checking whether the glass frame is opened or not is executed (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes probability setting value changing processing for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed is determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A103
It can be determined by 8). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation state) (A1310). If the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described below is set,
It can be determined that the probability setting is being confirmed.

The game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is not being confirmed (A131
The result of 0 is “N”), and the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes is issued to the payout control device 2
The payout command transmission process for outputting to 00 is executed (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game is executed (A1313). Game control device 10
0 is not necessary when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1309 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1310 is “Y”), and therefore the payout command transmission process (A
1311), special figure game processing (A1312), and general figure game processing (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED edit process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet irregularity monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area when there is an abnormality. Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area when there is an abnormality.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process of editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output process, as the output data to the state display device 152, a character product ratio, a payout rate, the number of discharged balls, or the like may be calculated. In the status display edit output process, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated. If the checksum does not match the checksum when the power is turned off, the status display work area and status display work area are displayed. You may clear the stack area. afterwards,
Terminate the timer interrupt processing. Note that when the timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank designation is configured to be performed automatically.
Depending on U, after the external information editing process, a process of permitting an interrupt or a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 which outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output/external information output (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output.
To (A1608).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the launch permission (A161).
0), the finally combined data is the fifth output port 137 for outputting the external information/launch permission signal.
To (A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data of the probability setting value display (A161).
2). The off output data is output data (blank data for extinguishing the light) during a period in which the probability setting value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in the probability setting value changing process described later.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A16
13 is "Y"), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), and the loaded probability setting value display data is output to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). It is output (A1615). If the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (result of A1613 is “N”), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the OFF output data is set to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). Output to (A161
5). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the probability setting value, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143. Turns off (blank display).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process ends.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability setting value (A1)
621). Here, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment type display), that is, the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area is output as the test signal output data relating to the probability setting value. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing the set value, or may be output data of another form. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1622 is “Y”), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (
A1624). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1622 is "
N"), the test signal output data having the probability setting value is output to the test signal output port 6 as it is (
A1624).

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) (A2001). The game control device 100, when the probability setting is not being changed (A2001
Is “N”), and it is determined whether the probability setting is being confirmed (in the setting confirmation state) (A20).
02). When the probability setting confirmation is not in progress (result of A2001 is “N”), the monitoring processing from step A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is “Y”), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be inserted into any of the winning openings by hand, and there is no point in performing monitoring processing, step A20.
The monitoring process from 03 to A2010 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step A2011.

When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100,
The winning a prize monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning a prize switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning a prize (special variation winning device 39) is prepared (A2003). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it is monitored whether or not there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening, and the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning is executed (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2005).
Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2007). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process for monitoring the illegal prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2008). Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch that does not require fraudulent monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switch that does not require illicit monitoring is the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (
A2010). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2013)
.. The details of the gaming machine status check processing will be described later.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shooting ball running out error) based on the shoot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set up. The value of the status scan counter is 2
If the value is 3, the monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state (payout abnormal error) based on the payout abnormal status signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2015).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the illegal radio wave signal (frame illegal radio wave) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2016
Result of "N"), the winning a prize switch/state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (A2
The result of 016 is “Y”), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2017), and gaming machine status check processing for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2018).
..

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). ), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
The processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 6 ms.

In the fraud & winning award monitoring process (A2008), a special winning opening (special variation winning device 39
) And the number of prizes and the number of prize balls obtained by role (total of the number of prize balls) related to the normal variable prize device 37 are counted and stored, and further information on the number of prizes and the number of balls obtained by prize is set as a production command. Good.
In the winning number counter updating process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls (total of the number of winning balls) for each winning prize related to the starting winning holes 36 and the general winning holes 35 are counted and stored. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as a performance command. Further, in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (the number of discharged balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information of the number of out balls is a production command (out ball number command). May be set as The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls (the total number of balls acquired by all characters) to the number of discharged balls. The character ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by character) obtained by winning the prize hole, out of the total number of prize balls (=so-called continuous character ratio). is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), the output ratio of the state display device 152 may be calculated such as the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check processing is step A2013 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring processing shown in FIG.
It is executed in A2015 and A2018.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (
A2202). When the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2202 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203) and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state regarding an error system signal, and indicates a state without touch regarding a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires a target state on command, and prepares. Yes (A2207). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state regarding an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch regarding a touch switch signal.

When the processing of step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100
Determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2
209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2212. When they do not match (result of A2209 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210) and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (
A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212).
.. Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). When the updated value of the state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value − The value is kept at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (A221
The result of 5 is "Y"), and the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2215 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. Yes (A2216). Finally, effect command setting processing for setting effect commands is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check processing ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value changing process (A1308) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (during setting variable state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is “N”),
Probability setting value confirmation processing for confirming the probability setting value is executed (A2402).

When the probability setting value is being changed, the game control device 100 (the result of A2401 is “Y”)
If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2403), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (A2404). When the probability setting value extinction timer is 0 (result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405),
The process moves to step A2406. If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (A24
If the result of 04 is "N"), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). If the probability setting value changed flag, which will be described later, is set, the probability setting value has been changed. If the probability setting value has been changed (A2
When the result of 406 is "Y"), the setting change end processing of steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

If the probability setting value has not been changed, the game control device 100 (the result of A2406 is "N
)), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2411.

The game control device 100, when there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A240
The result of 7 is "Y"), and the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (A24).
08). In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value in the work probability setting value area is increased by one. If the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the working probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the working probability setting value area may be reset to 0.
Values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to probability setting values 1 to 6 in 6 levels. The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to an extinguishing period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished (blank display).

As described above, when the probability setting value extinction timer is 0, the probability setting value display permission flag is set to set the probability setting value display data as the probability setting value during the setting change (working probability setting value). When the probability set value display timer 143 is displayed and the probability set value display timer 143 is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Since the probability setting value extinguishing timer turns off the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button) for a predetermined extinguishing period, even if there is only one setting (when the setting value is only 1) It is possible to visually confirm on the probability set value display device 143 that the set value change switch 102 has been operated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a touch switch signal input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When the touch switch signal is not input (the result of A2411 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process ends. When the touch switch signal is input (result of A2411 is “Y”), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal serves as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability setting value are stored in the probability setting value area.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting key switch 93 was turned off or the setting variable state was entered. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. .. That is, instead of operating the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirm button switch may be used as the confirm operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). As a result, the confirmed probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is output to the effect control device 300 (effect control. Send to board (A241
5) Then, the probability setting value changing process ends.

In the processing of ending the setting change of steps A2416 to A2421, the game control device 10
For 0, first, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (result of A2416 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process ends. When the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is “Y”)
, RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is clear area #3 in FIG. 5C.
Becomes The clear area #3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and excludes the probability setting value area and the random number area. The clear area #3 is obtained by removing the random area from the clear area #2, and the random numbers updated during the setting change are not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used for changing the settings, such as the work probability setting value area information, the probability setting value changing flag and the probability setting value changed flag, are cleared. It

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change is completed, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the external device (hall Output to a computer). Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the time of ending the setting change is displayed and maintained on the probability setting value display device 143.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and the main process (
Returning to FIG. 5B), the process proceeds to step A1049. The commands to be transmitted here include the model designation command, the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the set value information command (probability set value information command), and the probability setting change end. This is a command (which may be a RAM initialization command). Depending on the model, a performance mode information command, a performance number information command, and a high probability number information command are transmitted. Upon receiving the command to end the probability setting change, the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, for example.
The notification of RAM initialization (RAM clear) is given by the sound of the LED and speaker of the panel decoration device 46.
Do it for a second.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation processing (A2402) in the above-described probability setting value changing processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a probability set value confirmation mode (a set value confirmable state) in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (result of A2501 is “Y”), the processes of step A2509 and thereafter are executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (the result of A2501 is "
N”), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (A2503). For example, if the variable display game is being executed or the jackpot is being hit, it can be determined that the game is being played. When the game is being played (the result of A2503 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended so that the confirmation of the probability setting value becomes impossible. If not playing (A
The result of 2503 is “N”, and it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A2).
504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A2504 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). This allows
When the probability setting value is not being changed (in the setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is “N”)
When the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmable state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered. Then, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2
506). As a result, the output process (FIG. 7) causes the probability setting value display device 143 to display the probability setting value based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area so that the security signal can be output (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and the fact that the front frame 12 is opened can be output to an external device (hall computer, etc.). The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability set value confirmation process ends.

The game control device 100 is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
Y”), and determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). If the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2509 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. And
In order to prevent the probability setting value display device 143 from displaying the probability setting value, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command for ending the confirmation of the probability set value indicating that the confirmation of the probability set value is completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2
512).

In the above description, the setting value change switch 102 can be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), but a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, when the power is turned on (power restoration),
If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting is in a variable state (setting change state), and if the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is off, the setting confirmation state (set value confirmation possible state) When the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, RAM initialization (RAM clear) is possible, and the setting key switch 93
If the RAM initialization switch is off, the power may be turned on (power restored) normally. Further, the setting value (setting) may be fixed when the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variation winning device 37 that forms the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Before the start of the game, a game result pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the game result based on winning. In addition,
Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number (A2607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100
The special figure normal processing that monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game and sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the information necessary for performing the processing during special figure fluctuation It is executed (A2608). Details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
A special figure changing process is executed to set a stop display time of the special figure and information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process (A2609). For the details of the special figure changing process, see FIG.
It will be described later in 8.

If the game process number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, in order to set the fanfare command according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare/interval processing The special figure displaying process for setting the information necessary for the process is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as big hit fanfare command (effect command), big hit fanfare time, probability information command (low probability), etc. is set, The processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command (effect command) and the small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing. Save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
The fanfare/interval processing is performed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, necessary information such as the round command (effect command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number relating to the processing during the big winning opening is set. "4" is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
If the big hit round is not the final round, set an interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the process of opening the special winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command or an ending command as a production command is set, and the processing number “5” related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save to.

If the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the jackpot and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing etc. It is executed (A2613). For example, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, if the round is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the big hit end processing is set, and the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
Special figure Performs the jackpot end process that sets the information required to execute the normal process (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, necessary information such as the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal electric power support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state ends is set, and the probability information command (production) Command), set a process number "0" related to special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game process number area. Probability information commands include the number of continuous games (probability/high probability/low probability) after the big hit state, and the number of continuous games (time shortening fluctuation count, power support count) in the normal electric power support state (time saving state) after the big hit state. Information is included.

If the game processing number is “7” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
The small winning fanfare middle processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information required for performing the small winning medium processing (A2615). For example, in the small hitting fanfare medium processing, necessary information such as the small winning opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number "8" related to the small winning medium processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is “8” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
The small hit mid-range process is executed to set the information necessary for the small hit remaining ball process (A2).
616). For example, in the small hitting process, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, and the process number "9" relating to the special winning opening remaining ball process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game process number is “9” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
The small hit remaining ball process is executed to set the information necessary for the small hit end process (A
2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball process, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, and the process number "10" related to the special figure small hit end process is set and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

When the game process number is "10" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit ending process for setting information necessary to execute the special figure normal process (
A2618).

When the process based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2619), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and starts the winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning slot 36 (
When the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes of step A2709 and subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A
When the result of 2704 is “N”), the processes of step A2707 and thereafter are executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the start winning port 36 is not won unless the player hits it left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won only when it is hit right. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (that is, in the normal power support state When left-handed), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 gives an instruction to instruct right-handing (
Warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2).
708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). If there is no winning in the 2nd starting prize hole (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second start winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), and proceeds to the processing of step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric power illegality is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal wins to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the ordinary electric fraud is occurring. In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent prize number. If the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In the case where the illegality of normal electric power generation is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). The special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the illegality of electric power generation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second
Prevent further generation of starting memory.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process in the starting port switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”),
Save the updated value in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and execute the step A
The processing moves to 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure reservation number (starting storage number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "N")
), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, in the case where the start winning port 36 is a prize (the result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913),
It is saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2914).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
916). Then, a start-up switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as effect commands (A2917), and effect command setting processing (A291).
8) is executed and the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at an upper limit is formed. Also,
The starting storage means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. , Various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2916) in the common start port switch process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process.
The special figure reservation information determination process is a prefetch (preliminary determination) process of determining the result related information corresponding to the starting memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

First, the game control device 100 checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A300).
1). If the winning is not in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), step A3
The processing moves to 004. On the other hand, in the case where the winning is at the start winning port 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A300).
2).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when it is during the special figure time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, if the special drawing is not in a short time (A3
If the result of 002 is “N”, it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is in progress (A30).
03). When the big hit or the small hit is in progress (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the big hit or the small hit is not in progress (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the big hit random number value is the big hit judgment value and is the big hit judgment processing. Is executed (A3004). And if the judgment result is a big hit (
The result of A3005 is “Y”) is to set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (A3006), and to obtain stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 ( A3007) and the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is the first start opening (start winning opening 36) (A3008). When it is not a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

The game control device 100, in the case of winning the start winning port 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y").
)), a small hit determination process is executed to determine whether the small hit is a small hit depending on whether or not the random number of the big hit matches the small hit determination value (A3009). When the determination result is not a small hit (A30
The result of 10 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3013), and step A3
The processing moves to 014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y
)), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and step A143
The stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S3014 is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed (A3016), and variation pattern setting processing for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017). ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure reservation information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-reading target, and a pre-reading variation pattern command including the variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thus, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment etc.) Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the starting winning when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening process is being performed (A3101). When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is “N”), the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed. Judge (A3102
).

The game control device 100, during the special winning opening remaining ball processing (the result of A3102 is "Y")
), and proceeds to the processing of step A3105. In addition, when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (A
The result of 3105 is “N”), and the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, it is determined whether or not processing is being performed during the small hit (A3103). When processing is in progress during a small hit (A310
The result of 4 is "Y"), and the process proceeds to step A3105. Further, when the small hitting is not being processed (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed ( A3104). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

The game control device 100, when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3104 is "N")
, The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. In addition, when the small hit remaining ball is being processed (A31
If the result of 04 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, the winning prize counter is set to 0 (A3105), and the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a
) Is input (A3106).

The game control device 100, when there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "
N”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), the special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107),
The effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (
A3109), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2, the game control device 100 (the result of A3110 is "
N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), the special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111) and the effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

The gaming control device 100, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y").
) Ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (
The result of A3114 is "N", and it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A311).
5). When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (the result of A3115 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3115 is “N”),
It is determined whether or not the small hit remaining balls are being processed (A3116).

When the game control device 100 is in the process of processing a small hit remaining ball (the result of A3116 is “Y”)
Finishes the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (result of A3116 is "N"), the value of the winning prize counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count number (A31
17), the maximum winning opening count is the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9
)) It is determined whether or not the above (A3118).

Game control device 100, when the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (A31
The result of 18 is "N"), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether or not during the small hitting process (A3121).

If the game control device 100 is not in the process of small hit (the result of A3121 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and if the process of small hit is in process (the result of A3121 is "Y").
)), save the value of the small hit opening operation end in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122)
, The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first startup memory number) is 0 (A3205). Then, when the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (A3209), and when the customer waiting demo is not started (A3209). The result is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state during customer waiting demonstration) is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a production command (
(A3211), effect command setting processing is performed (A3212), and "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, even when the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning hole fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216).
, Special figure normal processing ends.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) and the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The produced control device 300 performs the setting for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 may also be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

Further, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
)), the special figure 2 variation start processing is executed (A3202), and a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 2 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number is prepared as an effect command (A3203).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure normal process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N
)), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (A3206), and a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 1 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared as an effect command (A3207).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before checking the special figure 1 pending number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100).
If there is a second starting memory, the priority control means executes the variable display game based on the second starting memory with priority over the variable display game based on the first starting memory.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3206) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information is executed for the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, with respect to the special figure 1 variable display game, variable commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern numbers are prepared as effect commands, and effect command setting processing is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal regarding the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first executes the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 variation flag indicating is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507). In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, with regard to the special figure 2 variable display game, variable commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern numbers are prepared as effect commands,
Performs production command setting processing.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A360
1), the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM and prepared (A360
3), the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3604). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3605).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (A
If the result of 3606 is “N”), and the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit judgment value, the small hit judgment processing for judging whether or not it is a small hit is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sends the small hit information to the small hit flag area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3601. The data is overwritten and saved (A3610), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (A3
If the result of 609 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. Thus, in this embodiment,
The result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "outside hit".
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the process of the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Then, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (A
The result of 3705 is “N”), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing)
Details of (A3605, A3704) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging processes in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit determination values (upper limit determination value table) corresponding to probability setting values (A3801). The upper limit judgment value table defines upper limit judgment values according to probability setting values for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (A3802), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of No. 3 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808), and the big hit judgment process is ended.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 803 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is the high-probability state (probability change state) (A3804). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3804 is “Y”).
), using the upper limit judgment value table, the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value (A3805). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (result of A3804 is “N”), the upper limit determination value table is used to set the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3806).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3807 is "N"), and a big hit is set as a determination result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination processing is common to the small hit determination processing in other processing executed during the timer interrupt processing, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3902). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value). In the present embodiment,
The small hit random number is not independently provided, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3904),
The small hit determination process ends.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A3904).
.. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "
N”), and a small hit is set as the determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
24(A), (B), and (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit judgment processing (FIG. 22) and small hit judgment processing (FIG. 23). Each setting (
It is a table illustrated for each set value).

The example of FIG. 24A shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (at low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (higher setting), and the larger the set value, the more easily the big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 22 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The big hit probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in accordance with the set value.
In another example, only one of the big hit probability at the time of low probability and the big hit probability at the time of high probability may be configured to be higher as the set value becomes larger. Since the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting (setting value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are the same. It is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase as the set value increases (the setting becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24B, it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

In the example of FIG. 24C, regardless of the setting (setting value), the jackpot probability (at low probability and at high probability)
And the small hit probability is the same. In this case, the player will estimate the setting (setting value) from other setting discriminating elements.

Other setting determination factors include the probability of sudden change (described later), the number of continuation of normal electric power support after the end of the big hit (described later), the number of times the ST machine continues in the probability variation state, the number of jackpot rounds (upper limit number of rounds), and There are a variation pattern (variation time value) of the figure variation display game, various times set in the special figure game processing (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.), and the like. If the probability that the predetermined contents of these setting discrimination elements are selected is made different for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from these setting discrimination elements.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001).
If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4002). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). The type of special result by this process (type of jackpot)
Is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4
005), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode transition information is information for changing the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit ending process. That is, the effect mode can be changed by the effect mode shift information when the big hit occurs. In addition, as described above, the production mode transition information is set according to the stop pattern pattern of the big hit (whether it is the probability variation big hit pattern/normal big hit pattern etc.), so the big hit pattern type (big hit type) ends. The transfer destination of the effect mode to be transferred later will change. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state,
The destination of the effect mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and if it is a small hit (
The result of A4011 is “Y”), and the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) (A4011). Next, set the special table 1 small hit symbol table (A4
012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), save the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be changed when the small hit occurs. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (A40).
18).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the loss stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern. It is saved in the area (A4017), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop pattern is prepared (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4020). This decoration special command is directed to the effect control device 30.
Sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit Clear the symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A40
23), the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101).
If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4102). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of big hit) is selected.

After that, game control control equipment 100, sets the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table (A4
105), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The performance mode transition information here is for big hits (
The result of A4101 is set to "Y") and is used in the jackpot end process. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).
).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of falling out in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110).
), the detachment stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4111), and a decoration special command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decoration special command is directed to the effect control device 30.
Sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), the special figure 2 stop symbol. The setting process ends.

[Example of special design jackpot design distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table exemplifying, for each setting, the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the special figure game process described above.

FIG. 27 exemplifies jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) showing types of jackpots and jackpot symbol tables defining the distribution rate thereof for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution ratio of the big hit symbol number (kind of big hit, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (setting value), and the probability variation rush rate becomes higher as the setting value becomes larger, and the player can Be advantageous. The probability variation plunge rate is the proportion of the probability variation big hit symbols to all the symbols that the probability state after the jackpot is high has a high probability.
Moreover, the number of times of the usual electric jackpot support after the big hit ends, especially for the normal big hit (the probability state after the big hit ends is low probability), the larger the set value in the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 4 to 6. growing. Settings 1, 2, 3 (Settings 1, 2, 3) and Settings 4, 5, 6 (Settings 4,
The number of regular electric power support in 5 and 6) is set to be the same. Note that the ST machine can be configured such that the number of continuation of the probability variation state is increased as the set value is increased.

In FIG. 27, the number of rounds (round number upper limit value, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given in one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value increases. Various configurations are also possible. Further, in FIG. 27, it is easier to give a larger number of rounds to the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is more advantageous to the player than the 1-variation display game.

Note that, similar to FIG. 24(C), regardless of the setting (setting value), it is also possible to make the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) the same.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as a production command (A4701).
, Production command setting processing is executed (A4702). The changing symbol can be determined from the variable symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is commonly 600.
Set msec.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during special figure display (A4
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area ( A4708).

Next, the game control device 100 uses a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, displays a stop flag related to a fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 change control flag area. Save to (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A4711). , The special figure changing process transition setting process ends.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
In FIG. 29, the symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the special figure game process described above.
), the symbol variation control processing in the later-described universal figure game processing is shown. The symbol variation control processing is the control of the variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol, etc.) and the normal symbol (general symbol) of the variable display game in the variable display section of the collective display device 50, and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol. It is a process of setting display data of symbols.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the fluctuation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, one of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the general drawing) is changing (A7501). In the case of the present embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in Step A2619, Step A2621, and Step A7614, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 ( Address for stop), display table 1
The address (for fluctuation) is defined.

The game control device 100, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (A
The result of 7502 is “Y”), and the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (A7503). In the case of the present embodiment, step A2619, step A2621,
The address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation, display table 1) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504).
, The flashing control timer after the update is determined to be 0 (A7505), if the flashing control timer after the update is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target The corresponding display data is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

If the blink control timer after updating is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol of the control target when the changing flag related to the symbol of the control target is not changing (result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, step A2619 and step A2
621, the address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blink control timer initial value. This blinking control timer initial value is the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the varying time.

The corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 ) Is sequentially updated within the range. In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of performing the above, the display for one cycle is repeated.

In this way, by defining the blinking control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 make one round. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the public figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored and the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the public figure.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

If the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100,
Regular figure normal processing that monitors the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for performing processing during the universal figure variation Execute (A7608). The details of the ordinary figure ordinary process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the figure, in order to shift to the process of displaying figure, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the figure game processing number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. Processing for displaying a general figure is performed to set the opening time and information necessary for performing the processing for hitting a general figure (A7610). For example, in the processing for displaying a figure, in the case where the result of the figure changing display game is a hit, in order to shift to the processing for hitting a figure, "3" is set as the game processing number and the figure processing number area is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the loss, the game processing number is set to “0” and the game processing number is saved in the general/universal game processing number area in order to shift to the normal/universal processing routine processing.

If the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process of hitting the normal figure or performing the normal ball remaining ball process. The middle process in the figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the ordinary figure hitting process, after setting the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, the game process number is set to "4" in order to shift to the ordinary ball remaining ball process. Save to the universal figure game processing number area.

Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the per-universal-diagram end process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal ball remaining ball process, in order to shift to the general-universal-game end process, "5" is set as the game process number and saved in the general-university game process number area, and the general-university ending time is set in the general-university game. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the universal figure ending process, "0" is set as the game process number and the game is saved in the universal figure game process number area in order to shift to the regular figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the regular symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (A7604).
If the result is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). When there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is to hit the right (A7702). The gaming state of hitting to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (normal power support state). If the game state is to hit the right side (result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705.
If the game state is not for right hitting (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). Effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command
Causes the display device 41 or the like to execute a notification (warning) for instructing left-handed driving.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved universal figures and determines whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control device 100, if the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved universal figures by +1 (A
7706), and calculates the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of universal figure reservations (A
7707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A77
08), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of reserved universal figures is not less than the upper limit value, the game control device 100 (A770).
When the result of 5 is "N"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a normal figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the universal figure reservation number is 0 (A7901).
.. If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area for ordinary figures of RWM (for the number of reserved 1), and the random number storage area for symbols of RWM is (
Load a random number per design from (holding number 1), and clear the random number per universal figure storage area (for holding number 1) and the random number per universal figure storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (A7902) .. Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in the high probability of being in a regular figure (during a high probability state), that is, whether it is a time-saving state (a state of the universal power support state). It is determined (A7903). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

When the universal figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7903 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) which is the lower limit determination value in the universal figure low probability (A7904).
), if the figure high probability is in progress (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the figure high probability is set (A7905), and step A7906 is performed. Process shifts to.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. When the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is “Y”), that is,
If the result is yes, the process moves to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

The game control device 100, when the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
Y”), that is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
.. Furthermore, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7909), the deviation symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

The game control device 100, if the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number. The stop symbol information is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4), save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per ordinary figure (A7916), and clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917).
), the number of reservations for the universal map is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the universal figure game processing timer area (A7).
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
6 is 1500 msec, and probability is 16/256, 3000 msec. Then, the process shift setting process during normal figure change is executed (A7921), and the normal day routine process ends. For example, in the universal figure changing process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number for transitioning to the universal figure changing process, and the process number is saved in the universal figure game process number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area, and the initial value (here 0) is stored in the universal figure variation symbol number area. To save.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the universal figure holding number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y"), and set "0" as the process number for shifting to the ordinary process (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the ordinary figure normal processing is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing processing, payout command transmission processing (A1311), winning a prize switch/state monitoring processing (A1307), magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1315), board radio fraud monitoring processing (A1316)
On the basis of the monitoring result in 1., processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9501). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is “N”),
It is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502).
.. When the main frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is output as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

The game control device 100, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”), or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (result of A9502 is “Y”),
The ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After the steps A9504 and A9506, the gaming control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). The determination is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is stored in the RAM by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or the like.
When the data stored in is initialized or when the setting change is completed, a predetermined time (for example, 256
msec) is set (A1044, A2419 of the main process). Then, the security signal control timer is counted from the time of RAM initialization or the end of setting change. Also,
The initial value of the security signal control timer is the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 1.
Setting change state (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) by operating 02
Is set (A1037, A2507 in the main process), the probability setting value changing flag is set, the setting is being changed (setting variable state) or the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set. The security signal may be continuously output during the confirmation state. The security signal control timer is set to 0 when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), not when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418), and the security signal is output. A configuration that terminates is also possible.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A
9509) and the process proceeds to step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A9510). It should be noted that it can be determined that the magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. When the magnet malfunction is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether the board radio wave malfunction is occurring (A9511). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

In the gaming control device 100, when the radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”)
Further, it is determined whether or not a frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the universal communication irregularity is occurring (A9513). In the case where the ordinary telephone fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the special winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). In addition, when the fraudulent-prize-winning flag is saved in the fraudulent flag area by the fraud & prize-winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the big-prize-winning fraud is occurring. When the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9515).

When the switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as the disconnection of the switch connector is occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 tests the off data of the gaming machine error status signal as a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (A9516). When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9515 is "Y"), ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet malfunction is occurring (the result of A9510 is “Y”).
)), when the board radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9511 is “Y”), when the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9512 is “Y”), and when the universal telephone irregularity is occurring ( The result of A9513 is "Y"), or when the special winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y").
Save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9517),
Save the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9518)
). Depending on the setting of on-data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After the steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (A952).
0).

Next, the game control device 100, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A9521). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is external information output data. The data is saved in the area (A9523), and the external information editing process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is not 0 (A952
If the result of 2 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-D18 of the collective display device 50.
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a light emission mode (lighting/lighting out mode) of FIG.

During the probability setting change, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure variation display game of the collective display device 50, regardless of the state of the game machine 10 at the time of power-off before power-on (game state etc.). Is displayed on the display units 51 and 52. For example, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively displays a predetermined display during the probability setting change regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 when the power is turned off. Display units 51 and 5 of the display device 50
2 can be displayed. Therefore, while the probability setting is being changed (setting change state), the probability setting is being changed by a predetermined display on the display parts 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game which are easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.

In FIG. 34A, during changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state), a predetermined special figure variation display section 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 variation display game of the collective display device 50 is provided with a predetermined value. As a display, the probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed. As described above, while the probability setting is being changed, the game machine 10 cannot perform a game (for example, a variable display game) by displaying a different display (a display different from the normal display) from the time when the fluctuation is stopped on the first special map variation display section 51. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting values are not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 is stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 uses the probability setting value display data (
A2409) or the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value,
Output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51 (LED lamp D1) in a lighting or blinking manner. Good (A1603-A1608 of output processing).

The probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variable display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the probability setting value may be displayed in a lighted or blinking state by using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

Further, even if the probability setting value is turned on or blinking by making the brightness weaker than usual so that it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value in a place away from the gaming machine 10. Good.

In FIG. 34B, the first special figure variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1
), as a predetermined display, an in-change information display (for example, the letter “P”) indicating that the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) is displayed. In this way, while changing the probability setting,
By displaying on the first special figure variation display section 51 different from that at the time of variation stop (display different from normal), it is possible to clearly show on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 cannot play. In addition, in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 is stopped, the same identification information (special symbol) as the changing information display (for example, the letter “P”) is not used. I shall.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 (A240
1 is “Y”), the process of generating the output data related to the changing information display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (the processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the changing process is being performed. The information display may be lit or blinked on the first special figure variation display section 51 (A in output processing).
1603-A1608). In addition, for example, the game control device 100, the front frame 12 (main body frame)
When the setting key switch 93 is on in the open state (the result of A1024 is “Y”),
When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 to display the changing information display on the first special figure variation display portion 51.
The (LED lamp D1) may be lit or blinked.

The changing information display may be lit or blinking on the second special figure variable display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the changing information display may be displayed as a light or blink using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the same display as the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed on the first special map variation display unit 51 as the predetermined display. .. In the present embodiment, the out-of-range result (outside pattern) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure variation display portion 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) is lit.
Thus, by displaying a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display portion 51 during the probability setting change, it can be indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. Although the RAM area is cleared to 0 upon completion of the setting change (A2418), the initial result of the data displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 is displayed by displaying the result of the deviation (deviation pattern) during the probability setting change. In some cases, the value setting (A2419) may be unnecessary.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 (A240
The result of 1 is "Y"), and a process of generating output data relating to the display of the deviation result (deviation pattern) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10). ), the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output processing). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on, the game control device 100 (the result of A1024 is “Y”).
)), when the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the third output port 13
The output data may be output to the fifth output port 136 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the disconnection result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1).

In addition, the second special figure variable display section 52 (LED for special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50)
The lamp D2) may be lit to display the result of the disconnection. Further, the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

In FIG. 34D, the first special figure variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1
), a light-off display is displayed as a predetermined display. In this way, during the probability setting change, the first special figure variation display section 51 displays a display different from that when the fluctuation is stopped (a display different from the normal display), thereby indicating that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the fluctuation stop of the 1st special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52, an extinction display shall not be used.

For example, the game control device 100, until the probability setting value has been changed after the power is turned on (power supply is restored) (the result of A2406 is “Y”), the first output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. The output data for the figure variation display section 51 may not be generated, and the turn-off display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51.

It should be noted that the second special figure variable display portion 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off and displayed. In addition, the first special map variation display section 5
The display may be turned off in both the first and second special figure variation display portions 52.

34A to 34D described above, LED lamps other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure variation display game (for example, LED lamps D3-D) are being changed during the probability setting change.
Step 18) may be turned off, or may be turned on cyclically to display an animation.

In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, while the probability setting is being changed, all the display units (that is, all the light emitting units: LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked to display a predetermined display. The all-on display or all-blinking display is displayed on the collective display device 50. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, the display different from that at the time of the fluctuation stop is displayed on the collective display device 50 (
It is possible to clearly show on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a non-playable state by performing (display different from usual).

The all-blinking display in FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and all-on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 (A240
1 is “Y”), a process of generating output data relating to the all-lit display or all-blink display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed, and all-lit display or all-blink display is collectively performed. It may be displayed on the display device 50 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag. At some time (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 to display the all-lit display or all-blinking display on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). ..

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, the performance of the gaming machine 10 around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50 (
Performance display regarding specifications) is displayed. The performance display is printed, but L
It may be displayed by light emission of an ED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As a performance display, the big hit probability display 85 at the time of low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting)
a “1/300 and 1/200”, prize ball display 85b “3 & 2 & 10 & 14”, round number upper limit display 85c “2, 6, 16”, model (official name) display 85d “CRxxx
xx", display 85e of whether or not there is a limit for the probability variation big hit (here "no limit")
Is displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of prize balls, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning opening 35,
And the number of prize balls of the special variation winning device 39 are displayed in order. The limit on the probability variation big hit means that the number of consecutive probability variation big hits is limited to a predetermined limit number (a single big hit can generate a predetermined number of limit hits (number of consecutive games). Become).

Since the big hit probability display 85a at the time of low probability is displayed only for setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in an empty area around the collective display device 50. It should be noted that the jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is displayed only for the setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is set 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting). Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

In addition, the LED lamps D1-D of the collective display device 50 are included in the jackpot probability at the time of low probability.
Those that cannot be displayed around 18 (big hit probability of settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) may be displayed outside the game area 32 in an empty area of a member different from the collective display device 50. It should be noted that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be redundantly displayed on this separate member. For example, the big hit probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed in the empty area at the upper right, lower left and upper left of the game board of FIG. 2A, the member (guide rail 31) that partitions the game area 32, and the like. May be. Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in an empty area in the game area (for example, the surface of the lower left general winning opening 35). Further, the display 85e of the presence/absence of a limit regarding the probability variation big hit is displayed as "with limit" only when there is a limit, and does not have to be displayed when there is no limit. Thus, the LED lamps D1-D1 of the collective display device 50 are
Items displayed as performance indicators around 8 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the maximum number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed in another area or the display device 41, and some or all of the items displayed as the performance display may be displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary, It does not have to be displayed.

In addition, the production control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at a low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 during the setting change, the setting confirmation, and/or the customer waiting. .. The effect control device 300 stores the jackpot probability at the time of low probability in a memory (program ROM) in advance.
321) and the like. It should be noted that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be redundantly displayed on the display device 41. To switch the jackpot probability display for each setting, use the production button 2
It may be executed by operating the operation unit such as the numeral 5 or the cross key.

35A and 35B show a predetermined display (probability set value 6 here) on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52 of the collective display device 50 while the probability setting is being changed. In the case where is displayed, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10 is shown. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who does not have the authority to change the setting from visually observing a predetermined display (especially the probability setting value) from the diagonal direction of the gaming machine 10 while changing the probability setting.

In FIG. 35(A), two recesses 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50, and the first special view variation display unit 51 and the second special view are provided in the recesses 51a and 51b, respectively. The variable display section 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35(B), an annular wall 50a (projection) that surrounds the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52 is provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display on the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure variation display portion 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Fig. 36
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the reference numeral (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003) and permit interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0.
008). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 uses the RTC (real time clock) 3 as a time measuring means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every 1 minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Further, when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). Between B and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time instead of RTC338 to execute various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time,... ), a predetermined effect may be executed. By randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the time interval. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn so that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be selected so that the larger the set value, the larger the selection rate.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and at the end of the game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the setting value increases.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 second, and the interval may be further increased.

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

The effect control device 300 also executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (a panel performance device 44, a frame performance device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory motion effect for driving the motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0021 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, the details of the received command check processing (B0014) in the above-mentioned main processing (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103
), the contents of the received command buffer in RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer into the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

And production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command to 32
It is configured to store up to individual pieces. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read in the order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines that the result of B1106 is "Y" when the copying is completed.
]), the received command content of the analysis command area is loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 37) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows the production control device 30.
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a received command analysis process executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is a MODE section (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are arranged in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part is within the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
Result of "Y"), and further, the ACTION part for the MODE part determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process of FIG. 42). And
If the MODE part indicates a variable system command (result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the big hit type command (
B1207). In addition, the big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (fanfare screen or round screen display, etc.) related to the performance during the big hit, and includes, for example, a fanfare command (set in special figure display processing), a round command (fanfare/interval). It is set in medium processing), an interval command (set in big winning opening opening processing), an ending command (set in big winning opening opening processing), and the like. When the MODE part represents a big hit type command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the big hit type command processing is executed (B1
208) and ends the received command analysis process.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the big hit system command (B1
The result of 207 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (
B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special drawing 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special drawing 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol-based command (B12
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the single-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a one-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (B12
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The read-ahead symbol system command includes the above-described read-ahead stop symbol command (see FIG. 15).
A3014). Then, when the MODE part represents a prefetching symbol type command (B
The result of 1213 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol type command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then the MODE section determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (B1215). The look-ahead variation system command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). If the MODE part indicates a prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), prefetching variable system command processing is executed (B1216).
), the received command analysis processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. When the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or the AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302) and terminates the single-shot system command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (
When the result of B1303 is “Y”), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the single-shot system command process ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command. (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (B
The result of 1307 is “N”), and then the MODE part displays the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2917).
, A3207) is represented (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), the MODE control unit next causes the MODE part to display the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2
917, A3203) is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (B1315). Examples of error/unauthorized commands include a fraud command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud occurs), fraud cancellation command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud is released), There are a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As the state on command, the glass frame open detection switch 63
From the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error/illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (
(B1316), the single-shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE section does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 then causes the MODE section to execute a command for effect mode switching (process during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents an out-ball number command. (B1319). If the MODE part indicates an out-ball number command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (B
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then the MODE part counts the command (A3107, A3).
It is determined whether or not to represent 111 special winning opening count command) (B1321). And
When the MODE part indicates a count command (result of B1321 is “Y”), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and single-shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is step A in FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery of 1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1045. Further, as described above, along with the command for ending the probability setting change in step A2421, the setting value information command is issued when the probability setting change ends.
Sent from 0. When the MODE part indicates the set value information command (B132
The result of No. 3 is "Y"), the set value reception process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process ends. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the set value information command (B
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a setting change command (A1
029), command for changing probability setting (A1041), command for changing probability setting value (A2)
415), and a command (A2421) for ending the probability setting change. Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command of the setting change instruction is received, the setting change instruction information display processing displays the setting change instruction display for prompting the player to change the setting on the display device 41. When the command for changing the probability setting is received, the setting change system information setting process displays a setting change display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command of the setting change system (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). Examples of setting confirmation commands include a command for confirming probability setting value (A2508) and a command for confirming probability setting value (A2512). And MOD
When the E section represents the command of the setting confirmation system (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability set value is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 and the symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”)
The production control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols stop (B1332), and ends the single shot system command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is set to "changing", "big hit" or "small hit" depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N
)) or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is “N”)
In effect, the production control device 300 ends the single-shot system command processing.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 40 shows the production control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading pattern system command processing performed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Rendering control device 300, after step B1602 and B1603, sets the prefetching variable system command reception waiting flag which shows that it is waiting to receive the prefetching variable system command (B160).
4). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. Then, the read-ahead symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 41 shows the production control device 30.
9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetching variable system command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variation-type command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. When waiting to receive a prefetching variable command (the result of B1701 is "
Y”), and clears the readahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board), the design of the latest pending information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2)
Of the pre-reading variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of (B1703), and the sub pre-reading variable command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part of the pre-reading variable system command (
B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the pre-read variation command ACT in the sub corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
The copy is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-sub-readahead variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT section is saved in the prefetch variable command area (special figure 1 preread variable command area or special figure 2 preread variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B170
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).
).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation-type command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half variation corresponding to the sub prefetch change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system,
Temporarily, without changing the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation.
Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or , If the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is “N”), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetching variable system command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is "Y"), the pending information of the prefetch target (latest pending information) is loaded from the prefetch variable command area (B1711), and the prefetch lottery process regarding the prefetch effect of the latest pending is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead effect include continuous notice effect (including chance eye look-ahead effect), look-ahead zone effect, and pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead notice effect (such as a notice of change in hold) occurs (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead notice effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead notice effect (such as a pending change notice) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest pending look-ahead notice effect (B171).
The result of 3 is "N"), or when the prefetching notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
When the result of B1715 is "N"), the prefetching variable system command processing is ended as it is.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 receives the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a deviating symbol or the 2R certainty variation big hit symbol (2R-A1 etc.) shown in FIG. 27, 2R normal big hit symbol (2
R-A2 etc.), 6R certainty big hit pattern (6R-A1 etc.), 6R normal big hit pattern (6R-A2)
Etc.), 16R probability variation big hit pattern (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal big hit pattern (16R-A2)
Etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

Production control device 300, the special figure type (special figure 1 of the fluctuation command which is received (fluctuation command)
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undetermined (B1901). When the special map type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (result of B1903 is "Y")
, The variable system command processing ends.

Rendering control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type is not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (fluctuation command) (B1.
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect which is the effect during change is executed (B19).
05). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Next, the special state is set to change in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. Yes (B1907
).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variation system command process (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of production points, the model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and support the MODE part of variable system commands (variable command) and the number of pending special figure types Acquire the address of the first-half notice distribution group table (B200
3). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the reachable variation, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type To obtain the address (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability set value) is set (B2007), and the variation system command The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the lottery for the notice (B2011). Then, for example, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B20).
12). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display of the variable performance such as the reach performance (B2013).
), display setting of notice production is performed (B2014). Then, hold reduction (
The display setting of (hold shift) is performed, and for example, a display in which the number of pending displays corresponding to the decorative special map that changes this time decreases is set (B2015). Next, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B
2016). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set not only based on the contents of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can change the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED) from the game machine 10
You can enjoy guessing the setting value (probability setting value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special map variation corresponding to the special drawing type (B
2017), in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). In addition,
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
2 (LED).

[Big hit type command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the big hit system command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the big hit system command is a fanfare command, a fanfare production setting process for setting a fanfare production is executed (B2102). .. The fanfare command includes information about the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state)
The fanfare is set to the game state flag indicating (B2103), and the big hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit value of the number of rounds can be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210
If the result of 4 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. The game status flag is set to be in the round (B2105, B2106), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the performance control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B21
If the result of 07 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. Set the game status flag to during the interval (B2108, B2109
), the big hit system command processing ends.

If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent the interval (B210
7 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B
When the result of 2110 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit system command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10. The ending state is set to the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received big hit command does not indicate the ending (B
If the result of 2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot system command processing without executing any processing.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 satisfies the starting condition (for example, winning at the starting winning opening).
A game control means (game control device 100) capable of displaying a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52).
When the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting regarding the game condition (or the setting regarding the game) when the game machine 10 is powered on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the power is cut off before shifting to the setting variable state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (setting change), the setting is being changed and the game machine 1 is being displayed by the predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variation display game which is easily visible from the front of the game machine 10.
It can be suggested that 0 is in a state where a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be performed.
Even in the setting variable state, the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power-off is maintained, and the normal display at the time of fluctuation stop (defeat symbol, big hit symbol) etc. is displayed on the display part for the special figure variation display game. Then, for example, if you close the front frame 12 (main frame) before completing the setting change,
There is a possibility that the player will be mistaken for being able to play the game.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) emits a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, such as a light emitting unit (for example, LED lamps D1 and D).
It can be displayed in 2). The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting units of the display device in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).
..

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly show on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the gaming machine 10 cannot play, by displaying an unusual display on the display device (collective display device 50). ..

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100), in the setting variable state (during setting change), the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display) indicating information indicating that the setting variable state. It may be displayed on the section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying a display different from the normal one on the display unit for the variable display game, the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it cannot play.
Can be clearly displayed in front of.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100), in the setting variable state (setting change), the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 5).
2) may be turned off (FIG. 34D).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the display for the variable display game is displayed differently from the normal display (display different from the time when the variable display game is stopped changing), thereby causing the gaming machine 10 to operate.
It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the game cannot be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (disappearance result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) in the setting variable state (for example, , May be displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52) (FIG. 34C).

Therefore, by displaying a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to suggest in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) while the setting is being changed, the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game is initially set at the end of the setting change. No need to set values.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

The first embodiment relates to a chance eye look-ahead effect (a chance eye look-ahead notice) based on a missing pattern. It is possible to select or select a chance eye that is a specific stop result mode (specific off-stop pattern mode) of the decorative special figure variation display game according to a set value (probability set value), and suggest or notify the set value by the chance eye enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
A stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 shows the effect control device 30 in the change effect setting process (FIG. 44) when the special figure change display game is executed.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of stop design setting processing (B2012) performed by 0. In the stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure variation display game related to the variation command received is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B2301 is "Y"), a big hit stop symbol ("2" according to the symbol type (B1802)
, 2, 2”, etc.) is randomly selected (B2302).

When the special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the number of pre-reading effects (remaining number of continuous notification effects) of the chance eye pre-reading effect as continuous notification effect to 0. It is determined whether there is any (B2303). If the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous announcement effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is “Y”), step B2308
Process shifts to. The initial value of the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) depends on the expectation of the big hit of the pre-reading target, that is, the expectation of the big hit of the special figure variation display game executed by the holding of the pre-reading target. You may set it.

Production control device 300, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of times of continuous notice production remaining) is not 0 (the result of B2303 is "N"), the chance eye stop symbol mode (chance eye mode, miss symbol group) is pre-reading target. It is set according to the expected degree of the big hit of the hold (B2304). The chance eye stop pattern mode is a normal mode in which a set value cannot be suggested or notified, a special mode in which a set value can be suggested (setting suggestive mode), and a definite mode in which a set value can be definitely notified. (Setting notification mode) (see FIG. 47).

For example, when the special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the hold (starting memory) of the prefetch target, the chance eye stop symbol aspect is set to the normal aspect, and the special 2 reach (SP2 reach) Can be set to the special mode when the occurrence of "3" occurs, and can be set to the fixed mode when the special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs. As described above, the expectation level (expected value) of the big hit is in the order of SP1 reach<SP2 reach<SP3 reach, so that the chance eye stop symbol aspect can be set according to the expectation degree of the big hit of the pre-reading target. In addition,
On the contrary, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure variable display game related to the hold of the prefetch target, the chance stop symbol design mode is set to the normal mode, and when the SP2 reach occurs, the special mode is set to the special mode, and the SP3 reach is set. When the occurs, the confirmation mode may be set.

As described above, by setting the chance eye stop symbol pattern in correspondence with the reach type (reach effect system) of the prefetch target hold, the chance eye stop symbol pattern is determined according to the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target hold. Can be set. Therefore, the expectation level of the big hit of the pre-reading target can be notified as the pre-reading effect by the chance eye stop symbol mode. The reach type generated in the special figure variable display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target is a prefetch variable system command (B121
It can be understood from the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern command and variation effect (B2010) as 5).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (setting related effect) that suggests or notifies the setting value (B2305). Chance eye stop pattern mode is a normal mode, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is “N”), the deviation stop pattern regardless of the setting value from the normal mode off pattern mode (off pattern group) Lottery (B2
306), the stop symbol setting process ends. When the chance eye stop symbol mode is a special mode or a fixed mode and the setting suggestive effect is executed (the result of B2305 is "Y"), if it is a special mode, the special pattern is out of the special pattern (outside pattern group). With the lottery probability according to the set value, the deviation stop symbol is selected by lottery, and if it is the confirmation mode, the deviation symbol is determined from the deviation symbol mode (defect symbol group) of the confirmation mode according to the set value (B2307). ..

Production control device 300, when the number of pre-reading productions (the remaining number of continuous notice productions) is 0 (the result of B2303 is “Y”), executes the setting suggestion production (setting related production) that suggests or informs the set value. It is determined whether or not to perform (B2308). For example, if you win a lottery,
It may be determined to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (B2308
The result is "N"), and the stop symbols are randomly selected regardless of the set value (B2309). When executing the setting suggestion effect (the result of B2308 is “Y”), the deviation stop symbol is selected by lottery with the selection probability according to the set value (B2310). In this way, even when the number of prefetch effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is 0 and the chance eye prefetch effect is not executed (the result of B2303 is “Y”), the setting suggestion effect is independent of the chance eye prefetch effect. I can do it.

Note that the processes from steps B2308 to B2310 are optional and may not be executed.

[Chance eye stop pattern mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance eye prefetching effect. The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a confirmation mode (setting notification mode).

In the out-of-order symbol mode (outside symbol group) of the normal mode, for example, "2,4,6" (blue), "1,5,9" (green), "3,7,7" (red) is out There is a stop pattern. For the out-of-specification pattern aspect (outside symbol group) of the special mode, for example, "2, 4, 6" (green),
There are detachment stop symbols of "1, 5, 9" (red) and "3, 7, 7" (blue). In the out-of-confirmation pattern mode (outside pattern group) of the fixed mode, "○, 1, 1""○, 2, regardless of color
There is a detachment stop design of 2", "○, 3, 3", "○, 4, 4", "○, 5, 5", "○, 6, 6". It should be noted that ◯ indicates an arbitrary symbol different from the two symbols (doublet) that are aligned in the middle and right of the three decorative identification symbols (identification information) in the left and right.

It should be noted that the deviating stop pattern of the finalized mode (setting notification mode) has a color (for example, gold, iridescent color other than blue, green, and red) or shape that is not used in the normal mode and the special mode, You may distinguish so that it may become easy.

In the normal mode, the selection rate (distribution rate) in the lottery for each out-of-stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expectation) of each setting is the same when one out-of-stop symbol in the normal mode is selected (100/6≈17%).
Becomes The probability of FIG. 47 is the degree of expectation of each set value that can be estimated by the player when a specific out-of-stop symbol is displayed. Therefore, the normal mode is a mode in which the player cannot estimate the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value cannot be suggested or notified. Note that FIG.
In the example, the selection ratio of the out-of-order stop symbols in the normal mode in one lottery is 100/
It is 3 (≈33.3)%.

In the special mode, the selection ratio in the lottery for each out-of-stop symbol is determined to be different depending on the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expectation) of each setting when one out-of-stop symbol of a special mode is selected is different (may be the same for some settings).
.. Therefore, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be suggested.

In the confirmation mode, the selection rate in the lottery for each out-of-stop symbol is set to 100% only for one predetermined setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
When one out-of-stop symbol is selected, the probability (expected degree) of one predetermined setting is 10
It becomes 0%, and the probability (expected degree) of other settings becomes 0%. Therefore, the confirmed mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be definitely notified.

It should be noted that the three decorative identification patterns in the special mode can suggest the setting value by having a specific color. For example, the normal stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) is
I can't suggest the set value. However, in the special mode, the disengagement stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) and the special part in which the dissimilarity stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (green) is the same as the numeral part are different,
The setting value can be suggested by having a specific color (green). The three decorative identification patterns in the special mode may have a specific shape to suggest the set value.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting the chance eye stop symbol aspect (chance eye aspect, outlier symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance-stop symbol design mode is set by lottery with different selection rates (assignment rates) depending on whether the special figure variation display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target is a big hit or a big hit. Therefore, similarly to the case where the chance eye stop symbol mode is set corresponding to the hold type of the prefetch target, in the example of FIG. 48 as well, the chance of stopping the prefetch target is a big hit depending on the chance eye stop symbol mode. The degree of expectation can be reported. Whether or not the pre-reading target is a big hit or a big hit is determined by the symbol type (B18
02).

As shown in FIG. 48(A), the expectation level for the jackpot of the pre-reading object may be increased in the order of normal mode<special mode<determined mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the expectation of the jackpot of the pre-reading target may be increased in the order of the determined mode <special mode <normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48(B), even if the confirmation mode or the special mode is selected and the player recognizes that the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target is small, the setting (setting value) is determined by the confirmation mode. The player will not be discouraged because the information is notified.

If the selection rates of the normal mode, the special mode, and the final mode of FIG. 48 are set to be the same as the selection rates of SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, as described above, the special figure variation display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target is achieved. This is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the fixed mode corresponding to the case where SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach occur.

In addition, according to the number of big hits from turning on the power of the game machine 10 or the start of the game, the number of consecutive big hits from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal game state (the number of consecutive chan), and the operating time of the game machine 10 increases. A configuration in which the selection rate of the confirmation mode is increased is also possible. Since the confirmation mode is a privilege for the player, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased by this configuration.

As described above, the chance eye stop symbol mode is associated with the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target, and the chance stop symbol of the chance eye stop symbol mode (particularly the special mode, the fixed mode) is randomly selected according to the set value. it can. As a result, the out-of-stop symbol is drawn by the result (big hit or out) of the special figure variation display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target, and the probability (selection rate) according to the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
49A and 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the second embodiment.

FIG. 49A(A) shows a display screen during execution of the decorative special figure variable display game. The variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the ornament reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 615. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number. The indicated number “0” is displayed.

The hold display unit 630 (starting memory display unit) displays a first starting memory as a first holding display (first starting memory display), and a second holding memory displays a second holding display (first holding display). (2 start memory display). First hold display section 630a
Two hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display. The second hold display unit 630b does not currently display the hold display 633. In addition, the reserved digestion area 64 in a rectangular frame
0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. A pending change display 633a indicating a hold (starting memory that was the right to execute the special figure change display game) relating to the special figure change display game being executed,
It is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

After that, in (a), a hold (first starting memory) is generated due to the winning in the start winning opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the generated hold is changed from the normal mode by the hold change notice ( The color is changed to a pending display. Then, the chance eye pre-reading effect (continuous notice effect) is set with the generated hold having a high expectation of a big hit as the pre-reading target hold (B1712, B1716). Further, the number is increased to "3" indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation number display portion 650.

Then, in (c), the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the first chance chance look-ahead effect is executed with the display of the off-stop symbol "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode. .. Here, in order to let the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect, all or part of the deviation stop symbol may be blinked. The changing pending display 633a is erased at the end of the decorative special figure variable display game. In the normal mode, the player cannot estimate the setting (setting value).

After that, in (d), the next decorative special figure variation display game is in execution. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display portion 630a is displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. Further, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation number display portion 650 is reduced to “2”.

Then, in (e), the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the second chance eye look-ahead effect is the special mode (setting suggestion mode) of the stop stop symbols “1, 5, 9” (red). Run on display. Here, in order to let the player recognize that it is the chance eye look-ahead effect, all or part of the discontinuation stop symbol may be blinked. With the special mode of the out-of-stop symbol, the setting (setting value) is suggested, and the player can estimate the setting (setting value) (according to FIG. 47, the probability is setting 4 is high).

After that, in (F), the next decorative special figure variation display game is in execution. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display portion 630a is displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number in the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650 is reduced to “1”.

Then, in (B) of FIG. 49B, the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the third chance eye prefetching effect is the final stop pattern “1, 6, 6” of the finalized mode (setting notification mode). Run on display. Here, in order to let the player recognize that it is the chance eye look-ahead effect, all or part of the discontinuation stop symbol may be blinked. The setting (setting value) is definitively notified by the deviation stop design of the setting mode, and the player can recognize the setting (setting value) (setting 6 is set according to FIG. 47).

Further, in the case of the confirmation mode, the dialogue 635 as a character image may be displayed. The serif 635 is selected according to the setting (setting value) determined by the out-of-determination stop design in the determination mode. For example, when the setting 6 (setting value 6) is confirmed in the deviation stop design “○, 6, 6” like (ki), “Congratulations!” is displayed, but the deviation stop design “○, 1” , 1” to confirm the setting 1 (setting value 1), “sorry” may be displayed.

Thereafter, in (H), the next decorative special figure variation display game is in execution due to the hold of the prefetch target. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold digestion area 640
The reservation display 633 (black) of the prefetch target at the right end of the first reservation display unit 630a is moved to. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number in the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650 is decreased to “0”.

After that, in (K), the decoration special figure variation display game ends, the variation pending display 633a is erased, and the jackpot stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed. And in (ko),
The jackpot round starts as a special game state.

Regarding the above screen transition, the dialogue as the character image may be displayed even in the special mode of (e) of FIG. 49A. The serif may be selected according to the special mode out-of-stop symbol. In addition, a configuration that suggests the setting is also possible by combining the serif and the special mode disengagement stop symbol. For example, in the combination of the detachment stop symbol “1,5,9” (red) and the serif “Congratulations!”, the probability of setting 6 (setting value 6) is increased, and the detachment stop symbol “1,5”.
, 9” (red) and the serif “sorry”, the probability of being setting 1 (setting value 1) may be increased.

Further, with respect to the screen transition of FIG. 49 described above, all or a part of the deviation stop symbol may be blinked conspicuously only when the deviation mode stop symbol in the confirmed mode is displayed. Furthermore, FIG.
In the above, the chance eye stop symbol aspect in the three chance eye look-ahead effects is made different every time, but the chance eye stop symbol aspect may be made the same every time. And this same aspect is
You may decide according to the expectation degree of the big hit of the hold of a prefetch target.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 satisfies the starting condition (for example, winning at the starting winning opening).
On the display device 41, a variable display game (decorative special symbol variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbol) is provided on the display device 41 (effect control device 300). When the stop result mode is the special result mode (big hit result mode), a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting (setting value) related to the game condition. The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store the start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. The advance determination means (for example, the game control device 100) executes the variable display game execution information regarding the starting memory (for example, the variable display game) before the variable display game based on the starting memory stored by the starting storage means is executed. (The result of (1), the variation pattern, etc.) are determined before the variation display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines whether the stop result mode of the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) is not the special result mode (big hit result mode). By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode or a final mode), it is possible to execute the notice effect (chance prefetch effect, chance prefetch notice) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. Furthermore, production control means (production control device 300)
Can execute a setting-related effect (setting suggestion effect) that suggests or notifies a setting (setting value) by using the specific stop result mode (for example, special mode, final mode).

Therefore, in the notice production based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, it is possible to suggest or inform the setting (setting value), so that the player not only estimates whether or not to be a big hit but also sets (setting value). Can be guessed, and the notice production can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, in the notice production, even when the expectation of a big hit is low, the player has more fun in guessing the setting (setting value), and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting-related effect by having a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) of a specific stop result mode have a specific color. .. Therefore, the player also pays attention to the color of the identification information (decoration special symbol) of the stop result mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines a plurality of pieces of identification information (disappearance stop symbols) of a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a final mode) as the specific stop result mode. Select when executing the variable display game to be derived (FIG. 43, FIG. 44, FIG. 46)
.. Therefore, a plurality of pieces of identification information (offset stop symbols) can be selected when the variable display game is executed, not at the time of pre-determination, and the load of processing (control) at the time of pre-determination is reduced.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[Back side of game machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the game control device 100 (main board) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that controls the game comprehensively via a switch base 738 is arranged, and the game control device 100 via a control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 that controls the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command (effect command) transmitted from the device is provided. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 that covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper part of the back surface of the game control device 100.
Is provided. When the game board 30 configured in this way is stored in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 project rearward of the front frame 12. To do.

A storage unit 750 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility and arranges the stored game balls to flow down on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12
Is provided. A payout unit 790 for paying out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12.

In addition, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on the data transmitted from the game control device 100, and a game ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24 are provided on the lower back surface of the front frame 12. A ball launch device 742 for launching, a connection terminal 743 for connecting to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are provided.

Further, on the lower back surface of the game control device 100, a setting key switch 93 (key switch) and a setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button switch) of a setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) capable of changing settings relating to game conditions. , Button switch) and a 7-segment type probability set value display device 143 (display unit, LED lamp). As described above, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10, and cannot be operated (accessed) without opening the front frame 12, for example. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting changing device 42, and cannot confirm the display of the probability setting value display device 143. Further, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided in the gaming machine 10.
Since it is provided inside, it is not concealed (overlapping) by the initial operation of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a described later.

The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided at a position where it is not hidden by the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a, 44b or the external accessory 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front surface of the game board 30, for example. Further, when the probability set value is visibly displayed from the front of the game board 30, the display (LED lamp) of the collective display device 50 may be used as the probability set value display device 143, and the display device 41. May be used as the probability setting value display device 143. Further, even when the probability setting value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front surface of the game board 30 in this manner, it is preferable that only the operator can see the probability set value display device 143 without being visible to the player. For example, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the operator performing a specific operation on the effect button 25. Moreover, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the player using a special member (for example, a polarization filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, the setting change device 42 is supposed to be accessible when the front frame 12 is opened. However, the setting change device 42 is provided on the front face of the game board 30, the display device 41, or the like, and the operator performs a specific operation or the like. It may be operable.

In addition, the character ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152 that displays the character ratio described later in FIG. 78(A) may be used as the probability set value display device 143, or as the probability set value display device 143. When the accessory ratio display unit 68 of 152 is used, four 7-segment types (8-segment type including the dot portion) of the accessory ratio display unit 68 during setting change or setting confirmation.
The probability setting value may be displayed on any one of the indicators 900 (for example, the indicator 900 at the left end or the right end). The character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display portion 68 except when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Therefore, the accessory ratio display portion 68 can be used together to display the accessory ratio and the set value.

Further, a cover member may be provided so as to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93. By providing the cover member in this way, it is possible to prevent an operation of the setting key switch 93 by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who commits an illegal operation, and the crime prevention effect can be enhanced. further,
When the cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. By inputting the detection signal from the detection sensor to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. .. For example, when the front frame 12 is closed but the cover member does not cover the front of the setting key switch 93, the game control device 100 notifies the display device 41 and the speaker 19 of an error.
It is possible to take crime prevention measures and fraud measures by using a LED, a lamp, or the like.

[Production control device according to third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) according to the third embodiment will be described. 51 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

In the production control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, a movable body control circuit 334a is provided instead of the board production movable body control circuit 334, so that the production control device 300 of the first embodiment ( (See FIG. 4).

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46.
And a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like).
In addition, a movable body control circuit 334a is provided.

The movable body control circuit 334a drives and controls the board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the frame effect device 9 provided in the glass frame 15.
5 is controlled.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the board effect device 44 includes internal accessory parts 44a and 44b (inner movable member) that enhance the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52A is a front view when the board effect device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment operates.

The internal accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is housed on the back surface of the center case 40 so as not to be seen by the player, and is located in front of the display device 41 by the moving operation and covers the upper side of the display device 41. .. The character "intense heat" is drawn on the internal accessory 44a to notify that the expectation of a big hit is particularly high. Similarly, the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 is located in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the lower left side of the display device 41. In addition, the character "♪" is drawn on the internal accessory 44b to inform that the expectation of a big hit is high. A voice may be generated from the speaker as the internal accessory 44b moves.

In addition, the effect control device 300, in the advance notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. 44, if the internal accessory items 44a and 44b are selected and operated at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value, the set value is set. Can be suggested. And the player has more fun guessing the set value,
The interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external accessory 95a (outer movable member), a motor (not shown), and the like that cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect.

FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame production device 95 of the glass frame 15 (opening part) according to the third embodiment operates.

The external accessory 95a of the frame rendering device 95 is housed inside the glass frame 15 so as not to be seen by the player, and is driven by the frame rendering device 95 to become a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15. Project. On the external accessory 95a, a character 95b for notifying that the expectation of a big hit is high is drawn. The frame effect device 95 is not limited to the glass frame 15, but the front frame 1
2 may be provided.

Note that the effect control device 300 can suggest the set value by causing the external accessory 95a to be selected by lottery at a selection rate (probability) corresponding to the set value in the advance notice lottery in steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. .. Then, the player has more fun in guessing the set value, and the interest of the game is improved.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes the movable body control process in order to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable object control circuit 334a.

[Movable body control processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of movable body control processing according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B3001). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power is being restored.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B3001 is “
N"), the normal control process according to the effect contents set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like is started (B3003). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is on (the result of B3001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (B3002).

It is determined that the command whose probability setting is being changed is received when the MODE part indicates the setting changing system by the command whose probability setting is being changed in the one-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is “Y”). To be done. That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened (result of A1023 or A1027 of FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42.
When is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is “Y”), the command during the probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A in FIG. 5B).
1041). By pressing the set value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 while changing the probability setting, the set value regarding the game condition is changed. In addition, the information of the set value regarding the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (the result of B3002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for ending the probability setting change is received ( B3004).

The probability setting change end command is a command in the single shot system processing (FIG. 39), and when the MODE part indicates the setting change system by the probability setting change end command (the result of B1325 is “Y”),
It is determined that it is being received. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (A2406 in FIG. 10).
Result of "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A2416 is "Y"), the command of probability setting change end is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 30.
0 (A2421).

On the other hand, if the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed is not received (the result of B3002 is “N”), that is, when the power is normally turned on, a mainframe opening error occurs. It is determined whether or not it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a status ON command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error/illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that the body frame opening error is occurring.

When the production control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has been received (
When the result of B3004 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting change is completed, it is determined whether or not a mainframe opening error is occurring (B3006). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B3004 is “N”).
), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, only the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b start the initial operation control process (B3005).

In the initial operation control processing (B3005) of the internal accessory products 44a and 44b, for example, the motors that move the internal accessory product 44a and the motors that operate the internal accessory product 44b of the board rendering device 44 are driven to drive the internal accessory products 44a and 44b, respectively. Is operated in front of the display device 41, and then control is performed to operate to the initial position (initial operation control). Further, for example, after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a is completed, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b is performed. In this way, the internal accessory 44
The initial operation control of a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b are sequentially executed. In the case where another internal accessory different from the internal accessories 44a and 44b is further attached, similarly, the initial operation control of each internal accessory is sequentially executed. The initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b may be simultaneously executed in parallel.

When the production control device 300 determines that the main frame opening error is occurring (the result of B3006 is “Y”), that is, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open, the internal accessory is Initial operation control processing is started only for 44a and 44b (B3005). In this way, the effect control device 300 starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b when the setting changing device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, and the external effect part 300. It functions as a restricting means that restricts the initial operation of the object 95a so that it is not executed.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error is not occurring (B3
When the result of 006 is “N”), that is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed, the restriction of the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory are removed. Thing 95a
The initial operation control process is started (B3007).

In the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a, the internal accessory 44a, 44b of the board effect device 44 performs the same initial operation control as the processing of B3005. In the external accessory 95a of the frame production device 95, a motor for moving the external accessory 95a is driven to cause the external accessory 95a to project from above the glass frame 15 (opening portion), and then to the initial position. Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). In this way, the production control device 300 functions as a control unit that controls the operations of the internal accessory products 44a and 44b and the external accessory product 95a. In addition, when another external accessory different from the external accessory 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external accessory 95a and the initial operation control of the other external accessory are sequentially executed.

Further, in the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal accessories 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a, the external accessory 95a takes a longer time to control the initial operations of the internal accessories 44a, 44b having a larger number of movable accessories. It takes longer than the initial operation control time. In addition, regardless of the number of movable accessory parts, even when there are a plurality of effect modes of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b and the operation becomes complicated, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b is shorter than that of the external accessory parts. It takes longer than the time required for the initial operation control of the object 95a. In addition, the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (
Between the open part) (for example, the intermediate position between the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a),
For example, when a movable accessory that moves toward the center of the gaming machine 10 is provided, it is desirable to perform initial operation control on the movable accessory as in the case of the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front face frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened, the initial operation of the movable accessory is restricted and is not executed similarly to the initial operation of the external accessory 95a.

In addition, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened, the initial action of the external accessory 95a is restricted so as not to be executed, but the external accessory 95a (first rendering unit, first effect unit) Only the initial operation of the entire movable member) is restricted, that is, without performing the initial operation of the entire external accessory 95a,
Other than the initial movement, the operation mode (for example, vibration or swing) of the movable member (the second effect part, the second movable member, the character 95b) of the external accessory 95a or the light emitting member (the second effect part, the second movable member). The initial mode such as the light emission mode of () (for example, the eyes (LED) of the character 95b emits light) may be executable. That is, such a second effect unit can switch the effect mode to the initial mode in the initial state before the predetermined operation (normal operation) of the second effect unit. In this way, the external accessory 95a allows the second effect part to be provided inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main part) even when the initial operation of the first effect part is restricted and is not executed. Can be performed in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54A and FIG. 54B, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the front frame open detection switch 6
When the signal 4 (main body frame open detection switch) is turned on, the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a is started. Before the power is turned on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, but since the game control device 100 and the like are not operating, probability setting is performed until the power is turned on. The signal of the value changing flag and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Further, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). The initial operation of the external accessory 95a is restricted and is not executed.

The probability setting value changing flag is set in the main process (FIG. 5B) (A1038).
, And the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set in the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11) (A2505) to be turned on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2 in FIG. 11).
508). Moreover, when the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state on command indicating a main frame opening error (front frame opening error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

When the change of the probability setting value by the operator is completed at time T2 (A2414, A24 in FIG. 10).
15), the probability setting value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.
In the embodiment, it is assumed that the probability setting value changing flag is turned off and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is turned on when the change of the probability setting value is completed. As in the first embodiment, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag may be omitted and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

Then, by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time T3, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared and turned off (A2510 in FIG. 11).

At time t1 after time T3, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44a is completed, and thus the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44b is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53).

In this embodiment, the time required for the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a (initial operation time) is the same, but they may be different. For example, the initial operation time of the internal accessory 44a, 44b, which tends to be a complicated operation mode, is determined by the external accessory 9
It may be longer than the initial operation time of 5a. Moreover, the effect control device 300 increases the motor output to increase the speed of the initial operation of the internal accessory products 44a and 44b.
The initial operation time of b may be shorter than the initial operation time of the external accessory 95a.

When the front frame 12 (main frame) is closed at time T4, the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is turned off, and the state off command (A2204) indicating that the main frame open error has not occurred. ) Is an error/unauthorized command as an effect control device 300
Sent to. Then, the restriction of the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is executed (B3007 in FIG. 53). As described above, in the initial operation control process of this embodiment, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is not executed when the front frame 12 is opened.

At time t2 after time T4, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b ends. As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is
The process starts before the initial operation control process for the external accessory 95a and ends before the initial operation control process for the external accessory 95a.

After that, at time t3, the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a ends, and thus the gaming machine 1
You can play with 0.

Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. The probability setting value changing flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 of the comparative example are also from the time T1 to the time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. It is turned off.

Here, the internal accessory 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at time T1. The control process is executed. Therefore, the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a of the comparative example.
The initial operation control process of is started at the same timing (time T4).

After that, at time t3, when the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a ends, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is the time at which the game can be played on the gaming machine 10 according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

Then, at time t4, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44b ends, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also play a game. Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time at which the game can be played is later than that of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

The internal accessory parts 44a and 44b of the present embodiment perform the initial operation control process by being turned on at time T1, but when the front frame 12 is closed at time point T4, the external accessory parts 95a.
An internal accessory that executes the initial operation control process at the same timing as may be provided. For example, the operation mode of a movable member (internal accessory) that influences the game, such as the opening/closing door 39c of the special winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, may be changed according to the set value. Is
After the set value is set, the initial operation control process may be executed according to the operation mode of the set value. By executing the initial operation control process after the set value is set in this way, movable members that affect the game (opening/closing door 39c of the special winning opening or movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37,
It is possible to confirm whether the movable member that opens and closes the V winning opening (predetermined region) operates normally according to the operation mode of the set value. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variation winning device 39. When a game ball enters the V winning opening, the V winning is notified and the big hit ends. A later probability change state (one of a high probability state, a specific game state, and a predetermined game state) is determined. In addition, the initial operation control processing of the movable member that affects the game like this,
It may be executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4 but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. Furthermore, the initial operation control process of the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at time T2 is completed.

In addition, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened for a command whose probability setting is being changed (A1 in FIG. 5A).
The result of 023 or A1027 is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is “Y”).
00 is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), but it may be transmitted by turning on the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42 regardless of the open state of the front frame 12. Good. Further, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the command for changing the probability setting may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on or when the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (a command during the probability setting changing is transmitted. State) The probability setting value may be changed to a variable setting state, and the probability setting value may be confirmed by setting the probability setting value confirmation mode flag in this variable setting state. When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the operations of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b and the external accessory object 95a may both be restricted so as not to be executed, or may be returned to the initial position. .. It should be noted that, as in the case where the command during the change of the probability setting of the present embodiment is transmitted, when the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is executed. On the other hand, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Operation/Effect of Third Embodiment]
The game machine 10 having an openable frame (for example, the glass frame 15 or the front frame 12 (main body frame)) in which the game board 30 having the game area 32 according to the third embodiment is arranged is predetermined inside the frame. The inner movable member (internal accessory 44a, 44b) that executes the operation of the above, the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) that performs the predetermined operation outside the frame, and the setting related to the game is changed by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Possible setting changing means (setting changing device 42) and control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are provided. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member by turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, and can change the setting when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. When in the state, the initial operation of the inner movable member can be executed without executing the initial operation of the outer movable member.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the control means (production control device 300) is in a state where the setting can be changed when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (for example, the setting changing means). Is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is turned on) or the frame is opened), the initial operation of the outer movable member is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame when operating the setting changing means or opening and closing the frame, so that the initial operation of the movable member is appropriately performed in the gaming machine. Can be run to

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability set value display device 143) capable of displaying a set value corresponding to the setting related to the game. The setting display device is provided at a position that is not hidden by the initial operation of the inner movable member (internal accessory 44a, 44b) and the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, so that the operation of the operator is prevented from being interrupted. it can.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (production control device 300) releases the restriction on the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) when the state in which the setting can be changed ends. It is possible. According to such a gaming machine 10, when operating the setting changing means,
It is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame when the frame is opened and closed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control unit (production control device 300) takes a time longer than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) to move the inner movable member (internal). The initial operation of the accessory 44a, 44b) is executed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the inner movable member, which takes a long time for the initial operation control, is started during the probability setting change, and the initial operation of the outer movable member, which takes a short time for the initial operation control, It is started by closing the frame (front frame 12, body frame) after the probability setting is changed. Therefore, compared with the case where the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member is started at the same time after the frame is closed, the time-consuming initial operation of the inner movable member can be started in advance, so that the game can be started. It is possible to shorten the time until.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, is the control means (effect control device 300) operating the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) even when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on? Alternatively, when the frame (front frame 12, body frame) is opened, a regulation unit (production control device 300) that regulates the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) is provided. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the outer movable member does not move while the probability setting is being changed or the frame is opened, it is possible to suppress the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. ..

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an opening portion (glass frame 15) that is openably and closably attached to the main body (front frame 12, main frame). The gaming machine 10 includes a first effecting unit (external accessory 95a and a first movable member) that performs a predetermined operation outside the opening unit, and a setting changing unit (setting) that can change the setting related to the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Change device 42), and a control unit (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the first effect unit. The first effect unit has a second effect unit (a character 95b, a second movable member) capable of switching the effect mode in an initial state before performing a predetermined operation (normal operation). The control means can execute the initial mode of the second effect unit and the initial operation of the first effect unit by turning on the power of the game machine 10, and change the setting when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. If it is possible, the first
The initial mode of the second effect unit can be executed without executing the initial operation of the effect unit. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second effect unit (the character 95b, the second movable member), which is less likely to come into contact with the operator or interfere with the frame, is changed to the first effect unit (the external accessory 95a, the second effect member 95a). (1 movable member) can be initialized in an initial manner prior to the initial operation of (1 movable member).

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value.

[Process when setting value is received]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the setting value reception process (B1324) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 39) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process at the time of receiving the set value according to the fourth embodiment.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4001). When the command is not a normal command (result of B4001 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is ended. If it is a normal command (result of B4001 is “Y”), the set value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, the effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value in order to perform the setting suggesting effect that can suggest the setting value with the predetermined light emitting unit (B4003). .. The predetermined light emitting unit is
For example, in the projection effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1), the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is
It becomes a setting discriminating element that allows the player to estimate the setting (setting value). It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting unit (production device) is not limited to the projecting production unit 13, and can emit light members (frame decoration device 18, decoration device 22, board decoration device 46, special winning opening LED 39d, etc.) and display device 41. The display screen of can be used.

[Lottery table for initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selection rate of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect that is randomly selected by the effect control device 300 when the setting value is received will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of the setting suggestive effect of the fourth embodiment (determining the initial color).

As shown in FIG. 56, the initial color of the setting suggestive effect is selected from, for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and is set according to the received setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). The selection rate and selectable types change.

First, it will be described that the type of the selectable initial color changes according to the received setting value. When the received set values are the settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestive effect is selected from white, blue, and green. On the other hand, if the received set value is setting 4, green can be selected as an initial color, if setting 5 is green and red can be selected, and in setting 6, all types are selected. It will be possible. Therefore, the player sets the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 to be 4 or more when it is green, 5 or more when it is red, and is set when it is rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the initial color selected in the lottery changes according to the received setting value.

When the received setting value is the setting 1, the initial color has a white selection rate of 80%, the blue selection rate of 15%, and the yellow selection rate of 5%. Then, the selection rate of white as the initial color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, etc., such that the selection rate becomes lower as the received set value becomes higher. .. In the present embodiment, the white selection rate is set to decrease by 5% each time the received set value increases by one, but a certain set value range (for example, setting 4 to 6) Then, they may be set to be the same. Thus, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of white as the initial color. Therefore, when the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of a predetermined light emitting unit is white, the gaming machine concerned. It is easy to estimate that 10 is likely to be a low setting stand.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the initial color is 5% in the setting 1 and 10 in the setting 2.
%, and 15% in the case of the settings 3 to 6, so that the selection rate becomes higher as the received set value becomes higher. Note that, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of yellow in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

In addition, the selection rates of the initial colors (green, red) that can be selected by setting 4 or 5 and the initial colors (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected by setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a color other than white will be selected as the initial color. Therefore, when the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit is other than white, It is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is highly likely to be a high setting table.

The selection rate of each initial color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 56, and the value may be changed as appropriate. For example,
The rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selection rates of the other colors are appropriately adjusted so that the overall selection rate becomes 100% according to the change of the rainbow selection rate.

[Fanfare production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare production setting process (B2102) in the above-described big hit system command process (FIG. 45) will be described as a mode in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fanfare effect setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4101 is “N”), the fanfare effect setting process ends. If the command is normal (B4
When the result of 101 is “Y”), the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (B
4103). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4104), and sets the fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4105). The predetermined number of times is 3, 6, 9...
Can be set for each multiple of a specific value (for example, 3). The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, for example, every odd number of times (1 time, 3 times...) or every integer number of times (2 times, 4 times...
) Or a specific number sequence (for example, a Fibonacci number sequence of 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13...).

On the other hand, when the number of jackpots is not the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “N”),
The effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the set value (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. After that, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotion lottery table for light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, regarding the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) in the promotion (step-up) of the setting suggestive production determined by the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process at the time of starting the big hit explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining a light emission mode by promotion lottery (promotion lottery color determination) of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment. Figure 5
8A is a table for determining a promotion lottery color when the current color of a predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58B is a table for determining a promotion lottery color when the current color is blue. is there.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white is, for example, no promotion (continuation of white), blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow It is selected from six types, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current set value (settings 1 to 6).

First, a description will be given of how the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current set values are the settings 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestive effect is selected from no promotion, blue, and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can be selected as the promotion lottery color, if setting value 5, both green and red can be selected, and in the case of setting 6, all types can be selected. It becomes selectable. Therefore, the player has a setting of 4 or more when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, a setting of 5 or more when the promotion drawing color is red, and a setting of 5 when the rainbow is a rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected in the lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (continuation of white) is 8 as the promotion lottery color.
0%, blue selectivity is 15%, and yellow selectivity is 5%. Then, the selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, etc., so that the selection rate becomes lower as the current set value becomes higher. To be done. In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease in 5% increments each time the current set value increases by one. However, a certain set value range (for example, settings 4 to 6) is set. ), they may be set to be the same.
Thus, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (continuation of white) as the promotion lottery color, so that the player is in a state where the promotion lottery color of a predetermined light emitting unit is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the gaming machine 10 is playing, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a low setting table.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 10% in the case of setting 2, and 15% in the cases of setting 3 to 6, and the current setting value is high. The higher the selection rate, the higher the selection rate. Note that, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of yellow in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

Further, the selection rates of the promotion lottery colors (green, red) that can be selected in the setting 4 or the setting 5 and the promotion lottery colors (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected in the setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. .. Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a non-promotion (white continuation) will be selected as the promotion lottery color. Therefore, the player may change the promotion lottery color of a predetermined light emitting part during the game by promotion. By confirming that the gaming machine 10 is playing, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be a platform with a high setting. In addition, since it is possible to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a high setting table by the promotion lottery, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Subsequently, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue is shown in FIG.
As shown in B), for example, it is selected from five types of no promotion (blue continuation), yellow, green, red, and rainbow,
As in the case where the current color is white as described above, the selection rate and the selectable types change according to the current setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6).

First, a description will be given of how the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. If the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, either no promotion or yellow is selected as the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestive effect. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can be selected as the promotion lottery color, and in the case of setting 4 or setting 5, both red and green can be selected, and in the case of setting 6, All types can be selected. Therefore, the player has setting 3 or more when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, and setting 4 when it is red.
The above is the case, and it can be estimated that the setting is 6 when it is a rainbow.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected in the lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) is 9 as the promotion lottery color.
5%, and the yellow selectivity becomes 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% in the case of setting 2 or setting 3, 75% in the case of setting 4, and the selection rate decreases as the current set value increases. Is set as follows. In this embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to the same value or decreases each time the current set value increases by one. In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) as the promotion lottery color.
By confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is in the state of no promotion during the game, the player estimates that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a low setting table. Easier to do.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 20% in the case of setting 2, 15% in the case of setting 3 or setting 4, and the setting rate of setting 5 or setting 6. In this case, it is set to 20%. Here, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is in the case of setting 3 or setting 4 (15%)
In comparison with (2), the low setting 2 (20%) has a higher selectivity. However, in the case of setting 3, the selection rates that are promoted are yellow selection rate (15%) and green selection rate (20%).
%), which is equivalent to the selection rate with promotion in the case of setting 2. Furthermore, setting 2
Compared with the case of, the case of setting 3 may be promoted to two levels at a stretch and become green.
In the case of, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to 3 levels and become red. Incidentally, in the case of setting 5, the promotion lottery color may be promoted to red in three steps at once, and in the case of setting 6, the rainbow may be promoted to four steps in four stages. Therefore, the player can easily presume that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be a platform with a high setting by confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted in multiple stages during the game. Become.

Also, the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is green or later is the same as when the current color is blue, but is promoted without being promoted to a higher color. It is possible to determine the promotion lottery color that changes to. According to such a mode, the player confirms that the promotion lottery color of a predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game, so that the gaming machine 10 in the game is set to a high setting. It is easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that it is a platform.

In the present embodiment, the case where the promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process has been described, but the demotion lottery may be performed. By performing the demotion lottery, for example, when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue, it can be changed to white.

Further, in the case where the relegation lottery is performed, for example, the relegation lottery may not be performed after the promotion to the rainbow. By not performing the relegation lottery after reaching the rainbow in this way, the player can continue to have a sense of accomplishment that the setting suggestion of high setting (setting 6) has been reached, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Can be made.

Further, although the promotion lottery allows multi-stage promotion, it is possible to demote each stage to a lower color in the demotion lottery. As described above, in the demotion lottery, it is possible to avoid the player from being discouraged by the setting suggestion effect dropping to a low setting all at once by avoiding the mode of multi-stage demotion, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the selection rate of each promotion lottery color is not limited to the mode of FIG. 58, and the value can be changed appropriately, like the selection rate of the initial color described in FIG. For example, the rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Further, the higher the current color becomes, the higher the selection rate of the higher color may be. Specifically, for example, setting 6
If the current color is green, the rainbow selectivity is set to 10%, and if the current color is red, the rainbow selectivity is set to 35%. The selection rate can be increased.

[Ending effect setting process]
The manner in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit system command process (FIG. 45) described above is not limited to the fanfare effect effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), and the ending effect setting as shown in FIG. 59. It may be generated in the process (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of ending effect setting processing according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). If the command is not normal (the result of B4201 is "
N”), the ending effect setting process ends. If the command is normal (B420
The result of 1 is “Y”), and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM of the effect control device 300 is +1.
It is updated (B4202).

Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (B
4203). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4204), and sets the ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and may be set every specific multiple, every odd number or every integer number, or may be set to be a specific sequence.

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4203 is “N”),
The effect control device 300 sets the ending display and the ending sound according to the set value (
B4205). After that, when the process of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

For the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the time of starting the big hit, in the fanfare production effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. 58. It may be similar to the lottery (B4104).

[Processing when the number of out balls is received]
Further, the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed when the number of out balls is received. FIG. 60 shows
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (B1320 of Drawing 39) at the time of reception of out-of-balls concerning a 4th embodiment.

First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the received out-ball-number command is a normal command (B4301). If the command is not normal (the result of B4301 is "N
)), the process at the time of receiving the number of out balls is ended. If it is a normal command (result of B4301 is “Y”), the number of out balls is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302).
The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8).

And the production control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
303). When the number of out balls is the predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (
B4304). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, for each multiple of a specific number (for example, every 1000 balls, that is, 1000, 2000, 3000... ). In addition,
The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4304) may be the same as that of the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process described above with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of out balls is not the predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the processing when the number of out balls is received.

[RTC reading process]
Further, the light emission mode of the setting suggestive effect may be changed during the RTC reading process (B0009) in the main process (FIG. 36). 61. FIG. 61 shows the RTC reading process (B
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of [0009].

First, production control device 300 determines whether the received signal from RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). When the signal is not normal (result of B4401 is "N")
, RTC reading processing ends. When the signal is normal (result of B4401 is “Y”),
Production control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). The information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 which is a time measuring means.

Then, the effect control device 300 calculates the elapsed time from the start of the game (or power-on) (
(B4403), it is determined whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). When the elapsed time is the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “Y”), the effect control device 300
The light emitting mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit is selected in accordance with the received set value (B4405). The predetermined time can be set, for example, every 2 hours (for example, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00...). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4405) is shown in FIG.
This may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process described above.

On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Also, during count information setting processing in single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (B1322)
Alternatively, the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the count information setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the received count command (special winning hole count command) is a normal command (B4501). When the command is not a normal command (result of B4501 is “N”), the count information setting process ends. When the command is normal (the result of B4501 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress (B4502). When the jackpot operation is not in progress (result of B4502 is “N”), the count information setting process is ended.

When the jackpot is in progress (result of B4502 is “Y”), effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). Add the number of prize balls of the big winning award to the number of coins obtained (B45
04), update setting of the display of the number of obtained coins and the count display (display of the number of counts) is made (B45).
05). Here, the number of counts and the number of coins to be won are the number of counts and the number of coins to be won in the condominium (run chan) from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal game state. It may be the number of coins acquired, or the total number of counts and the number of coins acquired since the power of the gaming machine 10 was turned on.

Then, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the number of obtained coins has reached a predetermined number (B4).
506). When the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4506 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 promotes the emission mode (color) of the special winning opening LED 39d according to the received setting value. (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, in multiples of a specific number (every 5000 balls or the like, that is, 5000, 10000, 15000... ). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) in the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as that in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process described above with reference to FIG.
Next, the acquired payout number display, the count display, and the like are set to display settings according to the set values as described later with reference to FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). Here, the display modes such as the display of the number of obtained coins and the count display are selected by lottery at a selection rate according to the set value.

On the other hand, when the acquired number of payouts is not the predetermined number (the result of B4506 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

In the count information setting process, when the jackpot operation is in progress (result of B4502 is “Y”), the number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the winning hole LED 3
Although the light emitting mode (color) of 9d was promoted by lottery (B4507), by adding the winnings to the starting winning port 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 to the winnings number in the normal gaming state,
You may make the light-emitting part (LED) provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 emit light according to a set value.

Here, setting the display setting according to the set value for the update setting of the acquired payout number display and the count display will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B. FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when a big hit occurs in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a diagram showing another example. In the example of FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, when the number of obtained coins reaches a predetermined number, the display mode of the display of the number of acquired coins, the count display, and the display of other information is selected by a selection rate according to the set value. Display settings.

If the number of coins won has not reached the specified number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is "N
The display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round of “” is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 for displaying the current number of big hit rounds is displayed, for example, as "1"R in numerical notation (Arabic numerals ("1, 2, 3,... ")). Further, right-handing instruction notification 691 which is an instruction to instruct right-handing is displayed in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, at the left end of the display screen, the big hit result mode (big hit stop design,
The jackpot stop symbol "7,7,7" (stop result, stop symbol) of the special variable display game immediately before the special result mode) is displayed, for example, as "7" by numeral notation (Arabic numeral). And
In the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying effect points is displayed, for example, "00".
It is displayed in 30"pt and numerical notation (Arabic numerals). In the middle right corner of the display screen, the number-of-winning-balls display 681 and the count display 682 are numbered as "4910" and "150", for example.
It is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round when the number of coins to be won is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “Y”) is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

Here, for example, as the set value is lower, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the current big hit round number display 676 (“I” R) and the effect point display 678 (“30” pt) are written in Chinese characters (
It becomes easier to display in Kanji (“I, Ni, San...”). In addition, the current number of coins won 68
1 (“5,000” both) and count display 682 (“10057”) are written in Kanji (“Kanji” (“I, Ni,
It is easier to display with "...")).

FIG. 64 is for determining the display mode of the display of the number of winning balls 681, the count display 682, and other information (big hit round number display 676, effect point display, etc.) as the setting suggestive effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table of FIG. FIG. 64(A) is a table showing that the selection rate (distribution rate) of Arabic numerals (numerical notation) or kanji (kanji notation) changes according to the set value, and FIG. 64(B) shows the set value. 8 is a table showing that the color selection rate changes in accordance with the above.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate of the number notation is 45%, and the selection rate of the Kanji notation is 5%.
It becomes 5%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selection rate of numeral notation is as high as 75% and the selection rate of Chinese character notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is in the numerical notation or the Chinese character notation when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

In the case of the numerical notation, the same display screen as that when the number of obtained coins is not the predetermined number as shown in FIG. 63A is displayed. In addition, when the number of coins to be acquired reaches a predetermined number, the jackpot stop design 677 may be displayed in Kanji notation (“7 (or lacquer)”) according to the set value, and “setting suggestion effect occurs!” and the like. The characters such as “” may be displayed on the display screen to notify the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. Furthermore, in addition to numeral notation and kanji notation, other notation formats (for example, Roman numeral (
The selection rate may be set to be displayed as "I, II, III...")).

Further, in determining the display mode of the setting suggestion effect, the selection rate of the number notation, the Chinese character notation, etc. is changed, and the selection rate of the color displayed according to the set value is changed as shown in FIG. 64(B). You may.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the black selectivity is 35% and the blue selectivity is 45%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the black selectivity is as high as 70% and the blue selectivity is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming what color is displayed on the display screen when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

When the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the red selection rate is 20%, and the even number (2, 4,
In the case of 6), the selectivity of red is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the set value is an odd number or an even number by confirming whether or not the display on the display screen is red when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

In this way, the player can estimate the set value from the display screen by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round according to the set value and performing the setting suggestion effect. The display mode of the display screen is not limited to numbers and colors, and may be changed by changing the size and font of characters. Further, it is possible to display a predetermined symbol or figure corresponding to the set value on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modified example of light emission mode change (promotion, etc.)]
The light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emitting mode (initial color) during execution of the special figure variation display game. Regarding the relationship of the expectation degree of the big hit in this case, when it is not the big hit (when the expectation degree is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value
It is also possible to adopt a mode that does not change as it is, or a mode that changes from a light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value to a light emitting mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect. It should be noted that, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expectation to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. Further, when the jackpot is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), it is easy to promote the light-emission mode of a predetermined light-emission part at a low setting value so as to suppress a decrease in game motivation. The player is set to the mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 6 of the promotion lottery table such as 58 are reversed (for example, the ratio of the selected ratios to the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 is reversed). May be interested in.

On the other hand, also in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, a light emission mode corresponding to the set value is maintained and does not change, or from a light emission mode corresponding to the set value to a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect. It may be changed to In addition, after the special figure variation display game is over,
The predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expectation to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. In this way, during the execution period in which the setting suggesting effect can be executed (for example, during the execution of the special map variation display game), the set value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit (special result). It is possible to switch between a corresponding light emission mode (setting suggestion effect) and a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation level of the effect (anticipation degree notification effect of notifying the expectation level).

Therefore, when the expectation of the big hit is high, if the expectation of the big hit is notified by changing from the setting suggestion effect to the expectation notification effect, the game can be excited and the enjoyment of the game is improved.
On the other hand, if the degree of expectation is low, changing from the degree of expectation notification production to the setting suggestion production can make the player have high expectations, which may improve the interest of the game and improve the operation of the gaming machine. There is.

Furthermore, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), it is difficult to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit at a high set value so that the effect on the display device 41 can be closely watched. In the mode in which the selection ratios of the settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 58 and the like are reversed (for example, the ratios in the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed) Alternatively, the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the time of high setting may be made uninteresting for the player. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit at a high set value. As a result, the high-expectation effect on the display device 41 and the low-expectancy light-emission mode of the predetermined light-emitting section can balance the expectation with the player without excessively increasing the expectation. Since the effect on the display device 41 does not correspond to the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit, the effect is surprising and the interest can be improved.

In other cases (when the player pays attention to the display device 41 at the time of notification of a winning or when a big hit starts), the predetermined light emitting portion is once made into a light emitting mode based on the effect and does not gaze at the display device 41. By changing to a state (situation), the light emission mode may be returned to a ratio based on the set value. Further, even when an effect that is watched by the display device 41 is being performed, the light emission mode may be a ratio based on the set value regardless of the effect. In addition, the light emission mode (color) with a low expectation may be temporarily set, and then the light emission mode based on the effect may be changed.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
Next, the details of the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hall/player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300.

By the hall/player setting mode process, the hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game shop) can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or the player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. Can be made.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not in the hall setting mode (B4601).
). When a hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is being executed. When in the hall setting mode (the result of B4601 is “Y”), B4
Performing the processing of 606-B4616, the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (game shop)
Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b).

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B4601 is “N”).
), it is determined whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B4602). When the player setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being executed. When in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is “Y”), the processes of B4620-B2425 are performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

Production control device 300, when the player setting mode is not in (the result of B4602 is "N").
), it is determined whether the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4603). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for customers, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that “waiting for customers” means a state in which a video for waiting for customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41, for example. When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is “N”), the process of B4617 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen to start screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is “Y”). Start setting is made (B4604). Then, the hole setting mode flag is set (B4605).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall, etc. (B4).
606), Hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) and emission color of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41.
The liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B4608) for adjusting the brightness of B, and the power saving setting process (B4609) for setting the power saving are executed. Next, effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the emission color and the like of the logo accessory (B4610).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4611). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010),
It can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is “N”), the hall/player setting mode process is ended.

Then, when there is a setting confirming operation input (result of B4611 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed by the factory setting (B4612). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. If it is not confirmed with the factory settings (the result of B4612 is “N”), B461
Proceed to the process of 4. When it is confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B4612 is “Y”), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments according to the factory default setting is executed (B4613).
). The factory settings are the default settings stored in the memory such as the ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or the hall adjusting data) such as the volume and various brightness determined in B4606-B4610 or B4613 is backed up in the backup memory (for example, FeRAM32).
It writes in 3) (B4614).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B4615). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B4616).

Production control device 300, if the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B460.
The result of 3 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4617).
). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. If the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B
The result of 4617 is "N"), and the hall/player setting mode processing is ended.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B4619).

Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment processing (B4620) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4623). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B4623 is “N”), the hall/player setting mode process is ended. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B4623 is “Y”), screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is made (B4624).
.. Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B4625). B4620-
The player setting data (or the player adjusting data) such as the volume and the brightness determined in B4622 may be erased and is not written in the backup memory.

[Example of display screen in hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A shows the display device 4 in the hall setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of No. 1.

Rendering control device 300 starts screen drawing in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is “Y”) (B4604), and the volume is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A. Setting window 711, emission color setting window 712, and brightness setting window 713
Is displayed. The volume setting window 711 is a display used for the hall volume adjustment processing (B4606), and the brightness setting window 713 is the hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) and the liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B4607).
4608). The emission color setting window 712 displays the hall LED adjustment processing (B
4607), and is a display for switching the setting suggestive effect performed according to the lottery table in the predetermined light emitting unit to the hole emission color selected in the hall setting as described above. As described above, the operation of the volume setting window 711, the emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 is performed by the person in charge of the hall operating the effect button 25 (touch panel 25b).
(Including the operation of)).

By selecting one of the colors as the hole emission color in the emission color setting window 712, the hole emission color can be preferentially displayed on the predetermined light emitting portion. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or rainbow (specific emission color) that suggests that it is high setting, it is possible to make it appear that there are a lot of high setting stands lined up at events etc. it can. As described above, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process are the second setting means that the player cannot set the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting portion and can be set only by the person in charge of the hall. Function. In the hall setting mode, the decorative special symbol (identification information), the hold display portion 630, the hold display 633, the hold exhaustion area 640, the special figure changing hold display 64.
The display related to the game such as 3 may be hidden. Since the hall setting mode is not performed during the game, it is possible to make the display related to the hall setting mode easy to see and reduce the processing load by excluding unnecessary ones. In addition, when hiding the display related to the game, only the decorative reduced design (small design) 616 may be displayed.

Also, in the setting suggestion effect, the hall emission color is prioritized and displayed over what is performed according to the lottery table, but it is preferentially displayed only while waiting for customers, so that the actual game is being played. Can prioritize the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table over the hole emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 in the game in more detail by actually playing the game.

[Example of display screen in player setting mode]
FIG. 66B shows the display device 4 in the player setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of 1.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B4617 is “Y”), effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618), and as shown in FIG. 66B, the display screen is displayed. A light emission presence/absence setting window 714 is displayed together with the volume setting window 711 and the brightness setting window 713. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission presence/absence setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B462).
1). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 displays the player volume adjusting process (B4620).
), the brightness setting window 713 and the light emission presence/absence setting window 714 are player LEDs.
This is a display used for the adjustment processing (B4621).

By the light emission presence/absence setting window 714, it is possible to select whether or not to emit light from a predetermined light emitting unit. For example, when the player selects no light emission, light emission related to the setting suggestion effect of the predetermined light emitting unit is not performed. it can. In this way, the light emission presence/absence setting window 714 and the player LED adjustment processing function as a first setting unit that allows the player to set the settings related to the light emitting mode of a predetermined light emitting unit. Note that, during the game, the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIG. 55 to FIG. 62 ), so unlike the hall setting mode, in the player setting mode The emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

In the player setting mode, only the presence or absence of light emission of a predetermined light emitting unit can be selected, but the effect mode of the effect device including the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit can be selected according to the set value. It may be possible to set whether or not it can be displayed in a range, and as in the hall setting mode, the emission color setting window 7
The effect mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit of the effect device may be set by 12. The rendering mode of the rendering device is control depending on the set value of the rendering control device 300 (FIG. 44, FIG. 55-FIG. 62).
), the light emitting mode of the lighting member, the internal accessory 44a, 44
b, the operation mode of the external accessory 95a, the effect mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. Also,
In the player setting mode, it is possible to confirm in what range the effect mode of the effect device has been set by the player so that it can be displayed, or whether the setting suggestion effect depending on the set value is being performed. You may

Further, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when the injustice is detected by the magnet injustice monitoring process (A1315), the radio wave injustice monitoring process (A1316), or the like. Reset the promotion lottery colors, etc. to the default colors (eg white)
May be displayed with.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Also, during the customer waiting demo setting process (B1308) in the single shot system command process (FIG. 39), the hall setting mode (emission color setting window 712 and hall L) is used instead of the light emission mode of the setting suggestive effect.
A predetermined light emitting portion is caused to emit light with the hole emission color set in the ED adjustment process). FIG. 67 shows the fourth
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on embodiment.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4701 is “N”), the customer waiting demo setting process ends. If the command is normal (result of B4701 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit to the light emission mode (hole emission color) set in the hall setting mode (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demo start setting is made (B4703), and the customer waiting demo setting process is ended.

As described above, during the waiting for customers (during the customer waiting demonstration), the light emitting mode (hall light emitting color) set in the hall setting mode is preferentially used instead of the light emitting mode (color) of the setting suggestive effect.
Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hall light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it is possible to make it appear that a lot of high setting stands are lined up at an event or the like. it can. Further, while waiting for customers, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the predetermined light emitting unit, and the player tries to confirm the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect, so that the game machine Operation of 10 may be improved.

When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used while waiting for customers (during customer waiting demonstration). It is also possible to have a configuration.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, an example in which the color is controlled mainly depending on the set value is shown as the light emission mode of the rendering device (predetermined light emitting unit). Brightness), turning on or off, or blinking. When blinking, it also includes a blinking period. If the rendering device is a movable body, the operation mode of the rendering device may be controlled depending on the set value, similarly to the light emission mode.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes an effect device (eg, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect device. The gaming machine 10 is provided with setting changing means (setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value changing switch 102)) capable of changing the setting value according to the setting related to the game. The effect control means can execute the setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the set value.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes possible for the player to estimate the settings of the gaming machine 10 before or during the game only from the state of the gaming machine 10, and to appropriately suggest the set value. Since it can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the gaming machine 10 in this manner, a setting suggestion tag (for example, setting 4 is suggested) implicitly suggesting the setting value around the gaming machine 10 in the hall business. Shark bill,
It is no longer necessary to install shrimp bills that suggest setting 5 and salmon and bills that suggest setting 6, and it is possible to secure a wide space around the gaming machine 10 to improve the appearance and reduce the burden on the person in charge of the hall. can do.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the first setting means (light emission presence/absence setting window 714) by which the player can set the settings relating to the effect mode of the effect device.
, Player LED adjustment processing), and second setting means (emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment processing) that cannot be set by the player with respect to the effect mode of the effect device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the set value or the second setting means.
According to such a gaming machine 10, the person in charge of the hall or the like uses the second setting means or the like to suggest a high setting as the production mode of the setting suggestion production in the production device (for example,
By setting the hall emission color (red, rainbow, etc.), the appearance of the gaming machine 10 can be made to look as desired, and it is possible to make it appear as if there are abundantly lined up stands at high settings at events, etc. The interest can be improved. In addition, since the player can set a production mode that suits the taste of the player, the interest can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute a performance mode that takes into account the needs for setting on both the hall side and the player side.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special figure variation display game) is the special result. It is possible to switch between the expected degree notification effect that notifies the degree. Therefore, when the degree of expectation of the special result is high, if the setting suggestion effect is changed to the expectation notification effect and the expectation degree of the special result is notified, the game can be made more exciting and the interest of the game is improved. On the other hand, if the degree of expectation is low, changing from the degree of expectation notification production to the setting suggestion production can make the player have high expectations, which may improve the interest of the game and improve the operation of the gaming machine. There is.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fourth embodiments.

[Screen transition example when the starting memory of the reserved digestion area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, and the screen of the entire game when the special figure changing pending display 643 of the pending digestion area 640 changes pending. It is an example of a transition. In addition, the lottery of the pending change of the special figure changing pending display 643 (digesting pending change) is, for example, the advance notice drawing (B2006 or B20) of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44).
09).

FIG. 68A shows the display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative special figure variable display game is started.

In the center of the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided, and the decoration first pattern A is provided in the left area 610A and the right area 610B. The decoration first symbol B is enlarged and the decoration first symbol C is displayed in the middle area 610C in an enlarged manner, and the symbols "2, 4, 5" are stopped and displayed.

In the lower center part of the display screen, a hold exhaustion area 640 (specific display portion, changing hold display area) and a hold display portion 630 are displayed as a start memory display area. The pending display area 640 and the pending display area 630 are displayed prior to the variable display in the variable display area 610 on the front surface (upper layer). The setting of such a priority display may be executed, for example, in the effect display editing process (B0015).

In the pending digest area 640, a pending special figure changing pending display 643 (starting memory display, special figure running pending display) corresponding to the running (digesting) special figure changing display game is displayed. Further, in the reserved digestion area 640, on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing pending display 643, a starting memory display background 640A as a pedestal of the special figure changing pending display 643 is displayed in a low image quality state. .. 68 to 69B, coarse hatching of the starting memory display background 640A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

Here, the low image quality state (first display mode) is a state in which the improvement of power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load are prioritized over the improvement of the visibility for the player. The number is low (for example, displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. are suppressed (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps,
Displayed at less than ±0 when adjustable from -100 to +100), low resolution (for example, displayed at a resolution less than 720p (1280 x 720)), frame rate per second (fps) Is low (for example, less than 30 fps) or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, by performing a low image quality process on the image of the original high-quality starting memory display background 640A in the game machine 10 by the process of the VDP 312 or the like,
Instead of a high quality image, a low image quality start memory display background 640A can be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Further, for example, both the low-quality image and the high-quality (or normal-quality) image of the starting memory display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low-quality image and the high-quality image are replaced depending on the situation. By using the starting memory display background 640A with low image quality (or high image quality).

A background object 640B that changes in association with the starting memory display background 640A is arranged above the starting memory display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed in two bilobal display modes arranged at the left and right ends as shown in (a) of FIG. 68, for example. The background object 640B is also displayed in a low image quality state like the starting memory display background 640A. Further, the background object 640B is displayed with the same priority (same layer) as the starting memory display background 640A, that is, in an integrated mode. The starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B may be set and displayed in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44), for example. In addition, the background object 640B is displayed as a starting memory display background 640.
It may be displayed in priority to the front surface of A (upper layer). In addition, conversely, the starting memory display background 640A may be preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

The hold display unit 630 displays a hold display 633 (start memory display,
Up to four special figure reservation displays) are displayed, and in FIG. 68A, three reservation displays 633 are displayed on the reservation display unit 630. The hold display 633 is arranged so as to overlap a part of the starting memory display background 640A and is displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A. In this way, the production control device 300 functions as a start memory display control unit that executes the control of displaying the hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630 and displaying the special figure changing hold display 643 in the hold exhausting area 640. Production control device 300 executes the display setting of hold display 633 and special figure changing hold display 643 in step B2015 of the change effect setting process (FIG. 44) at the time of the hold shift, and when the hold occurs, the single-shot command The processing may be executed in the special figure 1 pending information setting processing (B1310) or the special figure 2 pending information setting processing (B1312).

FIG. 68B shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. Multiple variable display areas 6 on the display screen
In FIG. 10, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode. In the following figures, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode, the variably displayed decorative first symbols A to C are indicated by "↓".

FIG. 68 (u) is a display screen of the display device 41 when a pending change is made due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, digestion pending change or prefetching notice) during execution of the special figure variation display game.
Here, the special figure changing pending display 643 changes pending, but the pending display 633 may change pending as a prefetching notice effect. In the case of a pending change during digestion, the special figure changing pending display 643 suggests that there is a high degree of expectation from the normal round display mode due to the pending change, as shown in FIG. It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

Further, the display of the starting memory display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state at the same time as the hold change. 68 to 69B, the starting memory display background 64
The fine hatching of 0A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a high image quality state. Similar to the starting memory display background 640A, the background object 640B is also displayed in a high image quality state (second display mode). The background object 640B changes from a normal bilobal display mode to a flower-shaped display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. It should be noted that the change in the image quality and the display mode of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is executed at the same timing as the pending change of the special figure changing pending display 643 (during in-progress change) selected as a notice. For example, the display may be set in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44).

Here, the high image quality state (second display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the visibility for the player is prioritized over the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load. The number is high (for example, displayed with 921,600 pixels or more), and the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. are high (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps, −
When it can be adjusted from 100 to +100, it is displayed at ±0 or more), the resolution is high (for example, it is displayed at a resolution of 720p (1280×720) or more), and the frame rate (fps) per second is Higher (for example, 30 fps or more), or an uncompressed image or an image with a low compression rate is displayed.

FIG. 68E shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 610 becomes the disengagement result mode (disengagement stop symbol). It is a screen. In the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610, "
"3, 7, 2" is stopped and displayed. Further, the special figure changing pending display 643 is consumed and disappears, and the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state and displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-shaped display mode to the bilobal display mode. Special map change display Background display 6 of the starting memory at the end of the game
The display setting of 40A and the background object 640B may be executed based on the symbol type (delayed symbol or jackpot symbol), for example, as a part of the stop setting (B1331) of single-shot system command processing. Then, the oldest starting memory of the hold display 633 moves to the special figure changing pending display 643, and the next special figure changing display game is started. The timing at which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state is not limited to the time when the special figure changing pending display 643 is exhausted and becomes non-display, but a predetermined effect. May be finished, or the first decorative symbols A to C may be stopped and displayed, or the next special figure variation display game may be started.

(O) of FIG. 68 is a display in the case where the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop result (stop pattern) of the variation display area 610 becomes the big hit result mode (big hit stop pattern, special result mode) 3 is a display screen of the device 41. "3, 3, 3" is stopped and displayed as a big hit stop symbol in the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display region 610, and "big hit!
!! Character is displayed. Further, although the special figure changing pending display 643 is consumed and hidden, the high-quality state of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is maintained. The flower-like display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained. After that, the big hit round game is started and the big hit round effect is executed.

It should be noted that switching the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B from low image quality to high image quality is performed when the special figure changing pending display 643 changes to a star-shaped display mode (FIG. 68).
Not only ((u)), but the previous stage, that is, when the special map variation display game is started (FIG. 68).
(Immediately after (a)) or immediately before the digestion pending change occurs ((ii) in FIG. 68), the image quality may be switched to high image quality. Further, in the case where the holding change is made in stages or during continuous production (during continuous notice production or pseudo continuous production), the image quality of the starting memory display background 640A may be switched in stages.
Further, for example, when the special display changing pending display 643 and the holding display 633 are displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the starting memory display background 640A is switched to a darker color such as black to change the special drawing. You may make it easy to distinguish from the hold display 643 and the hold display 633. Further, when the start memory is stored and a new hold display 633 is generated, for example, the hold display has an upper limit of 4
When the number reaches the individual and overflows, or when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting memory display background 640A may be switched to a high image quality so that the player can easily recognize it. Also,
By the decoration special map variation display game is executed, the decoration first symbols A to C are stopped or temporarily stopped by a specific symbol (such as when a pending change pattern or a chance eye that suggests or confirms a pending change is stopped) The memory display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

In addition, the first display mode is not limited to the mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed in a low image quality, but a mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are inconspicuous although they are visibly visible. May be displayed with. For example, as a mode of making the inconspicuous, another image may be displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B (front and upper layers) so as to cover the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B. it can. Other images in this case include, for example, an image that is the same as the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B but is faint or a mosaic image, the starting memory display background 640A and the background of the back (back surface, lower layer) and the background. Object 6
It is possible to use a transparent image or the like that allows 40B to be visually recognized. The second display mode is not limited to the mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and another image displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is hidden. You may display by a mode.

[Example of screen transition when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of a screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digestion area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641. is there. In addition, the following FIG. 69A and FIG. 69B
In the description of the above, the description overlapping with that of FIG. 68 will be appropriately omitted.

69A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative special figure variable display game is started.

On the display screen of the display device 41, the plurality of variable display areas 610 are decorated with the first symbols A to C.
Is stopped and displayed with a symbol of "2,4,5", and a special figure changing pending display 643 corresponding to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the holding digestion area 640. In addition, the reserved digestion area 64
At 0, the pedestal 640C of the special figure changing pending display 643 and the low image quality start memory display background 640A are displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing pending display 643. The pedestal 640C is displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer) of the starting memory display background 640A. The starting memory display background 640A is narrower in the upper and left regions than the starting memory display background 640A of FIG.

Furthermore, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect relating to the special figure variation display game is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the display device 41, and the effect display area 641 shows a walking girl whose display mode can be changed by the effect. The character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low image quality state. 69A and 69B, the thin line representing the character 641A indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) than the variable display area 610, like the hold exhaustion area 640 and the hold display portion 630. For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the hold exhaustion area 640 and the hold display unit 630, and the display priority order is the same. In addition, the character 641A is preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. In addition, character 6
41A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (layers of the same layer), that is, in an integrated manner. In addition, the character 641A includes the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display unit 6
30 may be preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the character 30, or conversely, the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display portion 630 may be preferentially displayed on the front surface of the character 641A. In this way, the display priority order can be changed as appropriate.

69A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. In the plurality of variable display areas 610,
The decoration first patterns A to C are displayed in a variable manner ("↓") in a normal manner.

Here, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed as a character different from that shown in FIG. 69A (ki) (a different character from a high image quality character 641B described later).
Also, the low-quality character 641A may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 69A (ki). For example, another mode of the low-quality character 641A may be a mode of sleeping while a mode of (Ki) in FIG. 69A is standing, or a mode of walking and operating in (Ki) in FIG. 69A. Alternatively, it may be stationary. It should be noted that the character 641A is in a state of standing and standing before the decorative special figure variable display game is started (() of FIG. 69A).
After the start of the decorative special figure variation display game ((ki) in FIG. 69A), a mode in which the player is walking may be used.

In FIG. 69A, the character 641A is changed to a character 641B when the character 641A in the effect display area 641 is satisfied with a predetermined condition (for example, digestion pending change, prefetch notice, notice effect, etc.) being established during execution of the special figure variation display game. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when changed. The character 641B is a girl who is pleased to eat a rice ball that suggests high expectations, and is displayed in a high image quality state. 69A and 69B, the thick line representing the character 641B indicates that the character 641B is displayed in a high image quality state. In addition, the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, the reserved digestion area 640, and the effect display area 64.
1 is also displayed in a high quality state. Further, the predetermined condition is, specifically, the character 641A.
(641B) partially enters the starting memory display background 640A and acts on the special figure changing pending display 643 and the holding display, or is displayed near the starting memory displaying background 640A and the special figure changing pending display 643 and the pending display. This is a case of executing a holding change effect such as waiting until the timing of acting on the display 633. The timing for switching to the high-quality character 641B when the predetermined condition is satisfied may be when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or when it is displayed near the starting memory display background 640A. it can. The character 641A may switch to the high-quality character 641B when the special figure changing pending display 643 or the pending display is displayed, and when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or the starting memory display background. The character 641B having a high image quality may be switched at the time of starting the next special figure variation display game when displayed near 640A.

Here, the high image quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from the character shown in (A) of FIG. 69A (a different character from the low image quality character 641A described later).
Further, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in (A) of FIG. 69A. For example, another mode of the high-quality character 641B may be that in which the walking speed (movement speed) is increased from (ki) in FIG. 69A. 69A, the low image quality character 641A may be stationary, and the high image quality character 641B may be walked in FIG. 69A.

(A) of FIG. 69A is a display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes a detached stop symbol (“3, 7, 2”) It is a screen. The special display fluctuating hold display 643 is consumed and hidden, and the start memory display background 6
40A, the base 640C, and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a low image quality state. Further, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low image quality state. After that, the start memory is stored, so that the next special figure variation display game is started.

FIG. 69 (c) shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes the jackpot stop symbol (“3, 3, 3”). It is a screen. Below the variable display area 610, the characters “big hit!!” are displayed. Although the special figure changing pending display 643 is consumed and disappears, the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C,
The high quality image is maintained in the effect display area 641. Also, the effect display of the girl who is happy to eat the rice ball of the character 641B is maintained as it is. After that, the big hit round game is started and the big hit round effect is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69B, another example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digestion area 640 will be described. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, and the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the holding digestion area 640 or the effect display area 641. 3 is another example of the screen transition of FIG.

69B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, notice effect) is generated in the effect display area 641 from (K) in FIG. 69A. is there. Due to the occurrence of the predetermined effect, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 changes to the character 641B indicating that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a high image quality state. On the other hand, the starting memory display background 640A and the pedestal 640C of the reserved digestion area 640 are kept displayed in a low image quality state. After that, when the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 is a disengaged stop symbol (for example, "3,7,2"), the process proceeds to (K) in FIG. 69A, and a jackpot stop symbol (for example, "3,3,3"). ) Is shown in FIG.
Go to 9A (this). When a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) than the reserved digestion area 640. By doing so, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground to emphasize the effect by the character 641B. In addition, the notice production is performed by the player when the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are reach or in response to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. This can occur when the effect button 25 is operated.

In FIG. 69B, (K'') is a predetermined effect (in FIG. 69A) in the reserved digestion area 640 (
For example, it is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game when a digest pending change, a pre-reading notice, etc.) occur. Due to the occurrence of the predetermined effect, the special figure pending suspension display 643 changes to a star-shaped display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the pedestal 640C, the special figure changing pending display 643, and the starting memory display background 640A are switched from a low image quality state to a high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed as it is, and the effect display area 641 and the character 641A are kept displayed in a low image quality state. In addition, in response to the change of the special figure pending hold display 643 to a star-shaped display mode, the shape of the pedestal 640C is associated with the display mode of the special figure pending pending display 643 such as a crescent moon. You may change into a certain shape. After that, the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 is
When it becomes a detachment stop design (for example, "372"), it proceeds to (K) in FIG. 69A, and when it becomes a big hit stop design (for example, "333"), it proceeds to (C) in FIG. 69A.

When a predetermined effect is generated in the reserved digestion area 640, the reserved digestion area 640 may be displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) than the effect display area 641. By doing so, for example, the reserved digestion area 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground to emphasize the change in the display mode of the special figure changing pending display 643 and the pending display 633.

Further, when a predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the hold change, the pedestal 640c also has a high image quality like the special figure changing hold display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be set to be lower than that of the special figure changing pending display 643 (lower image quality than the special figure changing pending display 643). Even when the image quality of the pedestal 640c is relatively lowered as compared with the image quality of the special figure changing pending display 643 in this way, the player can easily gaze at the special figure changing pending display 643 which is the main part of the effect, so that the game is played. It is possible to reduce the processing load while maintaining the interest of.

On the other hand, when the predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed by the effect corresponding to the change in the hold, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640c is changed from the special figure pending display 643. May be set higher (higher image quality than the special display changing pending display 643). The special figure changing pending display 643 is displayed on the pedestal 640c having a high image quality because it is displayed with a relatively low image quality, which may cause unexpectedness. Can be improved.

Furthermore, the pedestal 640c may maintain a low image quality when the special figure pending display 643 has a high image quality. Decoration of special figure pending display 643 and special figure pending display 64
This is because the pedestal 640c only needs to have a function indicating that 3 is being held during digestion, and the function is maintained even when displayed with low image quality.

[Operation/Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, based on the satisfaction of the start condition, a variable display game (special symbol variable display game) based on a plurality of pieces of identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C).
Is provided with a display device 41 capable of displaying a variable display game result as a special result (big hit result mode,
In the case of a big hit stop symbol, a special result mode), a special game state advantageous for the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41 in priority to the start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory which is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. A start memory display control means (production control device 300) capable of executing control to display a start memory display (special figure changing hold display 643, hold display 633) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area. Prepare The start memory display control means displays the start memory display background 640A in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back surface of the start memory display so as to overlap the start memory display in the start memory display area, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on this, the starting memory display background 640A can be switched to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the display mode of the start memory display changes, and the like. In this case, the starting memory display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, the special figure pending display 64
Although there is a problem that 3 may be mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C and the like, the starting memory display can be easily displayed when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize it, and the player can visually recognize it. When the need is relatively small (such as when the degree of expectation is low), it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing load of graphics and the like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility for the player, improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing load, and improve the display method of the start memory display area in the gaming machine. be able to. In addition, for example, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, the identification information (decorative first symbol A to C) of the variable display area 610 which is desired to be relatively conspicuous is higher than the start memory display. Since the image is displayed with high image quality, the player can easily recognize the identification information. In addition, since the starting memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality in other cases, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the starting memory display area, and to display the image on the display screen on the liquid crystal. It is possible to suppress the seizure.

The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing control for displaying an effect relating to the variable display game in the effect display area 641 which is displayed on the display device 41 prior to the variable display game (special figure variable display game) ( The production control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means can display the effect in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the effect display area 641 and switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, there is a problem that, for example, the effect display area 641 may appear mixed with the decoration first symbols A to C, but the starting memory display (special figure changing pending display 643, Hold display 633)
Not only that, the effect display area 641 can also be displayed so that it can be easily seen by the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the same effect as the above effect can be achieved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, an effect game (decorative special figure variation display game) corresponding to the variation display game (variation display game on the collective display device 50) is displayed on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the start condition. Executable effect game means (effect control device 300), a specific display area (effect display area 641) displayed on the display device 41 prior to the effect game (decorative special figure variation display game), and the specific display Specific character displayed in the area (character 641A
, 641B) of the display control means (production control device 300). The display control unit (production control device 300) normally displays the specific display area in the first display mode (
For example, while displaying in a low image quality), the specific character is displayed in a first effect mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific display area is displayed in a second display mode (for example, different from the first display mode) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is possible to switch to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality) while switching to the high image quality).

Therefore, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize it, the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality). ), it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing load of the display control means (production control device 300) such as graphics. On the contrary, when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize it (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality). ,
The specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and the player is provided with a specific display area (effect display area 641) and a specific character (character 6).
41A, 641B) can be easily made visible.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. The present embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but after the status display edit output processing (A1318), the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71).
It is characterized in that an LED driver initial setting process (A15001) for initializing is added. Further, after the initial setting of the LED driver 153, the LED data transmission process (A for setting the output mode of the LED driver 153, that is, the display mode of the status display device 152 is performed.
16001) is performed. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the LED driver 153 will be described, and then the initialization process and the LED data transmission process of the LED driver 153 will be described.

The LED driver initial setting process (A15001) and the LED data transmission process (A16)
The order of 001) may be changed. In this case, the LED driver initial setting process (A1
5001) is the LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process.
Therefore, the LED driver 153 is initialized.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of this embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Further, a batch driver 153a, a winning combination driver 153b, and a payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c, which will be described later, are the same as the LED driver 153.

The LED driver 153 is a display device 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1) of the digits sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting method).
), 900-0 (digit 0)) is energized to light. The digit display 900 that constitutes the status display device 152 is a 7-segment type (or an 8-segment type) and also a dot-shaped eight LED.
Includes a collection of lamps. The LED driver 153 may be either common anode or common cathode.

The LED driver 153 is a combination ratio driver 153b and a ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 15
In the case of 3c, a 16-bit command is issued from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the LED driver 153 in the preceding stage (the collective driver 153a in the first stage and the driver 153b in the second stage) as in the dotted line. Will be sent. When the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, a 16-bit command is directly transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 without passing through the LED driver 153 in the preceding stage.

The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163 and a 16-bit latch circuit 1.
64, latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuit: digit 0, digit 1, digit 2,
(For digit 3) 167a-167d, control unit 173, oscillation unit 174, 4-to-1 data selector 1
83, a character generator (decoder) 185, a 2-to-1 data selector 187, a segment drive unit 193, and a digit drive unit 195. The control unit 173 includes a digit number setting unit 175, a duty setting unit 176, a data selection unit 177, and a standby mode setting unit 1.
Equipped with 78. The oscillator 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the controller 173 (particularly the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). The 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Further, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control unit that controls the emission color of the LED (or segment).

The 16-bit command is input to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153 from the data input terminal and can be output to another LED driver 153 as it is from the data output terminal. The data of the 16-bit shift register 163 is the 16-bit latch circuit 1
At the timing (latch timing) at which 64 receives the latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111, it is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164.

Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the upper 8 bits are sent to the latch selector 165, the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data section) are sent to the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. Further, the lower 8 bits of data (only necessary bits (for example, 4 bits) are acceptable) are also sent to the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178.

When the upper 8 bits (address portion) indicate the address of the digit number setting unit 175 (for example, 21H (hexadecimal notation)), the digit number setting unit 175 determines that the control data (initial value) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. Of the setting data), the lower 8 bits (only the necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in and the corresponding digit number (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal notation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). The number of digits to be set depends on the display 90 driven by the LED driver 153.
The number is 0 (the number of digits), and is 4 in this embodiment.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the duty setting unit 176 (for example, 20H (hexadecimal notation))
In this case, the duty setting unit 176 takes in the lower 8 bits (only required bits are acceptable) of the control data (initial setting data) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and outputs the corresponding duty ratio ( For example, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal expression, X is arbitrary) is set (initial setting). The brightness (emission intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display device 900
The duty ratio indicated by corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. The source driver corresponds to the digit drive unit 195 in the case of common anode, and the segment drive unit 193 in the case of common cathode.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the data selection unit 177 (for example, 27H (hexadecimal notation)), the data selection unit 177 determines that the lower 8 bits (necessary) of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. (Bits only) are taken in and the use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The addresses of the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 may be set to be the same, and the use/non-use setting of the decoded data by the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting of the digit number setting unit 175 may be performed at the same time ( Data selection section 1
77 and the digit number setting unit 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

That is, the data selection unit 177 uses the data of the 8-bit latch as the character generator 18
It is selected whether the data is decoded by 5 and used as the decoded data or the data of the 8-bit latch is directly used as the non-decoded data. 8 if decoded
The data of the bit latch is regarded as a character code and is decoded into the lighting pattern data of the character. When the data of the 8-bit latch is used as it is as the non-decoded data, the data selection unit 177 outputs the data selection signal indicating the selection of the non-decoded data to 2
It is sent to the data selector 187 of the pair 1. In this way, the data selection unit 177 determines whether or not the decoding function is used by issuing a command (command, command) from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111).
(Including control data).

When the upper 8 bits indicate an address of the standby mode setting unit 178 or a command for the standby mode setting unit 178 (for example, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal notation: X is arbitrary), etc.), the standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (only the necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in. Then, for example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to the segment drive unit 193 or the digit drive unit 195 so that the segment drive unit 193 or the digit drive unit 195 is turned off, and shifts the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H). 193 and digit drive unit 1
95 is forcibly turned off and the display 900 of all digits is turned off (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), or the segment drive unit 193 and the digit drive unit 195 of the LED driver 153 are normally operated by the dynamic drive system. Yes (for 1XH). In the standby mode, each setting is not cleared and the previous setting is retained. Further, in the normal operation, after the segment drive unit 193 and the digit drive unit 195 are driven once, the data of the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected in the display of the display device 900 only by storing the data in the 8-bit latch. It

The upper 8 bits are the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal number))
, The latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and captures (sets) the lighting pattern data or the character code of the lower 8 bits (data section). Similarly,
The upper 8 bits are any address of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d (for example, 23H
, 24H, 25H (hexadecimal notation)), the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to any of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d corresponding to the address. As a result, the 8-bit latches 167b-167d are provided with the lower 8 bits (data section) addressed to themselves.
It is possible to latch and capture the lighting pattern data or the character code.

A latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 outputs the latch signal as an 8-bit latch 167a-16.
7d and then select any one of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. Then, the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d have the digits 0 and 1 respectively addressed to themselves.
The display data for the display 900 of the digits 2, 3 can be held.

The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d corresponding to the digit line of each digit selected by the digit drive unit 195 in order to realize the dynamic drive system (dynamic lighting system). To do. The 4-to-1 data selector 183 is
The data of any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167a to 167d is output to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187. The digit line is selected by outputting an on/off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of anode common, the on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of cathode common, the current pull-in voltage (off voltage) is applied to the digit line. ) Is applied. Information indicating which digit line the digit drive section 195 selects may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183.

For example, when the digit drive section 195 outputs a drive signal and selects the digit line of digit 0, the data of the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, the digit drive unit 19
When 5 outputs the drive signal and selects the digit lines of digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, the data of 8-bit latches 167b, 167c, 167d are respectively selected.

The character generator 185 decodes the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183. When the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 performs a decoding process to identify the character code (character code) as the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. Convert to.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a character code (character code) and a lighting pattern of a character corresponding thereto. In addition, in FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code “X10... B” corresponds to lighting pattern data for lighting the decimal point (Dp). Although it is possible to define variously what character code the character is associated with, the character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines the association relationship between the character code (input) and the character (output) (character lighting pattern data). And so on. For example, the character code "X0011010B" is the character "-".
Corresponding to the lighting pattern data ((a, b, c,
d, e, f, g, Dp)=(0,0,0,0,0,0,1,0)) (for example, “00000
010B"). Since the batch driver 153a uses non-decoded data, when turning on (turning on) only the segment g, the lighting pattern data (for example, "00000010B") transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is used as it is. ..

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 71. If the LED driver 153 is the winning ratio driver 153b or the payout rate/discharging ball number driver 153c, the character code transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. 185 outputs the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is the 8-bit latch 167a-1.
Since it is already held in 67d, the character generator 18
In No. 5, only proper lighting pattern data is converted into inappropriate lighting pattern data by the decoding process. If this appropriate lighting pattern data coincides with any one of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the collective driver 153a may output the lighting pattern data of the character.

The 2:1 data selector 187 outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4:1 data selector 183 directly in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177. The selected non-decoded data is selected and output to the segment drive unit 193. The non-decoded data is the data output from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 without passing through the character generator 185, and is the 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, the 2-to-1 data selector 187
The non-decoded data is output, and when the data selection signal is not input, the decoded data is output.

If the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, a 2-to-1 data selector 1
A data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input to 87, and the appropriate lighting pattern data held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d is always output to the segment drive unit 193. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the winning ratio driver 153b or the winning rate/discharging ball number driver 153c, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 does not receive a data selection signal and always lights a character. The pattern data (decoded data) will be output to the segment drive unit 193.

The segment drive unit 193 outputs the lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the 2-to-1 data selector 187 to the display unit 900 of the digit corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit drive unit 195 ( Dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data is ON/OFF data of light emission of the eight LEDs (segments ag, Dp, or dot-shaped eight LEDs) of the display 900 of the selected digit (that is, the selected digit line). In the case of the anode common, the segment drive unit 193 turns on the LED (light emission state) by applying a current drawing voltage (OFF voltage) to the segment line as a drive voltage. In the case of common cathode, LE is applied by applying the on-voltage to the segment line as the drive voltage.
D is turned on (light emitting state).

The 8 LEDs of the display 900 are of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot part)
In the display 900 of No. 3, the segments are ag and Dp. On the other hand, in the case of FIG.
The eight LEDs of the display 900 are a set of eight dot-shaped LED lamps (D3-D7, D8,
D10, D18) or a set of eight dot-shaped LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D)
17).

The digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select the digit line of each digit. As the drive signal, the digit drive unit 195 applies an on-voltage to the digit line in the case of the anode common, and applies a current pull-in voltage (off voltage) to the digit line in the case of the cathode common.

The resistance connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) is connected to one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND), so that the segment drive unit 193 and the segment drive unit 193 can be used to segment the segment. The current value flowing in the line can be set. This allows
A current value common to all LEDs can be supplied.

Further, a light emission color control unit (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment). The emission color control unit, in the main process and the timer interrupt process,
It is possible to control the emission color of the LED by receiving a command (control data) relating to the color of the LED and sending a command signal to the segment drive unit 193. Segment drive unit 1
93 drives by applying a drive voltage to the segment line of the color according to the command signal from the light emission color control part. The segment line is provided for each color LED (or segment) of the display 900.

As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment has been initialized in the main processing. At this time, initial setting is performed for the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selecting unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) of the driver 150 (LED driver 153). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, at least one of the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 is also initialized in the timer interrupt process. As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the driving data (LED command) is output after the setting value is correct in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 from being turned off due to noise or the like. When the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selecting unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in the timer interrupt process, the initial setting in the main process (A1016).
Can be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 1
An example will be described in which the initial setting is performed for 76.

[Initialization command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a relationship between the initial setting command transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment and the latch. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command is the address part (8
(Bit) is omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 includes an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 ((digit) is an initial digit number setting value (16 bits) (FIG. 74), Initial setting data (du) ((
Du) is the initial setting command (du) including the initial setting value of duty ratio (8 bits)
(16 bits) (FIG. 74) are transmitted in order.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time it transmits the initial setting command (16 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 by the initial setting command (digit). To be done. Then, the next latch signal holds the next initialization command (du) (FIG. 74) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164,
The initial setting command (du) causes the duty setting unit 176 to set the initial setting data (du).
Is memorized. Note that, in FIG. 73, the initial setting command for the digit number setting unit 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting unit 176, but the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
Referring to FIG. 74, the LED driver initial setting process (A15 in FIG. 70) according to the sixth embodiment.
001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the case where the LED driver 153 is the combination ratio driver 153b and the character code (8 bits) stored in the combination ratio driver 153b is the accessory ratio display data will be described as an example.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) related to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and clocks it. It is transmitted together with the signal (A15003). Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (du) relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A15004), and transmits the initial setting command (du) in the same manner as described above (
A15005).

[LED command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment and the latch. Incidentally, in FIG. 75, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted. Gaming microcomputer 111, LED command (16 bits)
A latch signal is output every time the is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command.

The 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153 holds the first LED command (digit 0) by the first latch signal, and the LED command (digit 0) causes the 8-bit latch 167a to display character ratio display data (digit 0). ) Is stored. Similarly, the 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the second LED command (digit 1) by the second latch signal,
The LED command (digit 1) causes the 8-bit latch 167b to display the accessory ratio display data (digit 1).
) Is stored. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the third LED command (digit 2) by the third latch signal, and the 8-bit latch 167c receives the character ratio display data (digit 2) by the LED command (digit 2). Remembered. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the fourth LED command (digit 3) by the fourth latch signal, and the 8-bit latch 167d receives the character ratio display data (digit 3) by the LED command (digit 3). Remembered.

[LED data transmission processing]
The LED driver transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment. The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and the LED command (digit 0). ) Is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) as described above. (A16011). The gaming microcomputer 111 has an LED command (digit 2) including accessory character ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c.
) Is generated (A16015), and the LED command (digit 2) is transmitted (A16017).
.. The gaming microcomputer 111 displays the character ratio display data (which is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d).
An LED command (digit 3) including the digit 3) is generated (A16021), and the LED command (digit 3) is transmitted (A16023). In FIG. 76, the LED command (characteristic ratio display data=character code) is transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade Connection of LED Driver According to First Modification]
FIG. 77 shows an LED driver 153 (driver for ratio combination 1) according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment.
53b, details of the cascade connection of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c). In the cascade connection, the winning ratio driver 153b is the first stage, and the winning rate/discharging ball number driver 15
3c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the winning combination driver 153b, and then transmitted from the winning ratio driver 153b to the winning rate/discharging ball number driver 153c as it is. It That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code (character code) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are, in order, the driver 153b for winning ratio, the winning rate/
It is transmitted to the driver 153c for the number of discharged balls. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner by using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the winning ratio driver 153b and the winning rate/discharging ball number driver 153c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78(A) is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio display unit 68 for displaying the accessory ratio. The character ratio display unit 68 in the status display device 152 is a display device 900 of four 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot portions) arranged side by side. , A 2-digit, 3-digit 4-digit, 7-segment display 900. The character ratio display unit 68 displays a total character ratio (for example, "y50.8") and a continuous character ratio (for example, "r58.4").
) Can be switched and displayed. The digit 3 (the fourth digit from the right) is the character "y" indicating the total character ratio (generally used character ratio) or the character "y" indicating the continuous character ratio.
r" may be displayed.

The ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data. Each digit of the accessory ratio display section 68 (digit 3,
The lighting of the display device 900 of the digit 2, the digit 1, the digit 0) is controlled. This character code (characteristics ratio display data) is a ratio of characters calculated by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (FIG. 6).
, A1318 in FIG. 70). The duty ratio driver 153b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates the lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and the use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set. If so, it is set to use the decoded data. That is, the winning ratio driver 153b can set whether to use the decoding function for generating the lighting data of the winning ratio display unit 68 from the character code.

FIG. 78(B) is a diagram showing the details of the number of discharged balls display unit 66 for displaying the number of discharged balls and the payout rate display unit 67 for displaying the payout rate. The number-of-discharging-balls display unit 66 and the output rate display unit 67 of the state display device 152 are four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) display 9
00 are arranged side by side, and a display device 900 showing a digit 0 and a display device 9 showing a digit 1 are arranged from the right.
00 corresponds to the number-of-discharging-balls display unit 66, and the display device 900 indicating the digit 2 and the display 900 indicating the digit 3 correspond to the payout rate display unit 67 from the right. On the contrary, the indicator 900 indicating the digit 0 from the right and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 1 correspond to the payout rate display section 67, and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 2 and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 3 are discharged from the right. It may correspond to the sphere number display section 66. The discharged ball number display unit 66 and the payout rate display unit 67 can be displayed at the same time.

The payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c (FIG. 77) turns on the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the driver 153b for winning ratio, and the character (character) indicated by the character code. It is converted into pattern data, and the lighting of the indicator 900 at each digit of the discharged ball number display unit 66 and the ball output rate display unit 67 is controlled based on the lighting pattern data. The ball output rate/ball output rate driver 153c converts the character code into lighting pattern data (ball output display data or ball output rate display data) of the character indicated by the character code by decoding. ) And the use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoded data is set to be used. That is, the payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c can set whether or not to use the decoding function for generating the lighting data of the discharge ball number display section 66 and the discharge rate display section 67 from the character code.

[Transmission Timing Chart of Initial Setting Command According to First Modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an initial setting command sent to the combination ratio driver and the payout rate/discharged ball number driver according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG.
In the initial setting command, the address part (8 bits) is omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c, and initial setting data (8 bit) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. The initial setting command (32 bits) is transmitted in this order, and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c,
The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting section 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b are transmitted in the order of being included in the initial setting command (32 bits).

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time it transmits an initial setting command (32 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c
The initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the driver for ratio combination 153b by the latch signal.

Then, according to the next latch signal, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for ball output rate/ball discharge number. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver for duty ratio 153b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of driver for winning rate/number of discharged balls and driver for role ratio]
Referring to FIG. 80, the LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial setting process of the winning ratio driver and the payout rate/discharged ball number driver according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first sets the number-of-digits setting unit 17 of the payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c.
The initialization command (initialization data (digit) c (8 bits) related to the number of used digits of 5 (
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination ratio driver 153b is generated. ) B (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and the initial setting command (digit) c and the initial setting command (digit) b are linked in this order, and the initial setting command (digit) c and b (32 bits) are serial communication circuit. Write to the transmission buffer of and transmit with the clock signal (A150
09).

Next, the game microcomputer 111 executes an initial setting command (du) c including initial setting data (du) c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153b for role ratio is generated. Is generated (A15012), and the initial setting command (du)c is generated.
, Initial setting command (du) b are connected in this order, and initial setting command (du) c, b (32
(Bit) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15014).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the first modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the combination ratio driver and the ball output rate/discharged ball number driver according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the driver ratio driver 153b is character ratio display data (digit 0 to digit 3).
The character code stored in the ball output rate/ball output rate driver 153c is the ball output display data (digit 0, digit 1) or ball output rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). Note that FIG.
In the LED command, the address part (8 bits) is omitted.

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
These are the discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, and the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver 153b for role ratio. The discharge ball number display data (digit 1) to be generated and transmitted in a form included in the LED command (32 bits) and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for ball output rate/ball number discharged
) C (8 bits), the character ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in the order of being included in the LED command (32 bits). ..

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (32 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharge ball number display data (digit 0)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch ratio signal causes the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (
The digit 0)b is stored.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharged ball number display data (digit 1)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/discharged ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 1)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the effect ratio driver 153b.

Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 81, after that, the game microcomputer 111 outputs the output rate display data (digit 2)c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the output rate/discharge number driver 153c.
(8 bits), and the character ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in the order of being included in the command (32 bits). Ball output rate display data (digit 3)c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/ball output driver 153c, 8-bit latch 167 of the winning ratio driver 153b
The character ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in d is generated in the order of being included in the command (32 bits) and transmitted.

Therefore, in accordance with the next latch signal, the ball output rate display data (digit 2)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167c of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (digit 2).
b is stored.

Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the ball output rate display data (digit 3)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c. At the same time, the duty ratio display data (digit 3)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the duty ratio driver 153b by the LED command (digit 3)b.

[LED Data Transmission Process According to First Modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 first outputs an LED command (digit 0)c(digit 0)c(digit 0)c(8 bits)c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball discharge rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0)b including the proportion ratio display data (digit 0)b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the driver 153b for role ratio is generated (A16003). The LED command (digit 0) c and the LED command (digit 0) b, which are connected in the order of the LED command (digit 0) c and the LED command (digit 0) b, are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal ( A16006).

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
7b, the LED command (digit 1)c including the discharge ball number display data (digit 1)c is generated (A16008), and the accessory ratio display data (a16c) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the ratio driver 153b ( An LED command (digit 1)b including digit 1)b is generated (A1600
9), the LED command (digit 1)c, and the LED command (digit 1)b connected in the order of LED command (digit 1)b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16012).

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
The character ratio display data (A16014) for generating the LED command (digit 2)c including the output rate display data (digit 2)c to be stored in 7c (A16014) and to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the driver 153b for role ratio. An LED command (digit 2)b including digit 2)b is generated (A16015).
), the LED command (digit 2)c, and the LED command (digit 2)b connected in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16018).

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
The character ratio display data (A16020) for generating the LED command (digit 3)c including the output rate display data (digit 3)c stored in 7d (A16020) and stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the driver 153b for role ratio ( An LED command (digit 3)b including digit 3)b is generated (A16021).
), the LED command (digit 3)c, and the LED command (digit 3)b connected in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16024).

[Game control device according to second modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine according to the second modified example of the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the sixth embodiment is the game control device 100 of the first embodiment.
Although similar to the above, the state display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the collective display device 50. In addition, the game control device 100 of this embodiment
, A batch driver 153a, a combination ratio driver 153b, and a ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c are cascade-connected by a data signal line in that order, and a data signal line extending from the gaming microcomputer 111 is a batch driver 153a. It is connected to the.

[Cascade Connection of LED Drivers According to Second Modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing details of the cascade connection of LED drivers according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the collective driver 153a constitutes the first stage, the winning ratio driver 153b constitutes the second stage, and the payout rate/discharging ball number driver 153c constitutes the third stage. Serial data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 (initial setting command, LED command)
Is transmitted to the collective driver 153a, and the combination driver 153a is transmitted from the collective driver 153a.
It is transmitted to 53b as it is. Then, the serial data transmitted to the combination ratio driver 153b is directly transmitted from the combination ratio driver 153b to the payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code (character code) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 are, in order, a batch driver 153a, a winning combination driver 153b, a winning rate/the number of discharged balls. Is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner by using one serial communication circuit. In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 parallelizes the clock signal and the latch signal (load signal) to the batch driver 153a, the combination ratio driver 153b, and the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Send to.

The batch driver 153a controls the lighting of the batch display unit (not shown) according to the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. The collective driver 153a is a 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) display 900 (LED lamp), and the first special figure variation display portion 51 (D1) is a display unit with a digit 0 and a second. Special figure fluctuation display section 52 (D2)
Is controlled as a digit 1 display 900 (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

The collective driver 153a originally controls the 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) display 900 itself, but the variable display section 53 for the general-purpose variable display game, The round display section 60 and the dot-shaped eight LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first gaming state display section 57 are the segments (ag) of the indicator 900 of the digit 2.
, Dp) and control (see FIG. 2B etc.). Further, the collective driver 153a includes a hold storage display section (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, general figure hold display 56),
Eight dotted LED lamps (D9, of the second game state display portion 58 and the third game state display portion 59)
(D11-D16, D17) are regarded as the segments (ag, Dp) of the indicator 900 of the digit 3 and controlled (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

Note that, in the present embodiment, the batch driver 153a is actually the role ratio driver 153.
Although it is the LED driver 153 (the same IC) as b and the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, the collective driver 153a does not use the decoded data by the character generator 185 even if it has the character generator 185. It is set (not used).

[Timing of Initial Setting Command Transmission Timing According to Second Modification]
FIG. 85 is a package driver, role ratio driver, and a second modification of the sixth embodiment.
It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for a ball output rate/balls discharged. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c, and initial setting data (8 bit) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. Bit), and initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a are included in the command (48 bits) in order, and the duty ratio of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c is set. Initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) for the duty ratio setting driver 153b of the combination ratio driver 153, and duty setting unit 176 of the collective driver 153a Initial setting data (digit) a(8
The command is sent in the form of bits (48 bits) in this order.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an initial setting command (48 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c
The initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the driver for ratio combination 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the latch signal causes the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a to store the initial setting data (digit) a.

Then, according to the next latch signal, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for ball output rate/ball discharge number. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver for duty ratio 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the latch signal causes the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a to store the initial setting data (du) a.

[Initial setting processing of ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver, role ratio driver, batch driver]
An LED driver initial setting process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a collective driver, role ratio driver, according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment,
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the initialization processing of the driver for a ball output rate / number of balls discharged.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first sets the number-of-digits setting unit 17 of the payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c.
The initialization command (initialization data (digit) c (8 bits) related to the number of used digits of 5 (
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination ratio driver 153b is generated. ) B (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and initial setting command (digit) a including initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) relating to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a. (16 bits) is generated (A15008), the initial setting command (digit) c,
Initialization commands (digits) c, b, and a (48 bits), which are an initial setting command (digit) b and an initial setting command (digit) a, are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A15010).

Next, the game microcomputer 111 executes an initial setting command (du) c including initial setting data (du) c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153b for the ratio combination. (A15012), an initial setting command (du) a (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) a relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a is generated (A15013), and An initial setting command (du) c, b, a (48 bits) in which a setting command (du) c, an initial setting command (du) b, and an initial setting command (du) a are connected in this order is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15015).
).

[LED Command Transmission Timing Chart According to Second Modification]
FIG. 87 is a package driver, a ratio driver, and a second modification of the sixth embodiment.
It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for a winning rate/the number of discharged balls. Here, the character code stored in the driver 153b for winning ratio is the character ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the driver 153c for winning rate/discharging balls is discharge. It is ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or ball output rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). The collective driver 153a stores lighting pattern data (digit 0 to digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as "lighting data"). In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted.

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, 8 in the ratio driver 153b
The character code (digit 0)b (8 bits) stored in the bit latch 167a, and the lighting data (digit 0)a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a are LED commands (digit 0). ) C, b, a (48 bits) are generated and transmitted in the form of inclusion, and then the character code (digit 1) c (digit 1) c (stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c) 8 bits), 8-bit latch 1 of driver 153b for ratio
The character code (digit 1)b (8 bits) stored in 67b, and the lighting data (digit 1)a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a are stored in the order of L.
ED command (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits) is generated and transmitted.

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharge ball number display data (digit 0)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch ratio signal causes the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (
The digit 0)b is stored. At the same time, the batch signal 153a is generated by the latch signal.
The lighting data (digit 0)a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharged ball number display data (digit 1)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/discharged ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (digit 1).
) B is stored. At the same time, the latch signal causes the batch driver 153a to output 8
Lighting data (digit 1) a is stored in the bit latch 167b.

Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 87, the game microcomputer 111 thereafter stores a character code (digit 2)c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
(8 bits), the character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153b for the ratio, and the lighting data (digit 2) a (8 digits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153a for collective operation. These are LED commands (digit 2) c and b in the order of 8 bits.
, A (48 bits) to generate and send, and then the ball output rate/ball discharge driver 1
The character code (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of 53c,
Character code (digit 3) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153b
b (8 bits), lighting data (digit 3) a (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the collective driver 153a are included in the LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) in this order. It is generated and sent in a form.

Therefore, in accordance with the next latch signal, the output rate display data (digit 2)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the output rate/discharged ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the driver for role ratio 1
The accessory ratio display data (digit 2)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of 53b. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167c of the collective driver 153a to store the lighting data (digit 2)a.

Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the output rate display data (digit 3)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153b for role ratio to display role ratio display data (digit 3).
b is stored. At the same time, lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the collective driver 153a by the latch signal.

[LED data transmission process according to second modification]
The LED driver transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing a procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 first outputs an LED command (digit 0)c(digit 0)c(digit 0)c(8 bits)c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball discharge rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0)b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0)b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the driver 153b for role ratio is generated (A16003). 8-bit latch 176 of batch driver 153a
An LED command (digit 0) a including the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of LED of Toku-zu 1) stored in a is generated (A16004). And LED command (digit 0) c, LE
Write the LED command (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits), which is a combination of D command (digit 0) b and LED command (digit 0) a, in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmit it together with the clock signal. (A16007).

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
LED command (including digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in 7b
The digit 1) c (16 bits) is generated (A16008), and the LED command (digit 1) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the driver 153b for role ratio is generated. Then, (A16009), an LED command (digit 1)a including a lighting code (digit 1)a (display data of special figure 2 LED) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the batch driver 153a is generated (A16010). The LED command (digit 1) c, the LED command (digit 1) b, and the LED command (digit 1) a are connected in this order.
c, b, and a (48 bits) are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16013).

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
The LED command (digit 2)c (16 bits) including the output rate display data (digit 2)c (8 bits) stored in 7c is generated (A16014), and is stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the driver 153b for role ratio. LED command (digit 2) that includes the accessory character display data (digit 2) b to be stored
)B is generated (A16015), and the LED command (digit 2) including the lighting code (digit 2) a (regular figure/round/first game state display data) stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the batch driver 153a is generated. ) A is generated (A16016). And LED command (digit 2
) C, an LED command (digit 2) b, and an LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits), which are connected in this order in the same order, are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16019).

The game microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
The LED command (digit 3)c (16 bits) including the output rate display data (digit 3)c (8 bits) to be stored in 7d is generated (A16020), and is stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the driver 153b for role ratio. LED command (digit 3) including the accessory character display data (digit 3) b to be stored
)B is generated (A16021), and the LE including the lighting code (digit 3)a (display data of hold/second and third gaming states) stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the batch driver 153a is included.
The D command (digit 3) a is generated (A16022). And LED command (digit 3) c
, LED command (digit 3)b and LED command (digit 3)a are connected in this order, and LED command (digit 3)c, b, a (48 bits) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16025).

[Operation/Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 has a game control program storage means (ROM 111b) for storing a game control program (invariant information (program) for game control), and a game control program (for game control). Arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) for performing a predetermined arithmetic processing based on invariable information (program), and arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111)
), and a drive unit (LED driver 153) for driving the light emitting unit (characteristics ratio display unit 68) based on the drive data (LED command) output by (1). Driving means (LED
The driver 153) is provided with a setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) for setting the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit (role ratio display unit 68), and the game control program
A main process (A1001) for controlling the progress of the game and a main process (A10) at predetermined time intervals.
01-) interrupt processing (A1301) which is executed by interruption, and the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111), in the interrupt processing (A1301), the setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting). Unit 176) (A15001) which transmits initial setting data for initializing (at least one of the plurality of setting units) to the driving unit (LED driver 153), and then the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving unit (LED). It is transmitted to the driver 153).

As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the LED driver 153 can be normally restored in the interrupt processing, and the correct setting value can be obtained. After that, it becomes possible to output the driving data (LED command), and it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) from being turned off due to noise or the like.

In the interrupt processing (A1301), after transmitting the driving data (LED command) to the driving unit (LED driver 153), at least one of the plurality of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) is selected. The initial setting data for initializing the
A configuration for transmitting to the ED driver 153) is also possible. In this case, in order to transmit the driving data in the next interrupt processing, the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means in the current interrupt processing to initialize the setting unit.

That is, in the interrupt process (A1301), if the initialization data is transmitted to the driving means together with the driving data, the status display device 152 (and the collective display device) is independent of the transmission order of the driving data and the initialization data. It is possible to avoid turning off due to noise or the like in 50).

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) can also send the initial setting data to the driving means (LED driver 153) in the main processing (A1001). As a result, it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 from being turned off even before interrupt processing is entered.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176).
Is a digit number setting unit 175 that sets the number of light emitting elements (display 900) to emit light in the light emitting unit (characteristic ratio display unit 68), and a duty setting unit that sets the duty ratio of the light emitting elements (display 900). 176, and.

As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, after setting the correct set value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratio (light emission intensity, brightness)) It becomes possible to output drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

According to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is the accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays the accessory ratio. As a result, the accessory ratio display section 68 can be displayed reliably according to the game control program even after the main processing.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 89 to 93. The seventh embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but differs from the first embodiment in the procedure of changing the test shot test signal (test signal) and the probability set value (set value) transmitted to the test shot test apparatus. Is different. The test-shooting test device is an external device existing outside the gaming machine 10.

The device configuration in which the present embodiment is performed is the same as that shown in FIG. 3, except that the game control device 100 (game control means) and the relay board 70 are mainly used, and the game control device 100 includes the game microcomputer 111. , Setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102),
It has an input port 123, a data bus 140, a buffer 133, and a sixth output port 141. Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value changing switch 102) and a probability setting value display device 143 (display section). In addition,
As described in the first embodiment, the buffer 133 is provided with output ports (corresponding to the test signal output ports 1 to 6 used in the output processing of FIG. 7).

The input port 123, the buffer 133 (second output unit), and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit) are connected to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Input port 1
A setting key switch 93 and a set value changing switch 102 are connected to the unit 23. The relay board 70 is connected to the buffer 133. A probability set value display device 143 is connected to the sixth output port 141.

A dedicated address is assigned to each of the buffer 133 (second output unit) (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit), and the gaming microcomputer 111 is used.
Can output information to any one of the buffer 133 (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 by designating an address.

The probability setting value display device 143, for example, like the status display device 152 shown in FIG. 71, is a 7-segment type (8 segment type including a dot display unit) display (LED lamp) and the probability setting value information of the LED. Lighting pattern data representing the lighting pattern (probability set value display data)
It is composed of a driver for converting to. Further, the test-shooting test device can also be provided with the same display and driver as the probability setting value display device 143.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs information on the probability setting value area (probability setting value display data corresponding to the fixed value of the probability setting value) to the sixth output port 141, or information on the working probability setting value area (provisional probability setting value). Probability set value display data) corresponding to the value is output. On the other hand, gaming microcomputer 11
1 outputs the information of the probability setting value area to the buffer 133 (test signal output port), but does not output the information of the working probability setting value area.

As a result, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the fixed value and the provisional value of the probability setting value. If the test-firing test device includes a display device similar to the probability setting value display device 143, only the confirmed probability setting value is displayed on the test-firing test device.

[Probability Set Value Change Processing of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process according to the seventh embodiment. The probability setting value changing process according to the seventh embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), except that step A20002 is added between step A2413 and step A2414, and step A20003 between step A2420 and step A2421. Has been added.

At step A2002, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a test signal with lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) corresponding to the fixed value of the probability set value that is the same as the one output to the probability set value display device 143 as a test firing test signal. Save to the data area. For example, the lighting pattern data and the test signal output data are the same "10111110B" ((a, b, c, d
, E, f, g, Dp)=(1,0,1,1,1,1,1,1,0)) (for the lighting pattern data, refer to the sixth embodiment). As a result, the test-firing test device can collect the fixed value of the probability setting value as the test-firing test signal, and can display the fixed value of the probability setting value when the test-firing device is equipped with a display.

In step A20003, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the test shot test signal once erased in step A2418 into the test signal output data area again. This allows
Even after the probability setting value changing process (main process), the test firing test device can collect the fixed value of the probability setting value as a test firing test signal, and when the test firing test device is equipped with an indicator, the probability setting value is set. The confirmed value of can be displayed.

[Display example of probability setting value on probability setting display device and test shooting test device]
FIG. 90 shows a lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device 143 and a test shooting test signal sent to the test shooting test device in a 7-segment type (when the dot display unit is included, when changing the setting of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying on an 8 segment type display. Here, a case where the probability setting value is changed from 1 to 6 will be described as an example.

In the present embodiment, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value saved in the probability set value area is saved as the test shooting test signal in the test shooting test display data area regardless of whether the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off. Has become. The test-shooting test apparatus can always collect the fixed value of the probability set value as the test-shooting test signal, and can always display the fixed value of the probability set value when the test-shooting apparatus is equipped with a display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value “1” is displayed on the display of the test-firing test device by the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) as the test-firing test signal. There is.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the setting becomes variable, and the gaming microcomputer 111 loads the value in the probability setting value area and sets it in the working probability setting value area as initial data when changing the probability setting value. Save (A1040). At this stage, step A2401 (=Y)→step A2406 (=N)→step A2407 (=N)→step A2411 (=N) in FIG. 89 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90 (display by the output processing according to FIG. 7 ), “1” (provisional value) is displayed as the lighting pattern data on the probability setting value display device 143. The display on the display remains "1" (the fixed value before the change).

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG. 89.
Since (=Y), steps A2408 to A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, “2” (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (extinguishing period). Remains "1" (the fixed value before the change).

When the set value change switch 102 is further depressed, step A240 in FIG.
8-Step A2410 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, every time the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 is “3”→“4”→“5”.
→”6” (provisional value in each case), but the display on the display of the test-shooting tester remains “1” (confirmed value before change).

Then, when there is an input (step A2411 (=Y)) from the touch switch, step A2412, step A2413 and step A20002 are executed, and the probability set value “6” (in the test signal output data area and the probability set value display data area). The probability setting value display data corresponding to the (determined value) is overwritten. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the probability setting value display device 14
The display of 3 changes from "6" (provisional value) to "6" (confirmed value), and the display of the indicator of the test-fire test apparatus changes from "1" (provisional value) to "6" (confirmed value).

Further, by executing Step A2406 (=Y) and Step A2416 (=Y), Step A2418 is executed, and the probability set value display data (probability) saved in the test signal output data area and the probability set value display data area is stored. The setting value "6") is once deleted, but is restored by steps A2420 and A20003. In this case, the display of the probability set value display device 143 and the display of the test-shooting test device maintains "6" (fixed value).

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 89, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value "6" is saved in the probability setting value display data area in step A2420. A20003 saves the test firing test signal (lighting pattern data) corresponding to the probability setting value “6” in the test signal output data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A
2405, A2502), the probability setting value display data is not displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (step A1613 (=N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test shooting test device (A1621, A1622, A1624). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
The probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the display of the probability setting value “6” is maintained on the display of the test-shooting test device.

[First Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 91 shows the probability setting value display device 14 when the setting is changed in the first modification of the seventh embodiment.
3 is a schematic diagram in which the lighting pattern data transmitted to No. 3 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test apparatus are displayed on a 7-segment type (8 segment type including a dot display unit) display device.

The probability set value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device can display lighting pattern data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) of 7 segments and dot data (Dp) (additional information). (See FIG. 71). For example, the dot display section associated with the 7-segment segment is turned on when the dot data (Dp) is "1" and turned off when the dot data (Dp) is "0".

As described above, the output processing shown in FIG. 7 (step A1621, step A1622 (=Y
), step A1623, step A1624), the test firing test signal and the setting key switch ON information are combined and output. On the other hand, steps A1621 and A162
By 2 (=N), when there is no setting key switch ON information, the test firing test signal is output as it is.

In the present embodiment, when the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state, the setting key switch ON signal is input to the gaming microcomputer 111. Here, the setting key switch ON signal can be expressed as "1", for example. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is in the off state, it can be considered that the setting key switch off signal (there is no setting key switch on signal) is input to the gaming microcomputer 111. At this time, the setting key switch-off signal can be expressed as “0”, for example.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the test firing test signal is the lighting pattern data, the setting key switch on information is the dot data (1), the setting key switch off information is the dot data (0), and the lighting pattern data and the dot data (Dp The data obtained by synthesizing =0 or 1) is output to the test firing test device. As a result, the confirmed value of the probability setting value is displayed on the test-shooting test device based on the lighting pattern data. Further, it is possible to know whether the setting key switch 93 is in the on/off state, that is, whether or not the setting is being changed, by turning on/off the dot display portion depending on the presence or absence of the dot data (1). In the present embodiment, it is possible to know that the dot display unit is on and the setting is being changed by the dot data (1), and it is known that the dot display unit is off and the setting change is completed by the dot data (0). can do.

In the present embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) including the lighting pattern data (determined value of the probability setting value) and the dot data in the buffer 133 ( The test signal output port) and the relay board 70 (FIG. 3) are used to output to the test-shooting test apparatus. This allows the test-shooting test apparatus to grasp not only the fixed value of the current probability setting value but also whether the setting is being changed.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the first modification, the fixed value of the probability setting value is always displayed on the display of the test-shooting test apparatus, but when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the dot lights up,
The probability setting value and the dot lighting are maintained while the probability setting value (provisional value) is switched from "1" to "6". Then, when the new setting value is confirmed, the updated confirmed value of the probability setting value is displayed on the display of the test firing test apparatus, and the dot is turned off when the setting key switch 93 is turned off. The operation is the same as in FIG. 90 except that the dots are turned on and off.

[Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment. In the second modified example, the dot data (Dp
(0 or 1) is also displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 so that the operator who changes the setting can visually judge whether or not the setting is being changed.

In FIG. 92, compared with FIG. 90, step A20001 is added between step A2406 and step A2407, and accordingly step A2409 is changed to step A2409a, step A2413 is changed to step 2413a, and step A2420 is changed to step A2420a. Has been changed to.

At step A2406 (=N), at least the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state. Therefore, in step A20001, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=1) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value display device 143 can display the probability setting value (provisional value) before the input of the setting value change switch while the dot display section is lit.

In Step A2409a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability set value display data and the dot data (Dp=1) corresponding to the work probability set value in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (provisional value) changed by the setting value changing switch input on the probability setting value display device 143 can be displayed while the dot display section is lit.

In Step A2413a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. This allows the probability setting value display device 143 to display the probability setting value (determined value) after inputting the setting value change switch while turning off the dot display unit.

In Step A2420a, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability set value display data and the dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the work probability set value in the probability set value display data area. This allows the dot display unit to remain off. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2405, A2502), The probability setting value display data is not displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (step A1613 (=N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test shooting test device (A1621, A1622, A1624).

FIG. 93 shows the probability setting value display device 14 when the setting is changed in the second modification of the seventh embodiment.
3 is a schematic diagram in which the lighting pattern data transmitted to No. 3 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test apparatus are displayed on a 7-segment type (8 segment type including a dot display unit) display device.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value “1” is displayed as a test shooting test signal (lighting pattern data) on the display of the test shooting test device. The information displayed on the display unit of the test-shooting test apparatus is the same as that of the above-described first modification, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value display data and the dot data (1) corresponding to the working probability setting value are saved in the probability setting value display data area (step A20001). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (display by the output processing according to FIG. 7), “1” (provisional value) is displayed as the lighting pattern data on the probability setting value display device 143, and the dot display section is turned on. ..

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG.
Since the result of the determination is “Y”, steps A2408 to A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, “2” (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (extinguishing period), and the dot display section is lit.

When the set value change switch 102 is further pressed, step A240 in FIG.
8. Step A2409a and step A2410 are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the probability setting value display device 143 displays “3”→“4”→“5”→“6” (all are provisional values) every time the setting value change switch 102 is pressed. And the dot display section also lights up in synchronization with the display of the probability setting value.

When the touch switch is input (step A2411 (=Y)), step A
2412, step A 2413 a, and step A 20002 are executed, and the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value “6” (fixed value) is overwritten in the probability setting value display data area. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 is “6” (provisional value).
Lights up and the dot display unit lights up, and then "6" (fixed value) lights up and the dot display unit goes out. Thereby, the operator can visually recognize that the probability setting value has been updated from "1" to "6".

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 92, the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the probability setting value (confirmed value) are set at the probability in step A2420a. It is saved in the value display data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2
405, A2502), the probability setting value display device 143 does not display the probability setting value display data (step A1613 (=N)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off. Note that, in FIG. 93, it is possible to omit the lighting of the dot display section of the display of the test-fire test apparatus.

[Operation/Effect of Seventh Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is provided with the game control means (the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100) capable of executing the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the start condition. In the case where the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 includes a setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting value corresponding to a setting related to a game, a display unit (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying the setting value, and a display unit. A first output section (sixth output port 141) from which the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) is output, and a second output section different from the first output section (
A buffer 133 and a test signal output port). Game control means (game microcomputer 1
11) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) based on the set value and outputs it to the display unit (probability set value display device 143) via the first output unit (sixth output port 141). The lighting pattern data can be output to an external device (test firing test device) as a test signal (test firing test signal) of the gaming machine through the second output section (buffer 133, test signal output port).

Therefore, by making the test signal (test-shooting test signal) output to the external device (test-shooting test device) the same data as the lighting pattern, it is possible to ensure that the test signal is unprocessed and correct information, and the display of the gaming machine 10 is displayed. Even when the set value is not displayed on the unit (probability set value display device 143), the probability set value can be notified to an external device provided outside the gaming machine 10. Further, when the undecided setting information whose setting is being changed is output to the first output unit (sixth output port 141) but not to the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port), it is undecided. It is possible to prevent the setting information from being output to the outside and prevent confusion due to unnecessary information.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability set value display device 143) displays the lighting pattern data (
Probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp=0or1)) different from the setting value can be displayed, and the setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) can change the setting value. A switch for changing to a setting variable state (setting key switch 93)
And the game control means, when the switch is in the ON state, additional information (dot data (Dp
=1)) is generated and additional information can be output to an external device (testing test device) together with the test signal.

Therefore, the fixed value of the set value is displayed on the external device (test-shooting test device) based on the lighting pattern data. Further, the external device can recognize the on/off state of the switch (setting key switch 93), that is, whether the setting is being changed, based on the presence or absence of the additional information (dot data (Dp=1)). In the present embodiment, for example, in the external device (testing test device),
With the dot data (Dp=1) as additional information, it can be understood that the dot display unit is lit and the setting is being changed. With the dot data (Dp=0), the dot display unit is turned off and the setting change is completed. You can figure out that.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability set value display device 143) displays the lighting pattern data (
Probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp=0or1)) different from the setting value can be displayed, and the setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) can change the setting value. A switch for changing to a setting variable state (setting key switch 93)
The game control means (game microcomputer 111) generates additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) when the switch is in the ON state, and displays the additional information together with the lighting pattern data (probability set value). It is output to the display device 143).

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) on the display unit (whether or not the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who is changing the setting is in the process of changing the setting or has completed the setting change. Can be judged visually.

[Eighth Embodiment]
FIG. 94A is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 1) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. The game control system according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, but is simplified and displayed in the minimum necessary configuration for explaining the effect of the invention. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is
At least a game control device 100 (game control means) and a power supply device 400 (power supply means) are provided. The power supply device 400 is supplied with an external rated voltage (for example, AC24V from the game island) to generate a predetermined power supply voltage (for example, DC32V, DC12V, DC5V) to generate the game control device 1
Output to 00.

In the game control device 100, the probability setting value display device 143A (probability setting value display device 143)
And a driver 143a is attached. The probability setting value display device 143A is the power supply device 4
It is driven by receiving the electric power (for example, DC 5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 constituting the No. 00, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. Driver 14
3a converts the information of the probability setting value output from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data and outputs the lighting pattern data. The probability setting value display device 143A can display the probability setting value based on the lighting pattern data input from the driver 143a.

A probability set value display device 143B is attached to the power supply device 400. The probability setting value display device 143B is driven by receiving electric power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without passing through the game control device 100, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. There is. Therefore, the probability setting value display device 143B also includes the driver 143.
The probability setting value can be displayed by the lighting pattern data input from a. As described above, by disposing the probability setting value display device 143B in the power supply device 400, it is possible to easily confirm the probability setting value. Further, since the probability setting value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without passing through the game control device 100, power is supplied from the game control device 100 to the probability setting value display device 143B. Since the wiring for performing the process can be omitted, the cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 94A (broken line), in the present embodiment, the set value change switch 102 can be attached to the power supply device 400. As described above, the set value change switch 102 is
It can also be used as an M clear switch. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when performing the setting change using the setting value change switch 102 or the RAM clear.

The display of the probability setting values and the control of turning on/off the dot display unit on the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B are the same as those in the seventh embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94B is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 2) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94B, in the eighth embodiment, a DC/DC converter 143b (voltage conversion means) is attached to the game control device 100, and its output voltage is set to the probability set value display device 143A.
Also, it is suitable to supply to the probability setting value display device 143B.

The arrangement of FIG. 94B is, for example, when the normal power supply unit 410 does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC5V) of the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B, or when the drive voltage is generated, the capacity is insufficient. This arrangement is suitable when the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B cannot be driven. At this time, the output voltage (for example, DC12V) of the normal power supply unit 410 is input to the input side of the DC/DC converter 143b, and the output side (for example, DC5V) is set to the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B.
Connected to.

Here, the wiring 143c for outputting the lighting pattern data from the driver 143a to the probability setting value display device 143B, and the probability setting value display device 143 from the DC/DC converter 143b.
In the wiring 143d that supplies the drive voltage to B, a harness is formed by a portion that straddles between the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400, and is connected to the harness by a portion arranged in the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400. It is also possible to form the respective connectors and connect the two connectors by the harness. Thereby, the wiring 143c and the wiring 1
It is possible to reduce the occurrence of disconnection of any one of 43d and prevent malfunction of the probability setting value display device 143B.

[Operation/Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment includes the game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variable display is provided. When the game stop result is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 is capable of changing a set value according to a setting relating to a game and a power source means (power source device 400) for generating a predetermined power source voltage from a rated voltage supplied from the outside of the gaming machine and supplying it to the game control means. Setting changing means (setting changing device 42). The game control means (game control device 100) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) related to the probability set value. The power supply unit (power supply device 400) is a display unit (probability set value display device 143B) that displays the probability set value based on the lighting pattern data (probability set value display data).
Equipped with.

Therefore, by disposing the display unit (probability set value display device 143B) on the power supply means (power supply device 400), it is possible to easily confirm the set value and increase the chances of confirming the set value. ..

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability set value display device 143B) has a power supply voltage (predetermined voltage value) from the power supply device (power supply device 400) without the intervention of the game control device (game control device 100).
Drive voltage) is supplied. As a result, the wiring for supplying power from the game control means to the display section can be omitted, so that the cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is a power supply means (power supply device 4).
00) and voltage conversion means (DC/DC converter 143b) for converting and supplying the voltage to the display unit (probability set value display device 143B).

Therefore, even when the power supply unit (power supply device 400) does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC5V) of the display unit (probability set value display device 143B), even if the drive voltage is generated, the display unit is driven due to insufficient capacity. If not, voltage conversion means (DC/DC converter 143b)
Can reliably supply the power supply voltage to the probability set value display device 143B.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability set value display device 143B) can display the set value related to the lighting pattern data and additional information (dot data (Dp=0or1)) different from the set value, and the setting change can be made. The means (setting changing device 42) is provided with a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the set value can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) is a switch (setting key). When the switch 93) is on, additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) is generated, and the additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) is output to the display unit together with the lighting pattern data.

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp=0or1)) on the display unit (whether or not the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who is changing the setting is in the process of changing the setting or has completed the setting change. Can be visually determined by the display content of the display unit arranged in the power supply unit (power supply device 400).

[Ninth Embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to external information output when changing settings.

[Timing chart of external information output when setting is changed]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing an example of the external information output timing when the setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) is turned on (first mode) at time u2, and then the time u
At 3, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time u3, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag because the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1
038), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) that was in the off state (setting value display, A1615).
..

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the character ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78) of the state display device 152 that displays the character ratio is used as the probability set value display device 143. That is, during changing the setting or confirming the setting, the probability is displayed on any one of the four 7-segment type display units (8 segment type including the dot portion) of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78). The set value should be displayed. The character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display portion 68 except when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Therefore, the accessory ratio display portion 68 is used for displaying the accessory ratio and the set value. Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152 as the probability set value display device 143, and the contents regarding the external information output described in the ninth embodiment can be applied to other embodiments (especially the first embodiment). ~ 8th embodiment), the probability setting value display device 143 is changed to the state display device 15
It may be applied also when it is provided independently of 2.

Then, by setting the probability setting value changing flag, the gaming machine state shifts from the game mode to the setting changing mode (setting variable state). The game mode indicates a state of the gaming machine other than the setting change mode (setting change state) and the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state, set value confirmation mode) described later.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u3, the game control device 100 executes the external information editing process (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6). Then, as described above in the description of the external information editing process, the setting change mode (setting change state)
Therefore, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the security signal control timer (A1037) and outputs external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal to the external device (external information output ON, A1611). ). The external device (various external devices) is a device provided outside the gaming machine 10, and is, for example, an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer). In this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A1037). Note that the predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output of FIG. 95, for example. In this way, the game control device 100 can output a predetermined signal as external information by including the information regarding the setting (for example, information indicating that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later) in the security signal to the external device. Functions as an external signal output means.

The setting value changing switch 102 (setting switch, setting value changing button) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) is operated (pressed) by the operator to change from setting 1 to setting 2 at time u4, and time u5. Then, from setting 2 to setting 3, at time u6, from setting 3 to setting 4. In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the setting value (setting) is changed by +1 and after the setting 6, the setting value change switch 102 is operated to change the setting value to setting 1. Specifically, every time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the set value 1→the set value 2→
The set value (setting) is changed as follows: set value 3→set value 4→set value 5→set value 6→set value 1→set value 2→...

Thereafter, at time u7, the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is turned on to set the probability setting value changed flag (A2414), and the probability setting value is changed (A2414).
The result of 2406 is “Y”, the setting is confirmed). At this time, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs the predetermined signal that has been output in order to include the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and output it as external information (predetermined signal). Turn off once. That is, even when an extremely long predetermined time is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer at time u3, the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is temporarily interrupted.

Then, while the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is interrupted at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs a new predetermined signal (external information output) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, For example, by turning it on for 256 msec), the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode is included in the security signal, and then the output of the new predetermined signal is turned off. After that, the game control device 100 ends the interruption of the external information output, and turns on the external information output again. The interruption time is the time before the output of the new predetermined signal is turned on for a predetermined time during the interruption (a predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec), and the time before the output of the new predetermined signal is turned on. Time to turn off external information output (for example, 256 msec)
And a time (for example, 256 msec) for turning off the output of the new predetermined signal later is set to a time (for example, 768 msec).

After that, at time u9, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off (second mode), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), and the security signal control is performed together with the probability setting value changing flag. The timer is forcibly cleared regardless of whether a predetermined time has elapsed, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state is changed from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change is completed. Further, when the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (in the present embodiment, the status display device). The character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display portion 68 of 152) (character ratio display). The probability set value display device 143
Instead of displaying the information on the character ratio, the state display device 152 which is also used may display information on the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state) ( Display rate of balls, display of number of discharged balls, display of base value).

[Modified example of external information output timing chart when changing settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a modification of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of changing the setting in FIG. 95 will be described. FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the external information output timing when the setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 96, only the external information output timing in FIG. 95 will be extracted and described.

First, FIG. 96(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when changing the settings of FIG.

As described above, at time u3, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 (setting key) turned on, the game control device 100 outputs an external information (security signal). turn on.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at time u7 (setting is confirmed), the game control device 100 temporarily interrupts the external information output, and includes the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode at time u8 in the security signal to the outside. The external information output is turned on for a predetermined time (a predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) to output it as information (a predetermined signal), and then the external information output is turned off.

After that, after a lapse of an interruption time (for example, 768 msec) from the time u7, the game control device 1
00, after turning on the external information output again, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u9 to turn off the external information output and change the gaming machine state from the setting change mode to the game mode. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96B, a first modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of changing the setting will be described.

At time u3, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output as in FIG. 96(a).

Then, with the setting confirmation at time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output.

After that, at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs the external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse) in order to output the external information (predetermined signal) by including the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal. Width, for example 256msec) After turning on,
The external information output is turned off. Thereafter, the external information output is maintained in the off state, and the time u9
The setting key switch 93 is turned off. As described above, in the first modified example, after the external information output is ended instead of being temporarily interrupted when the setting is confirmed at time t7, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at time t8.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96C, a second modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of changing the setting will be described.

At the time u3, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 turned on, in the second modified example, the external information output is maintained in the off state.

When the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). After that, the external information output is maintained in the off state again, and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u9. As described above, in the second modification, the external information output is turned on for the predetermined time when the setting is confirmed at time t7, and is kept off except when the setting is determined.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 96(d), a third modified example of the external information output timing when the setting is changed will be described.

At time u3, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the game control device 100 outputs the external information, as in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b). turn on.

After that, when the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. As described above, in the third modification, the external information output is maintained in the on state from the time when the power is turned on at time t3 to the time when the setting is confirmed at time t7, and is turned off after the setting is confirmed.

[Timing chart for external information output when confirming settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of confirming the setting according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the external information output timing when the setting is confirmed according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u10, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u11. Then, the probability setting value display device 143 (the accessory ratio display portion 6 of the state display device 152).
8 also serves), since the game state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u11 is the game mode, the character ratio is displayed (character ratio display).

After that, at time u12, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on while the power of the gaming machine 10 is on, the gaming control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). The probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) where the accessory ratio was displayed (setting value display, A1615).

Then, by setting the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, the gaming machine state shifts from the game mode to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100,
External information edit processing (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) by timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6)
Is running. Since the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) has been entered as described above in the description of the external information editing process, the initial value of the security signal control timer is set (A25).
07), external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal is output to the external device (external information output ON, A1611). In the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A2507). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output of FIG. 97, for example.

Then, at time u13, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, so that the security signal control timer is forcibly cleared together with the probability setting value confirmation mode flag regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (A2510). The external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the gaming mode, and the setting confirmation is completed. At the same time, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511), and the character ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) for which the setting value was displayed (character part ratio display). ). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the character ratio display, and may be a ball output rate display, a discharge ball number display, or a base value display.

[Modification of external information output timing chart when confirming settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a modification of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of confirming the setting in FIG. 97 will be described. FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the external information output timing when confirming the settings according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 98, only the external information output timing of FIG. 97 will be extracted and described.

First, FIG. 98(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of external information output when the setting of FIG. 97 is confirmed.

As described above, after the power is turned on at time u11, the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12.
When the (setting key) is turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output (security signal).

Then, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u13, the gaming control device 100 turns off the external information output and shifts the gaming machine state from the setting confirmation mode to the gaming mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98(b), a modification of the external information output timing at the time of setting confirmation will be described.

After the power is turned on at time u11 and the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100 includes information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been entered in the security signal as external information (predetermined signal). External information output for a predetermined time (for example, 2).
56 msec) and then the external information output is turned off. After that, the external information output is maintained in the off state, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time u13, the game control device includes the information that the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the game mode in the security signal. External information (predetermined signal) to output as external information for a predetermined time (for example, 25
(6 msec) After turning on again, the external information output is turned off. As described above, in the modification of the external information output timing at the time of setting confirmation, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off. The external information output is maintained in the off state except when the output is performed.

[Timing chart of external information output when changing settings in modification]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of the external information output timing at the time of changing the settings according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. Note that in the following description of FIGS. 99 and 100, the description overlapping with FIG. 95 will be appropriately omitted.

In this modification, a RAM initialization switch is independently provided in addition to the setting value change switch 102. If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on when the power is turned on (power is restored), the setting change mode (setting change state) is set. Specifically, after turning on the setting key switch 93, while turning on (pressing) the RAM initialization switch, the gaming machine 1
When the power of 0 is turned on, the mode changes to the setting change mode (setting variable state).

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time w1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w2. Then, the RWM clear switch is pressed at time w3, and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time w4 while maintaining the pressed state,
The probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), and the mode is changed to the setting changing mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment, the set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (setting display device) that was in the off state (set value display, A1615). After that, the pressed state of the RWM clear switch is released at time w5, and the set value (setting) is changed each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch) is operated at times w6, w7, and w8.

Then, at time w9, the setting key switch 93 is turned off to set the probability setting value changed flag (A2414), and the probability setting value has been changed (result of A2406 is "Y", setting is confirmed). As described above, in the present modification, the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 instead of the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24.

Further, at the time w9, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, so that the RA to be cleared is cleared.
The M area is also cleared to 0 (A2417). Therefore, the security signal control timer is cleared together with the probability setting value changing flag, the external information output is turned off, the game machine state is changed from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change is completed. When the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the accessory ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) where the setting value was displayed. Is done (display of character role ratio).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 outputs the external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse) in order to output the external information (predetermined signal) including the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal. Width, for example, 256 msec), and then the external information output is turned off. As described above, at the external information output timing when changing the setting according to the present modification, the external information output is ended when the setting is confirmed at time w9, and then the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at time w10.

Next, FIG. 100 is another example in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of changing the setting according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment is changed. In FIG. 100, only the external information output timing in FIG. 99 will be extracted and described.

FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when changing the settings in FIG.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w4 and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed, the game control device 100 causes the external information Turn output on.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9 to confirm the setting (setting confirmation), the game control device 100 turns off the external information output (security signal).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 outputs the external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse) in order to output the external information (predetermined signal) by including the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal. Width, for example, 256 msec), and then the external information output is turned off. After that, the external information output is kept off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(b), a first modified example will be described in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of changing the setting according to the modified example is changed.

At time w4, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is being pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, in the first modification, the external information output is in the off state. Maintained.

When the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). After that, the external information output is kept off again. As described above, in the first modification, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting is confirmed at time w9, and is kept off except when the setting is determined.

Further, with reference to FIG. 100(c), a second modified example in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of changing the setting according to the modified example is changed will be described.

At time w4, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the gaming control device 100 displays
Similarly to 0(a), the external information output is turned on.

After that, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. As described above, in the second modified example, the external information output is maintained in the on state from the time the power is turned on at time w4 to the time the setting is confirmed at time w9, and is turned off after the setting is confirmed.

[Operation and effect of ninth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C) is variably displayed is a special result ( It is possible to generate a special game state in which a game value is given to a player in the case of a big hit result mode, a big hit stop pattern, and a special result mode. The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (setting values, probability setting values) related to gaming conditions, and an external device (for example, an information collecting terminal or a game) provided outside the gaming machine 10. Internal management system (hall computer)
) External signal output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information. The setting changing unit includes a setting shifting unit (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting variable state (setting changing mode) in which the setting can be changed by being set to the first mode (ON). The external signal output means outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output (e.g., security signal output)) in response to the change to the setting variable state by the setting change means.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, when the setting variable state (setting change mode) is entered, the external signal output means (game control device 100) sends information regarding the setting to the external device (eg, the setting change mode is entered). Information indicating that) is output as external information (predetermined signal), it is possible to notify the game hall manager through an external device. As a result, the game arcade manager can play the game machine 10 at a timing not intended by the game arcade manager (for example, fraud or mechanical trouble).
When the shifts to the setting change mode, the shift can be immediately noticed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the setting change means (setting change device 42) can be changed by operating the setting change means (setting change mode) while being operated. Operation means (setting value change switch 102, setting switch, setting value change button) are provided. The external signal output means (game control device 100) changes the setting (setting value, probability setting value) by the changing operation means, and then the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) is in the second mode (off). In response to this, a predetermined signal is output (external signal output). Therefore, according to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to notify the gaming hall manager through an external device when the setting is changed, so that the gaming hall manager can set the gaming machine 10 at an unintended timing. You can quickly notice the changes.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, external signal output means (game control device 100
) Starts output of a predetermined signal (external signal output) in response to the shift to the setting variable state (setting change mode) by the setting shift means (setting key switch 93, setting key), and the setting shift means The output of the predetermined signal (external signal output) is ended in response to the second mode (OFF). According to such a gaming machine 10, the output of a predetermined signal (external signal output) is maintained in the ON state while in the setting variable state, and it is possible to continue to inform the game hall manager through the external device. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the gaming machine 10 is shifting to the setting variable state at an unintended timing. In addition, when the game hall manager intentionally changes the settings, an external device can record a history (log) of how long the work time related to the setting change is, thus improving the efficiency of the work time. It can be used as statistical information for planning.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, external signal output means (game control device 100)
Is a predetermined pulse width (external signal output) after the output of a predetermined signal (external signal output) is completed in response to the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) being set to the second mode (OFF). For example, a signal of 256 msec) is output. According to such a gaming machine 10, the external signal output is output with a predetermined pulse width not only while in the setting variable state, but also when the setting transition means is set to the second mode and the setting is confirmed. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the setting is confirmed after the gaming machine 10 shifts to the setting variable state at an unintended timing.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the first mode (on) is set under the condition (for example, after power-on) different from the condition for shifting to the setting variable state (setting change mode) Is provided with setting confirmation means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). The external signal output means (game control device 100) outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output) while the setting confirmation means shifts to the setting confirmation state. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, it is possible to notify the game hall manager through the external device not only when changing to the setting change state but also when changing to the setting confirmation state. It is possible to quickly notice that Yuki 10 has transitioned to the setting confirmation state at an unintended timing. Although the setting key switch 93 (setting key) functions as the setting confirming means together with the setting shifting means, the setting key switch 9 as the setting shifting means is used.
A switch different from the switch 3 may be provided as the setting confirmation means.

[Tenth Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to ninth embodiments. Tenth
The embodiment relates to a display mode of the probability setting value.

[Display of batch display device]
FIG. 101 is a stop pattern number (A4004, A4013, A4016, A7510) and a lighting pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display portion 51 of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number, and a lighting pattern of probability setting values. It is a figure which illustrates. The lighting pattern corresponds to the stop symbol pattern (A4006, A4014, A4017).

First, FIG. 101(a) shows a stop symbol number and a first special symbol variation display portion 51 (7 segment type (or 8 segment) for the special symbol 1 variable display game of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of (type) LED lamp D1 (FIG. 34A etc.).

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game), the game control device 100
After the identification information (special symbol, special symbol) is variably displayed on the special diagram 1 display portion 51, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. As the predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed, for example, the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number (0 to 50) of the predetermined result mode is selected from the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 101(a).

Next, FIG. 101B is a diagram illustrating a lighting pattern of the probability setting value.

In response to the setting key switch 93 (setting key) being turned on and the setting value being changeable (setting change mode, setting variable mode), the identification information in FIG. 101(a) is variably displayed. The subsequent lighting pattern showing a predetermined result mode is switched to the lighting pattern of the probability setting value in FIG. 101(b).

The display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the change of the probability setting according to the present embodiment (during the variable setting state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-
Regarding the light emitting mode (lighting/lighting off mode) of D18), the first mode described in FIG. 34A or FIG.
It can be performed in the same manner as the aspect according to the embodiment. Specifically, the first special figure variation display unit 51 is based on the probability set value display data (A2409) corresponding to the work probability set value and the probability set value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability set value. , The work probability setting value and the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value are lit or blinked (A1603 to A1608 of output processing).
..

As described above, while the probability setting is being changed, the game machine 10 cannot perform a game (for example, a variable display game) by displaying a different display (a display different from the normal display) from the time when the fluctuation is stopped on the first special map variation display section 51. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting values are not used in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101A) when the first special figure fluctuation display portion 51 stops changing. As a result, the display mode of the probability setting value,
It is possible to easily distinguish from the display mode relating to the game such as the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Subsequently, FIG. 101C is a diagram illustrating another lighting pattern of the probability setting value. First
On the special figure variation display section 51, as shown in FIG. 101(c), the decimal points (dot display section Dp) are lit to display the working probability set values and the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability set values. It may be displayed in a blinking manner. In this way, when the working probability setting value and the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value are displayed in a lighted or blinking manner, the decimal point (Dp) is turned on, so that the gaming machine 10 sets the probability. It can be suggested on the front of the game machine 10 that the change is in progress.

It should be noted that the stop symbol number shown in FIG. 101(a) is displayed on the second special figure variable display section 52 (7 segment type (or 8 segment type) LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50. And the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number may be displayed as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variably displaying game. Further, the probability setting values shown in FIGS. 101(b) and 101(c) may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variation display portion 52. Here, even in the stop display (lighting pattern in FIG. 101A) when the fluctuation of the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 is stopped, as in the case of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51, the numbers 1 to 1 indicating the probability setting values are displayed. 6 shall not be used.

Further, every time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed to change the probability set value, the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display of the collective display device 50 are displayed. The probability setting value may be alternately switched and displayed in the section 52. In this way, the probability setting value is changed by pressing the setting value change switch 102 by alternately switching and displaying the probability setting values on the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52. It can be made easier to recognize what has been done.

Further, the lighting pattern of the probability setting value is different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number illustrated in FIG. 101(a), but the stop of the symbol which is out of the exemplified stop symbol number is displayed. What is different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the symbol number may be displayed. That is, the lighting pattern of the probability setting value may overlap with the lighting pattern of the jackpot pattern, but the lighting pattern of the jackpot pattern is less likely to be displayed, and is rarely displayed. In addition, when the player wins the jackpot, it is considered that the player will continue to play the game until the special gaming state ends, so that the probability that the lighting pattern of the jackpot symbol is displayed when the setting is changed is extremely small. Therefore, even if the lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number of the deviation symbol is displayed as the probability setting value, the fact that the gaming machine 10 is changing the probability setting is displayed on the front of the gaming machine 10. Can be suggested.

In addition, while the probability setting is being changed, while the probability setting value is being displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52 of the collective display device 50, the first special figure variation display section 51 is displayed. Alternatively, all the light emitting units (LED lamps D3 to D18) of the collective display device 50 other than the second special figure variable display unit 52 may be displayed in a blinking manner. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can also be displayed by blinking all the light emitting units of the collective display device 50 other than the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52 in a manner different from the normal one. It can be indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the probability setting is being changed.

[Display of status display device]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing details of the state display device 152 that displays information regarding the payout rate. The status display device 152 is formed by horizontally arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) displays 900, and shows digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, digit 3 from the right. It is a 4-digit 7-segment display. The state display device 152 corresponds to the overall ball output rate (eg, “bL.35” shown in FIG. 102) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, and the latest predetermined number (eg, 60,000 shots) of discharged balls. It is possible to switch and display the ball-out rate (for example, "b6.36"). The state display device 152 may display the base value and the accessory ratio as well as the ball exit rate. In the present embodiment, the state display device 152 is the probability setting value display device 1
It is also used as 43, and the probability setting value can be displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating details of the state display device 152 that displays a number indicating the probability setting value.

FIG. 103A is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed on the leftmost digit 3. The digit 3 is a digit in which a character (for example, “b”) other than a number is displayed in the ball output rate display shown in FIG. Therefore, by displaying the probability setting value in the digit 3, the display other than the probability setting value, that is, the numeral portion and the probability setting value in the display relating to the game (for example, the display of the winning rate) are not covered. Also, unlike the display of the rate of exit shown in FIG. 102, the digits other than the digit 3 for displaying the probability setting value are turned off. As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish the display mode of the probability setting value from other display modes such as the display of the ball exit rate.

FIG. 103(b) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a digit (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed in the digit 2. Similar to FIG. 103(a), the digits other than the digit 2 for displaying the probability setting value are turned off. Therefore, according to such a display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the probability setting value is displayed.

FIG. 103C shows a state display device 1 in which a digit (for example, 3) indicating a probability setting value is displayed in the digit 1.
FIG. 103( d) is an example of the state display device 152 in which the numeral indicating the probability setting value is displayed at the digit 0. The digits other than the digit 1 or the digit 0 displaying the probability setting value are turned off.
Therefore, according to these display modes, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the example of FIG. 103(b) in which the digits other than the digit 2 are turned off, and it is easy to recognize that the probability setting value is displayed. it can.

FIG. 103(e) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a digit (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed in all digits 0 to 3. In this way, by arranging the same numbers indicating the probability setting values in all the digits of the state display device 152, the display mode is different from the display relating to other games. Therefore, the display mode of the probability setting values and the exit rate. It is possible to easily distinguish the display mode related to another game such as display.

The probability setting value displayed on the status display device 152 is changing the probability setting (setting change mode).
In the case of the work probability setting value in (1), it is preferable that the display is blinking, and when it is the probability setting value in which the confirmed setting is displayed, it is preferable to display the light.

When displaying the work probability set value (probability set value) in the setting change mode, each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed and the probability set value is changed, The digits of the probability setting value displayed on the state display device 152 may be shifted one by one. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed as 3 in the digit 3, the setting value changing switch 102 is pressed to display the probability setting value as 4 in the digit 2, and the setting value changing switch 102 By pressing the button again, the probability setting value can be displayed as 5 in digit 1. Further, when the setting value change switch 102 is pressed at the digit 0, the probability setting value can be displayed at the digit 3. The mode of shifting the digits of the probability setting value displayed on the state display device 152 one by one is not limited to the mode of shifting from the left to the right, but may be the mode of shifting from the right to the left.

[Modification of Tenth Embodiment]
Further, in the tenth embodiment, the display device (collective display device 50 or status display device 152) also functions as the probability set value display device 143, and displays related to the game (for example, as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed). It was possible to display a predetermined result mode, a ball-out rate, a base value, an accessory ratio) and a set value (probability set value) related to the game condition. However, the display device (the collective display device 50 or the status display device 152) is not limited to the mode in which the probability set value display device 143 is also used as described above, and the display device (the collective display device 50 or the status is similar to the first embodiment. The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided on the gaming machine 10 as a second display device independent of the display device 152 (first display device). Further, while displaying on one display device, the display on the other display device may be turned off. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed on the second display device (probability setting value display device 143), the first display device (collective display device 50).
, The display of the game on the status display device 152) can be hidden.

[Operation/Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C) is variably displayed is a special result ( It is provided with control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when a big hit result mode, a big hit stop pattern, or a special result mode). The gaming machine 10 is a display device (collective display device 50, state) capable of displaying a display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, a pitch rate, a base, and an accessory ratio). The display device 152) and a setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. The control means displays the set value on the display device in a mode different from the display relating to the game in response to the setting value being changed by the setting change means (setting change mode, setting variable state). ..

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the probability setting value is different from a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the variable display game, and a mode different from the display related to the game such as the rate of hitting the ball, the base, and the character ratio. Will be displayed on the display device (collective display device 50, status display device 152). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish the display mode of the probability setting value from the display related to the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) has a variable display game (as a predetermined result mode after variably displaying the identification information) related to the game.
The display result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the display device (collective display device 50), and the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed by the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) (setting change mode, setting) In response to the change to the variable state), the display on the display device is switched from the display related to the game to the set value. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, when the setting value is switched to the changeable state, the setting value is displayed on the display device in a mode different from the display regarding the game. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be performed.

The display mode of the display device (the collective display device 50 or the state display device 152) is not limited to the probability setting change, but also during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state). The display mode can be different from the display related to.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment, a display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, a ball-out rate, a base value, and a character ratio) is displayed. Possible first display devices (collective display device 50, state display device 152), setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing setting values (probability setting values) relating to game conditions, and setting values can be displayed. A second display device (probability set value display device 143). The control means (game control device 100) responds to the setting changeable state (setting change mode, setting changeable state) by the setting change means in a manner different from the display related to the game. Is displayed on the second display device. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the display regarding the game and the display regarding the game condition are displayed on different display devices, respectively, so that the display regarding the game and the display regarding the game condition can be easily distinguished. ..

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100
) Is a display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, a ball-out rate, a base value, and a character ratio) on the first display device (collective display device 50, status display). The first display in response to the fact that the setting value (probability setting value) is displayed in the device 152) and the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed by the setting changing means (setting changing device 42). The display related to the game of the device is hidden, and the set value is displayed on the second display device (probability set value display device 143). According to such a gaming machine 10, the display related to the game on the first display device is hidden while the setting value is displayed on the second display device, so that the gaming machine 10 plays the game (for example, the variable display game). You can easily tell that you are unable to

[Eleventh Embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to tenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The eleventh embodiment relates to a small hit or the like.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
104A and 104B show that the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as the result of the big hit judgment process (FIG. 22) and the small hit judgment process (FIG. 23) are set (each set value). It is a table illustrated as an example.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (small in the special figure 1 variable display game. The hit probability is 0 for each setting). In the first embodiment, the small hit occurs only as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (the small hit probability is 0 in each setting in the special figure 2 variable display game.
Is).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 104C and 104D, the control contents of the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process are interchanged from those of the first embodiment. That is, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 104C) of the present embodiment is the jackpot flag 2 setting process (FIG. 2) of the first embodiment.
1) to "big hit flag 2" and "special figure 2" are replaced with "big hit flag 1" and "special figure 1", respectively. Steps A17001-A17006 in FIG. Corresponding to. In addition, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (
FIG. 104D) corresponds to the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment in which “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” are replaced with “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 2”, respectively. Then, steps A18001 to A18010 in FIG. 104D are steps A3601 to A36 in FIG.
Corresponds to 10.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit, is
The order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 increases. Similarly, the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, also increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit state (first special game state) and the small hit state (second special game state) are likely to occur, and the special variation winning device 39 The number of balls obtained by winning the (big winning opening) increases, which is advantageous to the player.

In the setting 1 of pattern I, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0 (0%), and the small hit does not occur. However, with setting 6, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is about 1
It is close to (100%). Therefore, in the setting 6 of the pattern I, a small hit occurs almost every time the special figure 2 variable display game is performed in the normal electric power support state (time saving state, probability variation state) in which the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game increases. Such a state is called "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). In setting 6, the total of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the time of high probability is 100%. Therefore, either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game at the time of the high probability (disappearance). Not).

In the normal electric power support state, the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game is increased by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state of the normal variable winning device 37 or increasing the time of occurrence of the easy prize winning state. .. In addition, since the universal figure starting gate 34 is located on the right side of the game area 32, in the normal electric power support state, it is more advantageous to hit the ball to the right, and the player should hit the ball to the right.

In Pattern I settings 4 and 5, the small hit probability is ¼ and ½, respectively, and “1/4 small hit RUSH” and “1/2” in the normal electric power support state (time saving state, probability changing state). It will be in a state called "small hit RUSH". "1/4 small hit RUSH" and "1/2 small hit RUSH"
In ", the number of balls acquired is about 1/4 and 1/2 of that of "small hit RUSH".

In the setting 2 of the pattern I, the small hit probability is about the same as the hit probability of a general universal figure variation display game, and there is almost no number of balls acquired by the small hit. In the setting 3 of pattern I, the small hit probability is about the same as the large hit probability at the time of high probability, and the number of balls acquired by the small hit exists to the extent that the player can be aware.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ratio of the big hit probability at the time of high probability to the big hit probability at the time of low probability is a constant value (10 times here), and the probability control becomes easy. There is.

In the table of the pattern II of FIG. 104A, contrary to the pattern I, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6<setting 5<setting 4<setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. The jackpot probability of pattern II increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 as in pattern I. That is, in the pattern II, as the set value increases, the big hit probability increases but the small hit probability decreases, and the difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting decreases from the pattern I, and the balance becomes better.

In the table of the pattern III in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 4<setting 5<setting 6
<Setting 1 <Setting 2 <Setting 3 increases in this order. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern III increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. In Pattern III as well, the difference in the number of balls acquired due to the setting (setting difference) is smaller than in Pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern IV in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 3<setting 2<setting 1<
It is increased in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern IV increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. In pattern IV as well, the difference in the number of balls acquired due to the setting (setting difference) is smaller than in pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of the pattern V of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6<setting 5<setting 4<setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. The jackpot probability of pattern V is the same in setting 1 and setting 4, is the same in setting 2 and setting 5, and is the same in setting 3 and setting 6. In pattern V, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting (setting value) from the jackpot probability. Therefore, the player is
Attempting to estimate the set value from the occurrence of a small hit pays attention to the occurrence of a small hit.

In the table of the pattern VI of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is 0% at the settings 1, 2, 4, and 5.
And is close to 100% with settings 3 and 6. In settings 3 and 6, since the total of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the time of high probability is 100%, either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game at the time of the high probability. (There is no loss). The jackpot probability of pattern VI is the same in setting 1 and setting 4, is the same in setting 2 and setting 5, and is the same in setting 3 and setting 6.
In pattern VI, it becomes easy to estimate a specific setting (setting 3 and setting 6) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability.

As another pattern, the jackpot probability at the low probability of the settings 1 to 3 is set to the probability of the normal specification (for example, a predetermined range around the probability 1/200), and the jackpot probability at the low probability of the settings 4 to 6 is so-called. A pattern having a probability in the vicinity of the sweet digital spec (for example, a predetermined range around the probability 1/99) is also considered. In such a pattern, apparently two types of models can be provided by changing the setting (setting value).

As described above, it can be said that the gaming machine 10 has different game characteristics (game characteristics) and specifications (specifications) for each setting, and it is not necessary to develop a gaming machine having a plurality of specifications, which reduces development costs. Lead to That is, it is possible to substantially provide the game machine with a plurality of specifications to the player only by changing the setting value by the setting changing device 42 (the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102). For example, if the small hit probability is 0% and the small hit probability is about 10
With a setting close to 0%, there is a big difference in playability regarding whether or not a small hit occurs, and it can be said to be a completely different spec. Further, since the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting (set value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved. ..

[Small hit opening mode]
FIG. 105 shows an example of the opening mode (small hit opening mode, small hit opening pattern) of the special variation winning device 39 in the small hit state (second special game state). In the example of FIG. 105, the special variation winning device 39 (that is, the special winning opening) is opened four times and the opening time of one time is 20.
The waiting time is 0 ms and the waiting time is 1500 ms. In addition, the special variation winning device 39 (that is, a special winning opening)
It is also possible to have a small hit opening mode in which is opened only once.

The game control device 100 sets the small hit opening mode to be the same regardless of the setting (setting value). Therefore, the control of the small hit state becomes simple. However, it is set from the small hit opening mode itself (set value)
Becomes difficult to estimate, and the player will estimate the setting from the small hit probability.

[Probability per ordinary figure]
106, in the eleventh embodiment, the hit probability (low probability time and high probability time) of the universal figure fluctuation display game determined as a result of the ordinary figure normal process (FIG. 32) is set to each setting (each set value). It is a table illustrated as an example.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 106, the probability of hitting a universal figure, which is the probability of occurrence of a universal figure, is set 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5< in both low probability and high probability. Increase in order of setting 6. That is, as the set value becomes larger, the probability of hitting a universal figure increases, and the probability of hitting a universal figure is more likely to occur, and the number of balls acquired by winning the ordinary variable prize device 37 and the frequency of execution of the special figure 2 variable display game increase. , Is advantageous to the player. In this case, as in the pattern I of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability of the small hit that occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game is set 1<setting 2<
Increasing in the order of setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 will synergistically be advantageous to the player.
Further, since the probability of hitting the universal figure changes according to the setting (setting value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (setting value) from the probability of hitting the universal figure, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the table of pattern II in FIG. 106, the probability of hitting a universal figure, which is the probability of hitting a universal figure, is set 1<setting 2< in only one of low probability and high probability (here, only low probability). It is increased in the order of setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. That is, in either the low probability or the high probability case, the probability of hitting the universal figure increases as the set value increases, and the probability of hitting the universal figure is more likely to occur. The execution frequency of the 2-variable display game increases, which is advantageous to the player.

[Display screen waiting for customers]
107(A) and 107(B) are diagrams exemplifying the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 in the customer waiting state (customer waiting state). The effect control device 300 displays an image according to the setting (setting value) on the display device 41 while waiting for a customer who is not displaying the effect related to the variable display game.

To do so, the performance control device 300, for example, the customer waiting demo setting process (B130.
In 8), an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the video of the customer waiting demonstration starts. When the moving image of the customer waiting demo is repeatedly displayed, an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the moving image of the customer waiting demo ends and the next time.

For example, in the pattern I table of FIG. 104A, setting 1 does not cause a small hit,
In the normal electric power support state at the time of right hitting, it is better to win the game ball aiming at the normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize hole) rather than the special variable prize device 39 (large prize hole). Therefore, in the setting 1, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the first character image 501 indicating the playability (how to play) is displayed on the display screen waiting for the customer (when the player is right-handed, "Aim for normal power"!). ) Is displayed. The first character image 501 explicitly shows a winning opening to be won when hitting to the right.

And, in the table of pattern I of FIG. 104A, since the small hit RUSH can occur in the setting 6, in the normal electric power support state at the time of right hitting, the special variable winning device 37 (the second starting winning port) is the special variable winning device. It is better to win the game ball aiming at the device 39 (large prize hole). Therefore, in the setting 6, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the second screen showing the game play is displayed on the display screen while waiting for the customer.
Character image 502 ("small hit RUSH!!" when right-handed) is displayed. The second character image 502 implicitly shows a winning opening to be won when hitting to the right. In addition, setting of pattern I 4
In No. 5, a character image was displayed on the display screen while waiting for customers ("1/4 small hit RUSH!!"
And "1/2 small hit RUSH!!") may be displayed.

In FIGS. 107(A) and (B), an image 503 indicating right-handing in the universal communication support state is displayed simultaneously with the first character image 501 or the second character image 502 on the display screen (customer waiting screen).
Is displayed in.

As in the case of pattern I, patterns II, III, IV, and V of FIGS. 104A and 104B are used.
, VI table, setting 6, setting 4, setting 3, setting 6, setting 1-2 and 4 respectively.
At -5, no small hit occurs, and the first character image 501 ("Aim for normal power!!" when right-handed) is displayed as shown in FIG. 107(A). In addition, patterns II, III, and I of FIGS.
In the V, V, and VI tables, setting 1, setting 3, setting 4, setting 1, setting 3, and 6 are performed, respectively.
Therefore, since the small hit RUSH can be generated, the second character image 50 as shown in FIG.
2 (“Small hits RUSH!!” when right-handed) is displayed.

As described above, in the waiting state for customers (waiting state for customers), an image corresponding to the setting (setting value) can be displayed on the display device 41 to show the player the playability in the setting. The playability shown by the image serves as a guide for the player to select a gaming machine.

In addition, in the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 during the customer waiting, the setting (setting value)
In accordance with the above, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an image of the effect introduction and an image of the game flow are displayed on the display device 41.

[Display according to the setting of the display]
FIG. 108A shows a light emission mode of the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 (light emitting section) used for executing the special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50.
An example of changing according to the setting (setting value) will be shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A(I), the game control device 100 displays the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure during the non-execution (here, waiting for a customer) of the special figure variation display game. The display mode (light emission mode) of the outlying symbols displayed on the figure variation display section 52 may be different between the setting 1 and the setting 6.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A(II), the game control device 100 may display the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure during the non-execution (here, waiting for a customer) of the special figure variation display game. The variable display unit 52 may be displayed in a blinking manner, the blinking cycle may be different between the setting 1 and the setting 6, and the light emission mode may be changed according to the setting. The blinking cycle is, for example, 256 ms for setting 1 and 12 for setting 6.
8 ms. In addition, the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 are blinked as the variation display of the special figure variation display game, but the blinking cycle may be changed according to the setting. ..

In addition, during the non-execution of the special figure variation display game (waiting for customers), the first special figure variation display section 51
And/or not only the second special figure variation display section 52 but also other display sections 53 to 6 of the collective display device 50.
A configuration in which the light emission mode of 0 is changed according to the setting (setting value) is also possible.

FIG. 108B is a diagram showing an external device connected to the external information terminal 71. As external devices, an external display device 864 (display device) and a game hall internal management device 866 (hall computer) are provided. The game control device 100 may change the display mode of the external display device 864 provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the set value.

The game control device 100 outputs a control command according to the set value to the external display device 864 via the external information terminal 71 at a predetermined timing, and controls the display mode of the external display device 864 according to the set value.

For example, the external display device 864 (display device) is a patrol lamp 864a capable of emitting light and an information display device 864d capable of displaying a moving image or a still image. The patrol lamp 864a emits light (rotational light emission) when receiving a control command. When the information display device 864d receives a control command, the information display device 864d executes data display such as game number display (rotation speed display), and can display a moving image or a still image corresponding to the control command on the display unit 868.

When the control command includes the set value information of the gaming machine 10, the patrol lamp 864a can emit light in a light emitting mode (emission color or the like) corresponding to the set value, and the information display 864d corresponds to the set value. A moving image or a still image can be displayed on the display portion 868.

As described above, the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 (light emitting section)
The player can estimate the setting (setting value) on the basis of the light emitting mode of (1) and the display mode of the external display device 864 (display) provided outside.

[Operation/Effect of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition.
When the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous for the player is generated. In the special game state, the variable winning device (special variable winning device 39) can convert from a closed state where the game ball cannot win to an open state where the game ball can win. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) can change the set value relating to the game condition (condition for the player to play the game). When the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, the game control means generates the first special game state (big hit state), and when the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result, A second less valuable game value that the player can obtain than the first special game state
A special game state (small hit state) is generated. The game control means sets the probability that the stop result of the variable display game will be the second special result (small hit) according to the set value, and the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the second special game state. , Set the same regardless of the set value.

Therefore, the probability that the stop result of the variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) can be set according to the set value, so that the playability of the gaming machine 10 can be changed according to the set value. Furthermore, the second
Since the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the special gaming state can be set to be the same regardless of the set value, the control of the variable winning device in the second special gaming state becomes simple.

According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying effects related to the variable display game on the display device. The effect control means displays an image corresponding to the set value on the display device in the customer waiting state in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed. Therefore, by showing the player the playability at the current set value in the customer waiting state, it becomes easier for the player to select the gaming machine in the gaming hall (gaming store).

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, game control means (game control device 100).
Depending on the set value, the light emission mode of the light emitting section (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52) used for executing the variable display game during execution or non-execution of the variable display game. Can be changed. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (set value) based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52) used to execute the variable display game.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the game control means can set the display mode of the display device (patrol lamp 864a, information display device 864d) provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the set value. .. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the display mode of the display provided outside.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 118. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

In the twelfth embodiment, the part identification information of the removable part (part, member) 510 (first part
When the identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 do not match, the mismatch is notified as an error.

[Amusement machine parts]
FIG. 109 shows a state in which the removable parts 510 are attached to the gaming machine 10.
The parts 510 are assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example,
The part 510 may be a plate-shaped member on which model information (model logo, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or a movable accessory constituting the frame rendering device or the panel rendering device 44, or frame decoration. It may be a decorative member having an LED of the device 18 or the board decoration device 46. The parts 510 can be attached to the game machine 10 in the game hall due to reasons such as being an obstacle when carrying them into the game hall (game shop), and may be attached to the wrong model by unfamiliar personnel.

As shown in FIG. 109A, for example, when the parts 510A for the model A are attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, no problem occurs. However, for example, as shown in FIG.
Since a problem occurs when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 notifies the error via the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device 41.

FIG. 110 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the game machine 10 to the effect control device 300 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (A1035, A1045). The production control device 300 receives the model designation command (B) received from the reference table (FIG. 118 described later).
The model identification information corresponding to 1301) is selected and set. In addition, the production control device 300,
The part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 notifies as an error that they do not match.

The part 510 has an identification board 513 that holds the part identification information. Identification board 513
In the part identification information, one or more wirings 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied
Set by. In FIG. 109, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but the pull-up resistor may not be provided. The power supply (voltage) to the parts 510 is, for example, the effect control device 300 when the parts 510 are attached.
Alternatively, it is supplied from the power supply device 400.

In FIG. 110, the plurality of wirings 519 (a plurality of electric wires) are connected to predetermined terminals of the plurality (eight) of terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516, respectively. In this way, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is set as a bit having a value “1”, and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (the wiring 519 is not connected) is set as a bit having a value “0”, for example, “
Part identification information such as "01111100" can be transmitted via the parallel-serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned part identification information as parallel data by the plurality of wirings 519. Then, the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control device 300 by serial communication (here, I ² C).

FIG. 111 shows another example of the identification board 513. In FIG. 111, the part identification information is set by the DIP switch 521. Each of the plurality of wirings 519 is connected to the DIP switch 5
The voltage becomes a predetermined voltage or a ground voltage by 21, and the information of each bit (“1” or “0”) of the part identification information is input to a plurality (8) of terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. .. In the example of FIG. 111, the wiring 5 in which the dip switch 521 is turned on
The terminal connected to 19 becomes the ground voltage (bit of value "0"), and the DIP switch 52
The terminal connected to the wiring 519 in which 1 is turned off has a predetermined voltage (bit of value “1”).
Becomes

[Parallel-to-serial converter]
FIG. 112 shows the configuration of the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel/serial conversion IC.

The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 includes a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF).
It has the configuration of a normal parallel-serial conversion IC including the. Parallel-to-serial converter 51
Reference numeral 6 converts parallel data (for example, “01111100”) as the part identification information input from the terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data and connects by serial communication (here, I ² C communication). It transmits to production control device 300 via line SDA (data line). The production control device 300 has a master IC 300a for I ² C communication, and inputs the clock signals for the plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 via the connection line SCL (timing signal line).

The plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) form a shift register in which each bit data of the parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with the clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and sequentially output as serial data from the D-type flip-flop 516a at the left end. That is, the output of the serial data is completed 8 clocks after the parallel data is fetched.

[First Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 113 shows a first modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the first modification, the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 is not the normal parallel/serial conversion IC but the input I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC). I ² for input
The CI/O expander 815 connects the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 with ports 0 to 0.
The part identification information input from 7 is input as data.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL. Filter 833, bus controller 834,
And a reset signal generation circuit 839. In addition, another I ² CI/O expander 81
5, a bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether or not the connecting line SDA is occupied, and whether or not the I ² CI/O expander 815 itself occupies the connecting line SDA. It is equipped with a self-occupying WDT 841.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging a data signal between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication on the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise of data (here, response signal, address data, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-free data to the bus controller 834.

When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information or the like here) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the driver 832 outputs a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate, to the transistor 83.
Apply 0.

A field effect transistor (FET) is used for the transistor 830 in order to suppress power consumption, a gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and a drain of the connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by a pull-up resistor R. Connected to and the source is grounded.

The driver 832 connects the data (parts identification information, etc.) to the master IC 300a via the connecting line SDA.
In the case of outputting from, the voltage of a value at which the transistor 830 can operate is applied to the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise of the data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the noise-free data to the bus controller 834.

In ^addition, the I 2 CI / O expander 815, it is set a unique address by the address setting terminals A0~A3 provided in the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 is input to the bus controller 834. Further, an address for resetting the I ² CI/O expander 815 is also set in advance.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address part composed of upper 3 bits and a variable address part composed of lower 5 bits. The fixed address part is preset with a predetermined value (for example, “110”) and cannot be changed by the I ² CI/O expander 815.

The variable address portion is a 4-bit I ² CI/O expander address corresponding to the pattern set in the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI/O expander 815, and whether the data is a read request or a write request. And 1-bit R/W identification data indicating whether or not In the input I ² CI/O expander 815, “1” is normally registered in the R/W identification data in response to the read request.

The bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not it matches the unique address set in the /O expander 815, and if it matches, the data (part identification information) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage (here, five) of the eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 is connected to a predetermined voltage by connecting a plurality of wirings 519. Is applied. Therefore, 8-bit parts identification information (for example, “01111100”) is input to the bus controller 834 as parallel data via the eight ports 0 to 7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and the other terminals (not connected to the wiring 519) correspond to a bit having a value of "0".

The bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I
^{2 It} is determined whether or not it matches the reset address set in the CI/O expander 815, and if it matches, the data is fetched as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² Initialize the CI/O expander 815.

In addition, the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH reaches 8 times,
After the bus controller 834 outputs the bit data (part identification information), the connection line S
When the signal level of CL changes from HIGH to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a reply signal from the connection line SDA to the bus controller 834. Further, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the master IC 30
0a outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH becomes 9.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 has a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI/O expander 815, and a RES that receives a reset signal from the outside.
The ET terminal is connected.

In the reset signal generating circuit 839, the I ² CI/O expander 815 is powered on,
When the voltage rises to a predetermined value, a reset signal is generated, and the generated reset signal is input to the bus controller 834 for initialization.

Therefore, when the harness is pulled out, the connection line Vcc for supplying the logic power is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored and the reset signal generation circuit 83
9 will output a reset signal. A harness is a bundle of the connection line Vcc, the connection line SDA, the connection line SCL, and the ground line GND for supplying logic power.

The bus monitor WDT 840 is used to detect that another I ² CI/O expander 815 occupies the connection line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generating circuit 839, and when a predetermined time elapses after the connection line SDA is occupied,
The reset signal generating circuit 839 of its own is operated to operate the I ² CI/O expander 815.
To initialize.

The self-occupied WDT 841 is connected to the connection line SD by itself (I ² CI/O expander 815).
Used to detect A occupancy. When the self-occupying WDT 841 continuously operates for a certain period of time, the self-occupying WDT 841 causes the reset signal generation circuit 839 to generate a reset signal to initialize the I ² CI/O expander 815.

[Second Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 114 shows a second modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the second modification, the parallel/serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 is not the normal parallel/serial conversion IC, but the output I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC). In addition, in the second modification, the part 510 includes a rendering device and can perform rendering. The rendering device is, for example, an LED
Although it is a decoration device such as a (light emitting part), it may be a movable accessory.

The output I ² CI/O expander 815 is the master IC 300 of the effect control device 300.
Based on the effect control data received from a, the output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device (here, the LED, the light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 is controlled via the ports 0 to 15 on the output side. The I ² CI/O expander 815 is the I ² CI/O expander 815.
The unique address (8 bits) is used as the part identification information and is input to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 for output is the I ² CI/O expander 81 for input.
5 (FIG. 113), the output setting register 835, the output controller 836, the driver 8 connected to the output side ports 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) of the I ² CI/O expander 815.
37, and transistors 838A to 838P connected to the respective ports 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, description of the same configuration as the input I ² CI/O expander 815 (FIG. 113) will be appropriately omitted.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise of data (here, effect control data, response signal, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830 when outputting data (here, part identification information, a response signal, or the like) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

The driver 832 can operate the transistor 830 at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830 when outputting data (part identification information, reply signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA. Apply voltage of value. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not it matches the unique address set in the /O expander 815, and if they match, data (part identification information, reply signal, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to the master IC 300a is I ² as described above.
This is a unique address (8 bits) of the CI/O expander 815. In addition, it is not always necessary to output the part identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a. When the production control device 300 receives the reply signal from the bus controller 834, the effect control device 300 recognizes the address of the transmitted data as the part identification information. It may be configured to do so.

Further, the bus controller 834 has changed the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH eight times, and after taking in the 8-bit effect control data from the connection line SDA, the signal level of the connection line SCL is changed. When the signal changes from HIGH to LOW, a response signal is output
Output from A to master IC 300a. Furthermore, it was confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changed from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL was changed from HIGH to LO again.
When it changes to W, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs the response signal at the timing when the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH becomes 9.

The operation mode of the I ² CI/O expander 815 and the output states of the ports 0 to 15 are set in the output setting register 835. When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI/O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 causes the current to flow to all the ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so that it does not exist.

The output controller 836, based on the data set in the output setting register 835,
A rendering device (in this case, LE) connected to each of the ports 0 to 15 through the port driver 837.
The output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device is actually controlled by applying a current (outputting the lighting data) to the light emitting unit D. When the bus controller 834 takes in the effect control data from the connection line SDA, this output state is updated to the content specified in the effect control data.

That is, based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, the output setting register 835 is set, and when the stop condition is received, the output states of the ports 0 to 15 are updated and reflected in the effect device.

When a current is passed through the port, the driver 837 applies to the transistor a voltage at which the transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current is passed can operate.

The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drains are connected to the port terminals connected to the connection lines to which the voltage for operating the rendering device is applied, and the sources are grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than a predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the driving power supply is grounded via the drain of the transistor 838. By the current flowing to
It is possible to control the output state of the rendering device (here, LED) connected to the port terminal.

[Third Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 115 shows a third modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the third modified example, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification substrate 513 does not exist, and the production control device 300 has an input provided as a part identification information (for example, “01111100”) having a predetermined voltage of 8 bits from a plurality of wirings 519. It is directly input to the port 300b (ports 0 to 7). Input port 30
0b, the part identification information is input to the main control microcomputer (CP) via the data bus 340.
U) 311 is taken in. Note that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value of "0".

Then, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 reports that they do not match as an error. Execute the process.

[Main processing (production control device)]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) according to the twelfth embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (restored).

The main processing of the twelfth embodiment is different from the main processing of FIG.
000) is added, and the other processes are the same as those in FIG.

In the parts matching process, the parts identification information read from the parts 510 and the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301) are compared to determine the parts identification information (first identification information).
And the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, a warning is issued by an error notification.
In the present embodiment, the part verification process (B5000) is the received command check process (B00).
It is executed after 14).

The parts matching process (B5000) is first executed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and then repeatedly executed by the loop process from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Parts collation processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 117, the parts matching process (B50) in the main process (FIG. 116).
00) will be described in detail. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the parts matching process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first updates -1 if the matching time timer (clocking means) is not 0 (B5001). The matching time timer reads the part identification information and matches it with the model identification information (
The comparison timing or comparison time interval for comparison) is determined. Then, it is determined whether the matching time timer is 0 (B5002). If the matching time timer is not 0 (B5
Since the result of 002 is “N”) and it is not the matching timing, the parts matching process is ended.

On the other hand, when the matching time timer is 0 (the result of B5002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 reads the part identification information from the part 510 because it is the matching timing (B5).
003). Then, the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (verified) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

The effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 118 in the memory (for example, the program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 118, the model designation command and the model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the production control device 300 holds the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). When the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is “N”), the error notification notifies that the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, the fact that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not fit (correspond) to the part 510 is notified. The effect control device 300 may execute the error notification (warning) by generating sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b or by displaying characters on the display device 41. Further, here, the effect control device 300 may refer to the reference table of FIG. 118 and notify the error type and the correct model that is compatible with (corresponds to) the part 510. The correct model is a model having the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

Then, effect control device 300 sets the initial value of the matching time timer (B5007), and ends the parts matching process. Therefore, when the power is turned on for the first time, the parts identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (verified) every time the time corresponding to the initial value of the verification time timer elapses. The initial value of the matching time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited to this.

On the other hand, when the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5
The result of 005 is “Y”), and since the part 510 is attached to the correct model compatible with (corresponding to) the part 510, the initial value of the matching time timer is set (B50) without notifying an error.
07), and ends the part matching process.

By the above part matching process, for example, when the part 510B for model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 109(B)), model identification information (for example, “0111”).
1100") and the part identification information (for example, "01111101") do not match, and error notification is executed. Correct model compatible with parts 510B (model B) along with error notification
May be notified. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 109(A)), model identification information (for example, "01111100"
") and the part identification information (for example, "01111100") match, and error notification is not executed.

In addition, as a modified example, the effect control device 300 has a memory (for example, the program ROM 321).
118, the reference table of FIG. 118 may not be stored and only the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model may be held. In this case as well, the effect control device 300 uses the parts 510.
The part identification information (from the
When the first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the mismatch is notified as an error.

[Operation and effect of twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition) and a game-related device. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect
Equipped with. The gaming machine 10 includes detachable parts (parts 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (parts identification information) is assigned. The production control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the component and compares it with the second identification information, and the first identification information (part identification Information) and second identification information (model identification information)
If the two do not match, it is notified that they do not match.

Therefore, even if the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it is possible to appropriately notify.
For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from being operated due to an installation error of the component (part 510) in the game arcade (gaming store).

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means is at least the gaming machine 1.
When the power of 0 is turned on, the first identification information of the part (part 510) is read and compared with the second identification information, and when the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, it is determined that they do not match. Inform. Therefore, even when the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. For this reason, it is possible to early and surely prevent the gaming machine 10 having an installation error in the part (parts 510) in the game arcade (gaming store) from operating.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means receives information regarding the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and corresponds to the model of the gaming machine 10. The second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, the gaming machine 1
When various wrong models (parts 510) are attached to various models of 0, this can be notified. Further, it is possible to notify the correct model to which the wrong component should be attached.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, the first part (part 510)
Since the identification information (parts identification information) can be set by one or a plurality of wirings pulled up to a predetermined voltage, the first identification information can be easily set.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, the first part (part 510)
Since the identification information can be set by the DIP switch, the first identification information can be easily set.

[Thirteenth Embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 134. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to twelfth embodiments. First
3rd Embodiment is related with the fixed display period of a probability setting value. The fixed display period is
This is a period for displaying the fixed value of the probability setting value.

[Game control device according to thirteenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 119, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the thirteenth embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment, but the probability set value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 displays the status. It is built in the device 152. That is, the state display device 152 also functions as the probability set value display device 143 of the first and sixth embodiments. Further, in the game control device 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) is attached in addition to the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is turned on (power restoration). RAM initialization switch 112 and setting key switch 93 at power-on
Depending on the on/off state of, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, after the RAM is cleared, the probability setting value can be changed in a variable setting state (setting change state, setting change). Mode (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In the RAM clear here, the clear process of step A1036 is executed, and A1021 of FIG. 5C is executed.
The clear area #2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2 set in step. Note that the thirteenth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that FIG.
In steps A1024 and A1028, it is determined whether or not both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Further, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 of FIG. 5A, not the setting value change switch 102 but the RAM initialization switch 1
It is determined whether 12 is on.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered. The transition to the setting confirmation state is performed in step A2 of the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11) during the timer interrupt processing after the normal power recovery (A1031-A1035) is performed.
504-A2508.

Although the setting key switch 93 is off when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, the RAM initialization process (R
AM clear processing) is executed, and as shown in FIG. 5C, the clear area #2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM is cleared. In addition,
In the RAM clear, the clear area #3 may be designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 3.

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned off when the power is turned on, the state where the power is simply restored is obtained.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 121, the probability set value changing process (A13
08) will be described in detail. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value change processing according to the thirteenth embodiment.

The probability set value changing process of the thirteenth embodiment is different from the probability set value changing process of FIG. 10 in that the positions of the processes of steps A2412, A2414, and A2415 are changed to step A2411,
Since the processing of A2413 is deleted and the other processing is the same as that of FIG. 10, the same step numbers are given and the description thereof is omitted.

In the processing of step A2416, the game control device 100 loads the value of the working probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is “Y”), and saves it in the probability setting value area. Yes (A2412). The setting value is fixed by turning off the setting key switch 93, and values 0 to 5 corresponding to the fixed probability setting value are stored in the probability setting value area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and issues a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed. It transmits to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2415). Then, similarly to the first embodiment, the processes of steps A2417 to A2421 are executed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and the process proceeds to step A1049. Here, step A2420
By saving the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display area, the confirmed probability setting value is displayed in the state display device 152 in which the probability setting value display device 143 is incorporated.
Can be displayed. The state display device 152 that functions as the probability setting value display device 143
The transmission of the probability setting value display data to the driver 150 (153 in FIG. 71) can be performed in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment when transmitting the character ratio display data and the like.

[Process when setting value is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the processing at the time of receiving the set value in the single-shot command processing (B132
Details of 4) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process at the time of receiving the set value according to the thirteenth embodiment.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (result of B5201 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is ended.

Production control device 300, if the received command is a normal command (B520
1 is “Y”), the information indicating the current date and time (current time) is acquired from the RTC 338 (or the timer for time) (B5202), and whether the received command is the setting value information command at the end of the setting change or not. It is determined (B5203). What is the setting value information command at the end of setting change?
It is the setting value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with the command for ending the probability setting change in step A2421 of the probability setting value change processing. When the received command is not the setting value information command at the time of ending the setting change (the result of B5203 is “N”), the processing at the time of receiving the setting value is ended.

When the received command is the setting value information command at the end of setting change (result of B5203 is “Y”), effect control device 300 stores the setting value and the current date and time (current time) in the memory in association with each other. (B5204), the process at the time of receiving the set value is ended. The memory here is the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even if power is not supplied.

If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of setting change, that is, if it is the setting value information command at power failure recovery (A1035) or the setting value information command at RAM initialization (A1045) ( The result of B5203 may be “N”, and the setting value (probability setting value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the segment LED editing process (A
1314) will be described in detail. FIG. 123 is a segment LE according to the thirteenth embodiment.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of D edit processing. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the general figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display section 57, the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50 The settings related to the drive of the segment LEDs constituting the part 58, the third game state display part 59, and the round display part 60 are performed. Note that FIG.
Although not described in No. 23, in the segment LED edit processing, when light emission control is performed for the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variable display section 53 for the general figure variable display game other than the variable display game. The light emission control (light-off control, lighting control, blinking control) of the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the fluctuation display section 53 may be executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the hold display 54-56. .. In the variable display game, the control for causing the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the change display section 53 to emit light (blink) is executed in the symbol change control process (FIG. 29).

The game control device 100 first updates the blink control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In this embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

In the game control device 100, when the output is on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”)
If the universal figure hold number display table 1 is set (A9203) and it is not the output on timing (
The result of A9202 is "N"), the general figure reservation number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the general figure reservation number is acquired, and the segment of the general figure reservation indicator 56 (lamps D15, D16) is acquired. Save in the area (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2, so the general figure reservation indicator 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, Since the display data of the figure reservation number display table 1 and the display data of the general figure reservation number display table 2 are different, the general figure reservation indicator 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A920).
6). If the output is on timing (the result of A9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A9207), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 hold The number display table 2 is set (A9208), the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reserved indicator 54 (lamps D11, D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A921).
0). If the output is on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 hold is set. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), display data corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 (lamps D13 and D14) (A9213).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which a display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is defined (A9214), and obtains display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. Then, it is saved in the segment area of the round display portion 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display manners on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. are defined ( A9216). Further, the display data corresponding to the game status display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game status display section (A9217).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display portion 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game status display portion 57 (A9219). After that, the segment LED editing process ends.

[Timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on at time x2, the gaming machine 10
State (game machine state) becomes the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the undetermined probability set value (undetermined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display (undetermined value)). ). In the probability setting value display (undetermined value) of the state display device 152, the undetermined probability setting value is displayed in blinking. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display in a predetermined display mode that indicates that the setting is being changed. Batch display device 50
The (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth pattern), and the decoration device are maintained in the off state. The decoration device includes the frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper performance unit 4.
In addition to the board decoration device 46 such as 0c, it has a light emitting portion (LED) for decoration. Further, the decoration device may be in a dimmed state instead of being turned off, or may be turned off only in a light emitting section other than a specific color.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the state of the gaming machine becomes a state in which the game can be played, and the state display device 152 (second display device) shows a confirmed probability set value (set value).
Is displayed (probability set value display (fixed value)). In the probability setting value display (confirmed value) of the state display device 152, the confirmed probability setting value is lit up and displayed. When the gaming machine is in the game-enabled state, the set value cannot be changed or confirmed. Further, in response to the game playable state at time x3, the identification information of the off symbol is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and/or the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 (this special feature). (Figure display), a customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41. It should be noted that the display unit other than the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 (
The customer waiting display may be executed by blinking the lamps D3 to D18). The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. It should be noted that when the probability setting value is determined at time x3, it may be possible to additionally perform notification by sound or voice that the probability setting value is determined.

Time x4 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from time x3. At time x4, the state display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability setting value display and starts the all-flashing display, and repeatedly performs the all-off display and all-on display of all segments at predetermined time intervals. .. All the blinking display of the status display device 152 is executed by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. 123, and the blinking display of the display unit of the collective display device 50 (the customer waiting display described above) is performed. You may synchronize with the same blinking period.

The time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from the time x3, and also when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. Good. In this way, when the setting change state is switched to the playable state in which the set value cannot be changed, the set value confirmed on the state display device 152 is for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds).
ec) Since it becomes possible to confirm, it is possible to see the confirmed set value without entering the setting confirmation mode again after changing the setting, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the game hall manager.

Time x5 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from time x4. At time x5, the state display device 152 ends the all-blinking display and starts the performance display (display of the character role ratio), and the character role ratio is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying the information on the character ratio, the state display device 152 may display the information on the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state). Rate display, number of discharged balls display, base value display). As described above, the accessory ratio and the payout rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and serve as performance information indicating the performance of the gaming machine. Then, the status display device 152 can execute a performance display that displays performance information.

Although the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from time x2 is a blinking display and the probability setting value display (confirmed value) of the state display device 152 from time x3 is a lighting display, these blinking display or lighting The probability setting value display (undetermined value) may be turned on and the probability setting value display (determined value) may be changed to blinking by replacing the display.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting change state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 125, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are shown above the display screen together with the display screen of the display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 125(s), the effect control device 300 receives the command in which the probability setting is being changed (A1041), and thus the setting change display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. 721 is displayed. In addition, as described above, the lamp display device 80 is used during the setting change.
And the upper performance unit 40c is turned off. In addition, the effect control device 300 may give a notification indicating that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting changing display 721.

In FIG. 125 (shi), the display device 4 is displayed in response to the fact that the game is ready after the setting is changed.
The customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of No. 1. When the game can be played, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed, and a part of the upper effect unit 40c lights up or blinks in accordance with the customer waiting demo as shown in black in FIG. .. As described above, the lamp display device 80 includes the lamp display portions 1 and 2 (LED) that perform the variable display (blinking) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the number of starting memories of each special symbol variable display game. Since it consists of the lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notification, it is turned off in the normal display (off display),
Part of the demonstration may be lit or blinked in accordance with the customer waiting demonstration.

FIG. 125 (s) shows the special figure 2 variation start processing (A3202) or the special figure 1 variation start processing (A3).
206) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo is finished and the special figure variable display game (variable display game) is started. Customer waiting demo screen 7 shown in Fig. 125 (shi)
22 is hidden, and the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 6)
In 10C), the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed. Further, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which a part of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned on or blinked in accordance with the special figure variation display game. In the pending digest area 640, a pending special figure changing pending display 643 (starting memory display, special figure running pending display) corresponding to the running (digesting) special figure changing display game is displayed. Hold display section 6
At 30, the pending first start memory and second start memory are displayed. For example, when the special figure variation display game is started after the customer waiting demonstration, the hold display unit 630 is displayed as shown in FIG.
In this state, there is no pending first start memory or second start memory.

[Modified example of timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 126 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the thirteenth embodiment. Note that in the following description of FIGS. 126, 127, 129, and 130, description that overlaps with FIG. 124 will be appropriately omitted.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts all blinking.

Then, a time x4′ when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x3.
Then, the state display device 152 switches the display from all blinks to the probability setting value display (fixed value). After switching the display to the probability setting value display, the state display device 152 starts performance display (characteristics ratio display or ball output rate display) at time x5′ when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed. Then, the duty ratio is displayed. In this way, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, and the state display device 152 is displayed in a blinking state in response to the setting change mode being changed to the game-enabled state. Can be clearly indicated to the person. In addition, after that, since the set value confirmed by the probability set value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds),
The game hall manager can confirm the set value as it is, and can improve the work efficiency.

As in the case of FIG. 124, after displaying the probability setting value, the performance display may be started after all blinking is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x5′.

[Second Modification of Timing Chart of Probability Setting Value Confirmation Display Period at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a second modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing a second modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts the probability set value display.

Then, at time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from the probability setting value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display for notifying that the setting has been confirmed, as will be described later with reference to FIG. After switching the display to the notification display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (the character ratio display or the ball output ratio display) at time x5 when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed, and displays the character ratio. indicate.

At time x3, before the probability setting value display (confirmed value) is displayed on the status display device 152, all blinking or notification display may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). Further, at the time x3, if the notification display is performed before the probability setting value display (confirmed value) is displayed on the state display device 152, from the time x4 to the time x5 after the probability setting value display (confirmed value). All blinks may be performed instead of the notification display.

[Display mode when setting of status display device is changed]
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the setting of the status display device 152 according to the second modification of the thirteenth embodiment is changed.

First, FIG. 128(a) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the power is turned off until time x2 in FIG. 127. If you include it, all 8 segments are turned off.

FIG. 128B is a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability setting value display (undetermined value, confirmed value) is displayed from time x2 to time x4.
The current probability setting value (for example, “6”) is displayed in the digit 3 at the left end of, and the seven segments (digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) other than digit 3 are extinguished. The current probability setting value (for example, “6”) displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the state display device 152 is a blinking display in the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from the time x2 to the time x3. The probability setting value display (confirmed value) from x3 to time x4 is turned on.

FIG. 128C is a display mode of the state display device 152 when the notification display is performed from time x4 to time x5. On the digits 0 to 3 of the state display device 152, upper and lower bars indicating that the probability setting value has been fixed are displayed. The notification display displayed on the digits 0 to 3 of the state display device 152 is not limited to the display by the upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability set value and the performance display.

FIG. 128D is a display mode of the status display device 152 whose performance is displayed after time x5. On the status display device 152, as shown in FIG. 128(d), a payout rate (for example, "b1.35") for the latest predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of discharged balls is displayed as a performance display. ..
It should be noted that the status display device 152 may display the overall payout rate (for example, “bL.35” shown in FIG. 102) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present time, the base value, and the accessory ratio. The display may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 to 3 seconds).

[Third Modification Example of Timing Chart during Confirmation Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, time x4′ is set.
When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) is performed with', the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped and displayed. This special map display (display of the identification information) starts the variable display from the off pattern, and the special map variable display game (variable display game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration ends and the decorative special figure variable display game (variable display game) starts. In response to the start of the special figure variation display game of the collective display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 uses the fourth symbol special figure variation display game (variation display). Game) and the number of holdings are started, and the decoration device displays an effect corresponding display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variation display game.

Then, at a time x5'' when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4'',
The status display device 152 ends all blinking, and starts performance display (characteristic product ratio display or ball output rate display). In this way, information about the game can be displayed early by starting all blinking and performance display in response to the start of the special figure variation display game without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time. ..

The state display device 152 performs the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 variation start process (A3206), that is, the normal variation winning device 37 or the starting winning opening 3
It is not limited to the mode in which all blinking is started when there is a winning of the game ball in 6, but also when there is a winning of the game ball in the general winning opening 35 or when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34. You may start blinking. Further, like the example in FIG. 124 described above, all blinking may be started when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth Modification Example of Timing Chart during Confirmation Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 130A is a timing chart showing a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of changing the setting according to the thirteenth embodiment.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x2, the gaming machine state changes to the setting change mode, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modification start all blinking. At that time, the blinking cycle of the collective display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 123, and the blinking cycle of the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device is also controlled by the collective display device 5.
It is set to be the same as the blinking cycle of 0, and the blinking timing of each device is synchronized. The game control device 100 may send a command to the effect control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 and the collective display device 50. When the state display device 152 blinks to display the probability set value, the blinking of the state display device 152 is controlled by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 is controlled. The blinking timing and the blinking timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

The all-blinking display of the collective display device 50 may be performed by all the display sections (light emitting sections, LED lamps D1 to D18) as shown in FIG. 34F, and the display section 51 for the special figure variation display game may be performed. , 52 (LED lamps D1 and D2) may be used. Further, all the blinking display of the collective display device 50 may be performed by LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3 to D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1 and D2) for the special figure variation display game.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the playable state, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device end all blinking. At time x3, the identification information of the outlying symbols is stopped and displayed on the collective display device 50 (this special map display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. Further, the confirmed probability set value (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display).
On the display screen of the display device 41, the setting change display ends and the customer waiting demonstration starts.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from time x3 and time x5''' is reached, the state display device 152 ends the probability set value display (confirmed value) and the performance display (characteristics ratio display). And display the payout rate). As described above, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modification,
After finishing the probability setting value display (fixed value), all blinking is omitted and the performance display (role character ratio display and ball output rate display) is performed immediately. Etc. can be confirmed at an early stage. By the time x5″′, the collective display device 50 and the display device 41 are displayed.
In the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started, the special display variation display game (variation display game) and the hold number display by the fourth symbol are performed on the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device is the special figure variation display game. The display corresponding to the effect is performed (effect corresponding display).

[Timing chart of confirmation display period of probability setting value at setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of confirming the setting according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, RA is set at time x12.
When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on with the M initialization switch 112 turned off, the state of the game machine 10 (game machine state) becomes the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the state display device 15
A confirmed probability set value (fixed value) is displayed in 2 (probability set value display). Then, on the display screen of the display device 41, a stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 132 described later (stop symbol display). In addition, when the gaming machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50,
For example, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are in a fully lit state in which all segments and LEDs are fully lit (some lit states may be possible). Further, the collective display device 50 may display the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. Also,
When shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the stop symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the state of the gaming machine is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the playable state, and the state display device 152 displays a performance (displays a ratio of prizes and a percentage of balls output).
Is displayed. In addition, the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is turned off) is displayed as the special map on the collective display device 50 in response to the game machine state being changed to the game-enabled state at time x13. This special map display (previous display pattern)). Then, the customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are displayed normally. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the playable state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as the performance display on the state display device 152 (second display device), so that the work efficiency of the amusement hall manager is improved. Can be improved.

Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at time x13, a predetermined time (for example, 0. 5 sec) All blinking may be performed. In this way, by displaying the display (all blinking display) different from the probability setting value and the performance display between the setting confirmation mode and the playable state on the state display device 152, the game hall manager can: It becomes easier to more surely understand that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 132, the lamp display device 80 and the upper rendering unit 40c of the decoration device are shown above the display screen together with the display screen of the display device 41. In the following description of FIGS. 132 and 134,
Descriptions that overlap with FIG. 125 are omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 132 (se), the effect control device 300 receives the command for confirming the probability setting (A2508, B1327) to turn on all the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device. As described above, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device have different light emission modes during the setting confirmation and during the setting change (FIG. 125). In addition, the performance control device 300
May notify (by sound or the like) that the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are all turned on and that the setting is being confirmed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41,
The stop symbol (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed, and the display mode is such that it is not known that the setting is being confirmed.

In FIG. 132 (S), the display device 4 is displayed in response to the game being enabled after the setting is confirmed.
The customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of No. 1. When the game can be played, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

FIG. 132 (ta) shows a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3)
206) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is finished and the special figure variable display game (variable display game) is started by 206). As in FIG. 125 (s), customer waiting demo screen 7
22 is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which they are turned on or blinking in accordance with the special figure variable display game. ..

[Modified example of timing chart during confirmation display period of probability setting value when setting is confirmed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. Note that, in the following description of FIG. 133, the description overlapping with FIG. 131 will be appropriately omitted.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at the time x12, the gaming machine state is switched to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of the present modification, a list of setting confirmation displays 723 that show the setting history of the probability setting values so far is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, as will be described later with reference to FIG. The display mode shows that the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation display (setting history display)).
In addition, the fixed set value is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display (fixed value)).
The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device start all blinking. The collective display device 50 is maintained in the off state. Note that the setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and may be a display mode in which it is possible to know that the setting is being confirmed. For example, the setting confirmation may be displayed by characters or the like. In addition to the setting confirmation display, it may be notified by sound or voice that the setting is being confirmed.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the game machine state is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the playable state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start customer waiting demonstration. At the time x13, the state display device 152 displays a performance display (characteristics ratio display or payout rate display) in response to the game machine state being set to the game-enabled state.
Is displayed, and the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is turned off) is displayed on the collective display device 50 as the special symbol (present special symbol display (previous symbol)). In addition, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device display normally.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display screen of the display device 41 during setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 134 (se'), the effect control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327). The setting confirmation display 723 is a display in which the setting history of the probability setting values so far can be listed, and for example, the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, etc. are displayed in a list as shown in FIG. It As described in FIG. 122, the effect control device 300 receives the set value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is “Y”), and the set value and the set change date and time when the set value is fixed. FeRAM in association with (date and time of setting change end)
It is stored in 323 (B5204). Therefore, effect control device 300, by reading the setting value and the setting change date and time from the FeRAM323, to display a list of setting history of probability setting value on the setting confirmation display 723. Lamp display device 80 and upper rendering unit 4 of the decoration device
0c is all blinking during the setting confirmation mode.

In FIG. 134 (s'), a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting is confirmed, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are normally displayed. Will be displayed.

Similar to FIGS. 125(s) and 132(a), FIG. 134(ta') shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is finished and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started. Is. The customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden from the display screen of the display device 41, and the variable display area 62 is displayed.
The decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed with 0, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are displayed.
Is an effect mode that lights up or blinks in accordance with the special figure variation display game.

The movable accessory such as the internal accessory 44a, 44b (see FIG. 52A) may be provided with a display screen capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variation display game. When a display screen is provided on the movable accessory, a setting confirmation display 723 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 and a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed using the display screen of the movable accessory. It can be performed. Further, the display screen of the movable accessory may be in a state different from the playable state such as a single color display (for example, white display) in the setting confirmation mode. Further, the display screen of the display device 41 may be displayed in a single color (for example, white display), and the setting confirmation display 723 may be performed on the display screen of the movable accessory to display the setting history. With such a mode, even when it is not known that the display screen of the display device 41 is confirming the setting as shown in FIG. 132 (step), the setting is confirming from the display screen of the movable accessory. You can easily understand that. Not only in the setting confirmation mode, but also in the setting change mode, the display screen of the movable accessory may be changed to a display mode different from the playable state.

[Operation/Effect of Thirteenth Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, this special symbol) is variably displayed is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, It is provided with control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value in the case of a special result mode). The gaming machine 10 is provided in the game area 32 and has a winning area in which gaming balls can be won (general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variation winning device 37, large variation winning device 39 of special variation winning device 39), and games. When a ball wins a prize area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each prize area.
, A first display device (collective display device 50) capable of displaying a display relating to a game, and a setting changing means (setting changing device 42, RA) capable of changing a setting value (setting value, probability setting value) relating to a game condition.
M initialization switch 112), set value, and performance information derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning (proportion of character role, ball-out rate for the latest predetermined number of ball-out, total ball-out) Ratio, base value), and a second display device (state display device 152) capable of displaying. The control means is
In response to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change means, the display of the first display device is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, extinguished display, all blinking display) ), and in response to the setting change means changing the setting value to an unchangeable game playable state, the setting value fixed on the second display device is set for a predetermined period (predetermined time,
For example, it can be displayed for 2 to 3 seconds.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the set value confirmed on the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time) when the setting change state is switched to the game possible state in which the set value cannot be changed, the game is played. The work efficiency of the place manager can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) is changed from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state) to the game-enabled state, and the second The set value determined on the display device (state display device 152) is a signal relating to the game (for example, a detection signal when a game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37, the starting winning opening 36 or the general winning opening 35 is detected, The signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the figure starting gate 34, the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64, the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24) is displayed until detected. According to such a gaming machine 10, since performance information is displayed when a signal relating to a game is detected, the game hall manager can confirm the performance information immediately after changing the setting.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, this special symbol) is variably displayed is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, It is provided with control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value in the case of a special result mode). The gaming machine 10 is provided in the game area 32 and has a winning area in which gaming balls can be won (general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variation winning device 37, large variation winning device 39 of special variation winning device 39), and games. When a ball wins a prize area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each prize area.
, A first display device (collective display device 50) capable of displaying a display relating to a game, and a setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92, capable of confirming a setting value (setting value, probability setting value) relating to a game condition.
RAM initialization switch 112), set value, and performance information derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning (proportion of winning character, ball output rate for the most recent predetermined number of balls discharged, total ball output) Ratio, base value), and a second display device (state display device 152) capable of displaying. In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed by the setting confirmation unit, the control unit displays the display of the first display device in a predetermined display mode (for example, all-lit display, previous display). The special design variable display game identification information stop pattern is displayed), and the performance information is displayed on the second display device in response to the change from the setting confirmation state to the playable state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means. Can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game possible state in which the set value cannot be confirmed, the game hall manager's Work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment can change the setting value (setting value, probability setting value) when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting change state). The device 42 and the RAM initialization switch 112) are further provided. Control means (game control device 1
00) is a display when the display of the first display device (collective display device 50) is in the setting change state (probability set value display) or a display regarding the game in response to the setting confirmation state. Is set to a different mode (for example, all-lit display). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily perform the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game (special figure variable display game), and the display of the effect on the third display device. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the. The effect control means displays the history of setting changes on the third display device in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). According to such a gaming machine 10, even when the first display device (collective display device 50) is not in the display mode in which it can be seen that it is in the setting confirmation state, the game hall manager sets from the third display device. It is possible to confirm the setting status and confirm the setting history.

In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), the control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (collective display device 50) immediately before the variable display game (special figure fluctuation). The display result of the display game (stop design, identification information) is displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily perform the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to cause the first display device to perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to suppress the processing load and the amount of data corresponding to that.

The control means (game control device 100) responds to the changeable state from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the second display device (state display device 152) with performance information (proportion of character role, latest item). Immediately display the payout rate, the total payout rate, and the base value) for the predetermined number of discharged balls. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game hall manager can immediately confirm the performance information by changing the setting confirmation state to the playable state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

The control means (game control device 100) sets the display of the second display device (state display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the playable state. The display (probability set value display) or performance information (role ratio, ball output rate for the latest predetermined number of discharged balls, total ball output rate, base value) in a different mode, The performance information is displayed on the second display device after the display of the display device is changed to a different mode. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, a display in a mode different from these displays is displayed immediately after entering the game-enabled state.
Since it is displayed on the display device, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to more surely know that the game state has been switched to the playable state.

[Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. The present embodiment is a modification of the display during and after the change of the probability setting value according to the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the operation for changing the probability setting value and the operation for confirming the probability setting value in this embodiment are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the digit (0) (indicator 900-0), the digit (1) (indicator 900-1), the digit (2) (indicator 900-2), the digit (3) of the status display device 152. As will be described later, the (display device 900-3) is used to display the probability setting value before setting change (during setting confirmation), during setting change, and after setting change.

In the present embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 (memory erasing means) and the setting key switch 93 (switches, setting changing means) shown in FIG. 119 etc. are turned on (first state) and the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Then, the setting variable state is entered (see FIG. 120). At this time, the game microcomputer 111 constituting the game control device 100 corresponds to the work probability set value (provisional value, which is any of 0 to 5) stored in the work probability set value area of the RAM 111c. A character code (including dot data (Dp=1)) is extracted. Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 sends the character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H(
Hexadecimal expression))) is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). As a result, the first display data (dot data (Dp
(Including 1)) is transmitted to the driver 150 (153) of the status display device 152. In addition, the transmission of the status display device 152 to the driver 150 (153) is performed by the LED.
The data transmission process (A16001 in FIG. 70) can be executed in the same manner as the case where the character ratio display data is transmitted.

Next, by pressing the set value change switch 102 (setting change means), the set value change switch 1
When a signal is input from 02, the gaming microcomputer 111 updates (0 to 5) the value of the work probability setting value area (FIG. 121, A2408) and corresponds to the updated work probability setting value information. Character code (including dot data (Dp=1)) is extracted, and first display data including the updated character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area. (FIG. 121, A2409). As a result, the command including the updated first display data (including the dot data (Dp=1)) is sent to the status display device 152.
Is transmitted to the driver 150.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 11
1 stores (overwrites) the information of the work probability set value stored in the work probability set value area in the probability set value area as the probability set value (fixed value) after the setting change (FIG. 121, A2412).
). Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the character code (including dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the changed probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H). (Hexadecimal notation)) is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (A2409 in FIG. 121). This allows
A command including the second display data (including dot data (Dp=0)) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

Alternatively, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a character code (dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the work probability setting value information stored in the work probability setting value area. ) And the address of the 8-bit latch 167a are generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area to generate the second display data (
A command including dot data (including Dp=0) can be transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

In FIG. 135, the case where the probability setting value is changed from 1 to 6 is described. FIG. 135
As shown in, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on, the gaming microcomputer 111 displays the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, X1000001B: "1"). Together with the dot data (D
(including p=1)) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. As a result, "1" is displayed in the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 as the value being changed and the dot is turned on.

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pushed down, the information of the probability set value (working probability set value) input from the set value change switch 102 is “2”, “3”,... Is updated each time, and the first display data is updated each time and transmitted to the (digit 0) of the status display device 152. Therefore, at (digit 0) of the status display device 152, “2”, “3”,...
6” is displayed while being updated as the changed probability setting value, while the lighting of the dot is maintained.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 11
1 is the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code corresponding to the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area (for example, X0000110B: represents "6" and includes dot data (Dp=0)) And a status display device 1 for generating second display data including
52 to the driver 150. Therefore, in (digit 0) of the status display device 152, "
6” is displayed as the probability setting value after the setting is changed, while the dot is turned off. And "6"
The display of is maintained, for example, until a game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the like.

As described above, the probability setting value displayed is the value during the setting change (temporary value) or the value after the setting change (fixed value) depending on the presence or absence of the dot data (Dp=1) (additional information). Can be easily identified.

Here, the probability setting value and/or the dot during the setting change related to the first display data can be displayed by blinking. When the dot is blinked, for example, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (including the dot data (Dp=1)) corresponding to the information of the working probability setting value. 1 Display data (Dp=
1), the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the first display data (Dp=0) including the character code (dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the work probability setting value information. By alternately overwriting the probability setting value display data area, the first display data (Dp=1
) And the first display data (Dp=0) may be alternately transmitted at a predetermined time interval.

Further, when blinking the probability setting value and the dot during the setting change, for example, the game microcomputer 111, the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the character code (dot data (Dp =1))), the first display data (lighting), the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the character code “X00
The first display data (10000B) including “10000B” (non-lighting) may be alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals in the same manner as above. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a is alternately overwritten with the first display data (setting value display lighting) and the first display data (non-lighting).

In addition, when blinking the probability setting value, the lighting of the dots may be omitted. In this case, the gaming microcomputer 111 corresponds to, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the information of the working probability setting value. First display data including a character code (including dot data (Dp=0)), an address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the above-described character code relating to non-lighting, and first display data including: , May be transmitted alternately at predetermined time intervals in the same manner as above.

Note that the present embodiment is characterized in that the display modes of the first display data and the second display data are different from each other. Therefore, in addition to the presence/absence of dots and the presence/absence of blinking of the probability setting value, the intensity of the light to be lit may be different between the first display data and the second display data. When the light emitting members (LEDs) of the status display device 152 have a plurality of different emission colors, the first display data and the second display data may be configured to emit different colors. ..

[Operation/Effect of Fourteenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on satisfaction of a start condition, and a stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In this case, a special game state advantageous for the player is generated.
The gaming machine 10 displays information about the setting value by causing a light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit light, and a setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. And a possible display unit (state display device 152). The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which a setting value (probability setting value) can be changed. The state can be converted into a first state (ON state) that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state (OFF state) that ends the setting variable state. Game control means (game control device 100
) Generates display data based on the set value (probability set value) and the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and displays it on the display unit (state display device 152). The display data is
Generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the first display data (probability set value during setting change) and the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state The first display data includes second display data (probability set value after setting change) having different display modes.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify whether the displayed setting value (probability setting value) is a confirmed value or an undetermined value.

The display unit (state display device 152) can display the set value (probability set value) and additional information (Dp=1) different from the set value (probability set value), and the first display data is , And additional information (Dp=1).

As a result, the setting value (probability setting value) depends on whether additional information is displayed (dot lighting) or not.
It is possible to easily discriminate between the confirmed and unconfirmed ones.

Further, the additional information (dot data) is characterized by blinking display. This allows
The distinctiveness of the probability setting value during the setting change can be enhanced by blinking the dots.

Further, the set value (probability set value) related to the first display data is characterized by blinking display. Thereby, the distinguishability of the probability setting value during the setting change can be enhanced by blinking the probability setting value.

[First Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of the probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. In the first modification, when displaying the first display data and when displaying the second display data, (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) of the status display device 152 are also turned on. ..

That is, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the third display data (for example, "P---") that indicates that the probability setting value displayed by the first display data is being changed, and sets the probability. By storing in the value display data area (may be another display data area), the first display data and the third display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth display data (for example, "C-") indicating that the probability setting value displayed by the second display data is after the setting change, and sets the probability. The second display data and the fourth display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 by being stored in the value display data area (may be another display data area).

The third display data and the fourth display data are stored in the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c which is not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112.

The third display data includes the third display data (digit 1) transmitted to the (digit 1) of the status display device 152 (display unit 900-1) and the (digit 2) (display of the status display device 152. Vessel 900-2
) And the third display data (digit 3) transmitted to the (digit 3) (display 900-3) of the status display device 152 (digit 3). Including.

The third display data (digit 1) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H(1
Hexadecimal expression)) and a character code (for example, "X0011010B" (-)).

The third display data (digit 2) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H(1
Hexadecimal expression)) and a character code (for example, "X0011010B" (-)).

The third display data (digit 3) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (for example, 25H(1
6) and a character code (for example, "X0010100B" (P)).

The fourth display data includes fourth display data (digit 1) to be sent to (digit 1) of the status display device 152 and fourth display data to be sent to (digit 2) of the status display device 152. Data (digit 2
) And fourth display data (digit 3) to be transmitted to (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

The fourth display data (digit 1) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H(1
Hexadecimal expression)) and a character code (for example, "X0011010B" (-)).

The fourth display data (digit 2) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H(1
Hexadecimal expression)) and a character code (for example, "X0011010B" (-)).

The fourth display data (digit 3) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (for example, 25H(1
Hexadecimal expression)) and a character code (for example, "X0001100B" (C)).

As shown in FIG. 136, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the game machine 10 is powered on, the first display data (probability set value during setting change) is displayed in the same manner as above. The data is displayed on the (digit 0) of the device 152, and the third display data (
Digit 1) (-) is displayed on (digit 1) of status display device 152, and the third display data (digit 2) (
−) is displayed on the (digit 2) of the status display device 152, and the third display data (digit 3) (P) is displayed on the (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

Although the dot is lit in FIG. 136, the presence of the third display data makes it possible to identify that the probability setting value displayed in the (digit 0) of the state display device 152 is being changed. The lighting of dots may be omitted.

When the setting value change switch 102 is pushed, the information of the probability setting value (working probability setting value) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is updated to "2", "3",... "6". , The first display data is updated and displayed in the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 each time, but the (digit 1), (digit 2), (digit 3) displays of the status display device 152 do not change. ..

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the second display data is displayed in the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 and the fourth display data (digit 1) (-) is displayed in the same manner as above. The fourth display data (digit 2) (-) is displayed on the (digit 1) of the device 152, and the fourth display data (digit 3) (C) is displayed on the (digit 2) of the status display device 152. It is displayed at (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

In this way, different characters are displayed during the setting change (P---) and after the setting change (C---). Therefore, whether the value currently displayed is the setting being changed or not. It can be easily identified as to what it is.

[Operation/Effect of First Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the first modification, the display unit (state display device 152) has a plurality of digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1,
Digit 0) can be displayed. The display data is the set value (displayed by the first display data (
The probability setting value) indicates that the setting is being changed, and the display unit (state display device 152)
3rd display data (P---) displayed in a digit different from the 1st display data in
including. This makes it possible to easily identify that the displayed probability setting value is currently being changed.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits the second display data to the digit (digit 0) displaying the first display data, and the display data is the second display data. It suggests that the displayed setting value (probability setting value) is the one after changing the setting, and
The status display device 152) includes the fourth display data (C---) displayed in a digit different from the second display data. As a result, it is possible to easily identify that the displayed probability setting value is the one after the setting change. Further, since the second display data is displayed in the same digit as the first display data, it is possible to identify the change from the setting change to the setting change without changing the viewpoint.

[Second Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 137 is a second modified example of the display mode of the probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, and is the display mode of the probability setting values when the setting is changed and the display mode of the probability setting values when the setting is confirmed. It is a schematic diagram which compared and.

In the second modification, the RAM initialization switch 112 shown in FIG. 119 and the like is turned off and the setting key switch 93 is turned on to turn on the power to enter the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) (see FIG. 120). ). At this time, generation of the above-mentioned first display data and second display data is prohibited. However, if the displayed probability setting value is being changed,
It is possible to easily identify whether the setting is being confirmed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 extracts a character code (including dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.
Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the fifth display data including the character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal notation)) in the probability setting value display data area. 5 Status display device 15 including commands including display data
2 to the driver 150.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, for example, the display of the fifth display data is finished, or the display of the fifth display data is maintained until the game ball is won at the starting winning opening 36 or the like. ..

As shown in FIG. 137(A), the fifth display data is displayed in the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 similarly to the first display data (display during setting change). The dot does not light because it does not have 1). At this time, even if the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the display content on the state display device 152 does not change.

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 suggests that the probability setting value displayed on the state display device 152 is the one for which the setting is being confirmed (the one before shifting to the setting variable state) by the fifth display data. The sixth display data can be generated and transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. The sixth display data is stored in an area which is not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112 and is, for example, the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, and is the same as the fourth display data (digit 1) and (digit 2) of the status display device 152. ), (digit 3).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 137(B), the sixth display data can be displayed in the same manner as the fourth display data (C--), but a display different from the fourth display data can be displayed. It is possible.

Alternatively, the gaming microcomputer 111 extracts a character code (including dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c. Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the character code and the 8-bit latch 16
7d (or 8-bit latch 167b, 8-bit latch 167c) address (for example, 25
The fifth display data including H (hexadecimal expression)) is stored in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the command including the fifth display data is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137(C), the digit (digit 0) where the probability setting value is being changed and the digit (digit 3 or digit 1) where the probability setting value is being confirmed.
, Digits 2) can be different from each other.

[Operation/Effect of Second Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the second modified example, the game control means (game control device 100) has a storage means (RAM111c) in which information on a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored, and a storage means (RAM111c). ), a memory erasing means (RAM initialization switch 112) for erasing information different from the information of the set value (probability set value). In the game control means (game control device 100), the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the memory erasing means (RA).
When the M initialization switch 112) is turned on and the game machine 10 is powered on, the first display data is generated (setting change mode), and the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the memory is erased. The generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited (setting confirmation mode) by turning on the game machine 10 with the means (RAM initialization switch 112) turned off.
Then, the display data is based on the information of the set value (probability set value) before shifting to the setting variable state, on condition that the generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited. It is characterized by including the generated fifth display data.

As a result, the probability setting value is displayed in a state in which the setting change of the probability setting value is prohibited, so that it is possible to avoid an error in which the probability setting value is changed abruptly by touching the setting value change switch 102.

Further, the display unit (state display device 152) is capable of displaying a plurality of digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data in a digit different from the first display data. As a result, it is possible to easily identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed depending on the display position.

Further, the display unit (state display device 152) can display a plurality of digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data in the same digit as the first display data. The display data indicates that the set value (probability set value) displayed by the fifth display data is before the shift to the setting variable state, and the display data (state display device 152) displays the fifth value. The display data includes sixth display data (C-) displayed in different digits. As a result, it is possible to easily determine that the displayed probability setting value is being confirmed.

[Third Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification of the display manner of the probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. In the third modification, during the setting change, the probability setting value (
The provisional value) and the probability setting value (fixed value) before the setting change (before changing to the setting variable state) are displayed at the same time, and the probability setting value (fixed value) after the setting change and the setting change after the setting change The previous probability setting value (fixed value) is displayed at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 shown in FIG. 119 and the like are turned on (first state) and the power is turned on to enter the variable setting state. At this time,
The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the first lighting data (same as the first display data) and FIG.
The second lighting data (same as the fifth display data) shown in C) is simultaneously generated. Further, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the gaming microcomputer 111 causes the fourth lighting data (
The same as the second display data) is generated.

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the first lighting data (digit 0) and the second lighting data (digit 3), and also generates the third lighting data to drive the driver 1 of the status display device 152.
It can be sent to 50, but it can be omitted.

In the third modification, instead of the second lighting data (digit 3), the second lighting data (digit 0) is generated, and this is generated at a timing (alternate) different from that of the first lighting data (digit 0). ) To display on the status display device 152, and only the status display device 152 (digit 0) (other digits may be used)
The probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change may be displayed alternately. Here, the switching cycle between the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change is set to a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 seconds), and the display time of the probability setting value during the setting change (for example, 1 second). )When,
The display time (for example, 1 second) of the probability setting value before the setting change is set to be the same. Further, one of the display time of the probability setting value and the probability setting value before the setting change may be lengthened and the other display time may be shortened. Further, in order to facilitate the distinction between the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change, the first lighting data is preferably configured to include the dot data (Dp=1).

The third lighting data is a probability that the probability setting value is displayed as the fourth lighting data (first lighting data) from the probability setting value before the setting change displayed by the second lighting data when the setting is changed. This indicates that the setting value is changed, and includes the third lighting data (digit 1) (intermediate digit) and the third lighting data (digit 2) (intermediate digit).

The third lighting data (digit 1) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H(1
Hexadecimal expression)) and a character code (for example, "X0011010B" (-)).

The third lighting data (digit 2) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H(1
Hexadecimal expression)) and a character code (for example, "X0011010B" (-)).

The character code of the third lighting data (digit 1, digit 2) is "X00111.
It is also preferable to use "10B"("T" rotated 90 degrees to the right, imitating a leftward arrow).

As shown in FIG. 138, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on, the first lighting data (probability set value during setting change) of the state display device 152 ( It is displayed at digit 0) and the dot lights up. Further, the third lighting data (digit 1) (-) is displayed in (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the third lighting data (digit 2) (-) is (digit 2) of the status display device 152. The second lighting data (probability set value before setting change) is displayed in (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

When the set value change switch 102 is pressed down, the probability set value information input from the set value change switch 102 is updated to "2", "3",... "6", and the first lighting is performed each time. Data is updated and transmitted toward (digit 0) of the status display device 152.
The display of (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) of 52 does not change.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the fourth lighting data (probability set value after setting change) is displayed on the (digit 0) of the state display device 152 and the dot is turned off in the same manner as above. Further, the display of the third lighting data (digit 1), the third lighting data (digit 2), and the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability set value before setting change) is maintained. This display is maintained until, for example, a game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the like.

In this way, since the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value during the setting change (and after the setting change) are displayed at the same time, it is possible to reduce the setting error of the probability setting value.

[Operation/Effect of Third Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third modified example includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on satisfaction of a start condition, and a stop result of the variable display game is special. When the result is obtained, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated.
The gaming machine 10 changes the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game by changing the setting (setting changing device 42) and the light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit the setting value (probability setting value). The display part (state display device 152) which can display the information regarding (1) is included. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which a setting value (probability setting value) can be changed. The state can be converted into a first state that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state that ends the setting variable state. The game control means (game control device 100) is a storage means (RAM1) in which information on a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored.
11c), a set value (probability set value), and a switch (setting key switch 9)
The lighting data is generated based on the state of 3) and can be transmitted to the display unit (state display device 152). The display unit (state display device 152) can display a plurality of digits and each digit can be displayed by the lighting data. The lighting data includes first lighting data (probability set value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state. If the second lighting data (before changing the setting) is generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) before shifting to the setting variable state and is displayed in a digit different from the first lighting data. Probability setting value).

As a result, the display unit (state display device 152) simultaneously displays the setting value being changed (probability setting value) and the setting value before changing the setting (probability setting value).
It is possible to surely change the setting of the setting value (probability setting value) after grasping the probability setting value.

In the third modified example, the display unit (state display device 152) displays an intermediate digit (digit 3) between the digit (digit 0) displaying the first lighting data and the digit (digit 3) displaying the second lighting data. Digits 1 and 2) are included, and the lighting data includes the third lighting data (---) displayed in the middle digit. Therefore, the probability setting value displayed by the second lighting data is set to the probability setting value displayed by the fourth lighting data (or the first lighting data) during the setting change by the third lighting data. Can be suggested to change.

In the third modified example, the lighting data includes fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and the fourth lighting data is the first lighting data. Is displayed in the same digit (digit 0). As a result, the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be visually recognized without changing the viewpoint.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third modified example is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and a stop result of the variable display game is provided. When a special result is obtained, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 changes the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game by changing the setting (setting changing device 42) and the light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit the setting value (probability setting value). The display part (state display device 152) which can display the information regarding (1) is included. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which a setting value (probability setting value) can be changed. The state can be converted into a first state that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state that ends the setting variable state. The game control means (game control device 100) is a storage means (R) in which information of a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored.
AM111c), and it is possible to generate lighting data based on the set value (probability set value) and the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and transmit it to the display unit (state display device 152). .. The display unit (state display device 152) can be displayed by the lighting data. The lighting data includes first lighting data (probability set value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state. In the case of, the second lighting data (before the setting change) is generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) before shifting to the setting variable state and is displayed at a timing different from the first lighting data. Probability setting value).

As a result, the display unit (state display device 152) alternately displays the set value (probability set value) during the setting change and the set value before the setting change (probability set value).
It is possible to surely change the setting of the setting value (probability setting value) after grasping the probability setting value.

[Fourth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display manner of the probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. The fourth modified example shows the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138. In FIG. 139, the probability setting value (fixed) is changed by changing to (A), (B), and (C) with the passage of time. (Value) is displayed to indicate that it will be updated.

In the fourth modification, the fourth lighting data is initially a character code (for example, "X0000110B" corresponding to the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the work probability setting value when the setting key switch 93 is turned off. , (6)) and.

After a lapse of a predetermined time from turning off the setting key switch 93, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data by the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code and displays the probability setting value. The data is stored (overwritten) in the data area, and further, the lighting data for non-lighting is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code "X00100000B" for non-lighting, and is written in the probability setting value display data area Remember (overwrite)
To do.

As a result, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability set value before setting change), the third lighting data (digit 2), the fourth lighting data (digit 1) (probability set value after setting change) The non-illuminated lighting data (digit 0) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character code relating to the probability setting value (6) after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code relating to non-lighting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139(A), (digit 3) and (digit 2) of the status display device 152.
While the display of () is maintained, the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed on the (digit 1) of the state display device 152, and the (digit 0) of the state display device 152 is turned off.

After the predetermined time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data by the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code, and stores (overwrites) it in the probability setting value display data area. , Lighting data for non-lighting is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code for non-lighting, and is stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability set value before setting change), the fourth lighting data (digit 2) (probability set value after setting change), and non-lighting lighting data (digit 1) ), lighting data (digit 0) of no lighting is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code relating to the probability setting value after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character code indicating no lighting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139(B), while the display of (digit 3) of the state display device 152 is maintained, the probability setting value (6) after the setting is changed is displayed in (digit 2) of the state display device 152. Is displayed, and (digit 0) and (digit 1) of the status display device 152 are turned off.

Further, after a predetermined time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data by the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code, and stores (overwrites) it in the probability setting value display data area, Further, the non-lighting lighting data is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the non-lighting character code, and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the fourth lighting data (digit 3), the non-lighting lighting data (
Digit 2), unlit lighting data (digit 1), and unlit lighting data (digit 0) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Then, the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the character code relating to the probability setting value after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code relating to non-lighting.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 139(C), the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed in (digit 3) of the status display device 152, and (digit 0) and (digit) of the status display device 152 are displayed. 1), (digit 2
) Goes out.

In the fourth modified example, when the display of FIG. 139(C) is displayed, the work probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after the setting change. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even before the display in FIG. 139(C), for example, when the game ball is won at the starting winning opening 36 or the like, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is set. The changed probability setting value is stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value area.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the fourth modified example, the lighting data includes the fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and includes game control means (game control device 100).
) Indicates that the fourth lighting data is the digit (digit 0), the middle digit (digit 1), which displays the first lighting data,
The display unit (moves in the order of the middle digit (digit 2) and the digit (digit 3) displaying the second lighting data.
It transmits to the status display device 152).

Thereby, it is possible to visually understand that the probability setting value is updated (overwritten) from the probability setting value before the setting change to the probability setting value after the setting change by the setting change.

[Fifth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 140 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modified example of the display mode of the probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. Similar to the fourth modified example, the fifth modified example shows the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138. In FIG. 139, the probability changes as (A) and (B) change over time. The display indicates that the set value (fixed value) has been updated.

In the fifth modification, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates fifth lighting data (AFt) indicating that the probability setting value displayed by the fourth lighting data is the probability setting value after the setting change.

The fifth lighting data includes the fifth lighting data (digit 3), the fifth lighting data (digit 2), and the fifth lighting data (digit 1), which are the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c and are RA.
It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the M initialization switch 112.

The fifth lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X0001010B” (A)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0011100B” (t)). Note that, unlike FIG. 72, the character code “X0011100B” corresponds to the character “t”.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs 8
The sixth lighting data representing the probability setting value before the setting change by the address of the bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, "X0000001B" (1)) corresponding to the information of the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. To generate.

In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 is (digit 3), (digit 2), (digit 1) of the state display device 152.
Is used to generate the seventh lighting data (bEf) indicating that the probability setting value displayed by the sixth lighting data is before the setting change.

The seventh lighting data includes the seventh lighting data (digit 3), the seventh lighting data (digit 2), and the seventh lighting data (digit 1), which are also the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c and are RA
It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the M initialization switch 112.

The seventh lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X00010101B” (b)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001110B” (E)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

After the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 111
The sixth lighting data (digit 0) is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character code (for example, "X0000110B" (1)) corresponding to the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Then, it is stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area, and the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code (for example, "X0001111B"
(F)), the seventh lighting data (digit 1) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (other display data area may be used).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, "X0001110B" (E)) for the seventh lighting data (digit 2).
And store (overwrite) in the probability set value display data area (other display data area may be used)
However, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, “X00
The seventh lighting data (digit 3) is generated by “01011B” (b) and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (may be another display data area). As a result, the sixth lighting data (digit 0) and the seventh lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code "X0000001B" (1) relating to the sixth lighting data (digit 0), and the 8-bit latch 167b is replaced by the seventh code.
The character code "X0001111B" (F) related to the lighting data (digit 1) is overwritten, and the character code "X related to the seventh lighting data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c.
0001110B" (E) is overwritten, and the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the character code "X0001011B" (b) related to the seventh lighting data (digit 3).

Therefore, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the setting key switch 93 shown in FIG.
As shown in (), “bEF1” (Before1) is displayed on the state display device 152, and it is possible to recognize that the probability setting value before the setting change is “1”. Further, the fifth modification may be configured to display "1bEF" (1Before).

After that, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character code relating to the work probability setting value stored in the work probability setting value area (for example, "
X0000110B" (6)) generates the fourth lighting data (digit 0) and stores (overwrites) it in the probability setting value display data area, and the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code ("X0011100B"). (T)), the fifth lighting data (digit 1) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (other display data area may be used).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, "X0001111B" (F)) for the fifth lighting data (digit 2).
And store (overwrite) in the probability set value display data area (other display data area may be used)
However, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, “X00
01010B” (A)), the fifth lighting data (digit 3) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area (other display data area may be used).

As a result, the fourth lighting data (digit 0) and the fifth lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Then, the 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code "X0000110B" (6) associated with the fourth lighting data (digit 0), and the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character associated with the fifth lighting data (digit 1). The code ("X0011100B" (t)) is overwritten, the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code "X00011111B" (F) related to the fifth lighting data, and the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the fifth lighting data. The related character code "X0001010B
(A) is overwritten.

As a result, after the state shown in FIG. 140(A), as shown in FIG.
"AFt6" (After6) is displayed on the screen, and it can be recognized that the probability setting value after the setting change is "6". Further, the fifth modification may be configured to display "6AFt" (6After). In particular, by displaying the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change in the same digit (digits other than 0), the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability after the setting change The set value can be easily identified.

In the fifth modified example, when the display of FIG. 140(B) is obtained, the work probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the changed probability setting value. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even before the display of FIG. 140(B), for example, when the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the like, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is set. The changed probability setting value is stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value area.

[Operation/Effect of Fifth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the fifth modified example, the lighting data indicates that the setting value (probability setting value) displayed by the fourth lighting data is the one after the setting is changed, and the digit is different from the fourth lighting data. It includes the displayed fifth lighting data (AFt). The lighting data is the sixth lighting data generated based on the set value (probability set value) before the switch to the setting variable state when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state. including. Further, the lighting data suggests that the set value (probability set value) displayed by the sixth lighting data is before the shift to the setting variable state (before the setting is changed) and the sixth lighting data is set. 7th lighting data (bEF) displayed in a digit different from. The game control means (game control device 100),
When the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, the sixth lighting data (probability set value before setting change) and the seventh lighting data (bEF) are output, and after a predetermined time elapses, the fourth lighting data is output. Lighting data (probability set value after setting change) and fifth lighting data (AFt) are output.

As a result, the probability set value before the setting change and the probability set value after the setting change are displayed with a time lag along with a display indicating them, so that the probability set value before the setting change and the probability set value after the setting change can be easily performed. Can be identified.

Further, the fourth lighting data and the sixth lighting data are displayed in the same digit (digit 0). As a result, the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be easily identified without moving the line of sight.

[Fifteenth Embodiment]
The fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 151. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to fourteenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The fifteenth embodiment relates to setting of a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
With reference to FIG. 141, the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (
The details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a variation pattern setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100.

First, the game control device 100 sets a fluctuation group table (sorting table, fluctuation pattern group) based on the information (here, fluctuation pattern group number) that is selected and selected at the end of the big hit by the big hit ending process described later. Yes (A4301). Specifically, the corresponding fluctuation group table is set according to the fluctuation pattern group number. The fluctuation pattern group number functions as a parameter (index value, intermediary value) associated with the fluctuation group table and defining the fluctuation group table. In addition to the variation pattern group number, the variation group table is based on the current game state (probability variation state, normal state, etc.) and the result of the special figure variation display game to be started (departure, small hit, big hit). Is set.

Then, the random number is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) and prepared (A4302). Then, 2-byte allocation processing is executed (A4303), the address of the fluctuation selection table (fluctuation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and the fluctuation selection table is prepared (A4304).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holding 1) (A4305). Then, the distribution process is executed (A430
6), the variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the variation number area (A4
307).

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4303) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 142A is a flowchart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the selection table (the variable group table prepared in A4301) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4401). Here, the fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one fluctuation selection table, but a fluctuation group table that defines only the fluctuation selection table in which the fluctuation pattern is “no reach” (for example, , Part of the fluctuation group table when the result is out of order), it is not necessary to sort, so the sorting value "
0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

Then, when the top data of the selection table (fluctuation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4407), the 2-byte allocation process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the selection table (fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “N”), the selection table (variation group table)
The first distribution value specified in 1 is acquired (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4302 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404).
Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A4405 to obtain a new random value. Is calculated (A4404
), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

It is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4).
It is executed until the result of 405 is “Y”). As a result, any one variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) is selected from at least one variation selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table). When it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407) and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4306) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The distribution process is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the target selection table (variation selection table prepared in step A4304) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4501). Here, the variation selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern (variation number), but in the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, the distribution value “0”, that is, The code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the top data of the target selection table (variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then, (A4507), the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the target selection table (variation selection table) is not a code without distribution (result of A4502 is “N”), the first data specified in the target selection table (variation selection table) The distribution value is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates a new random number value by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number value (value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2) prepared in step A4305 (A4504). It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), step A4
The process shifts to the processing of 503 and the subsequent processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (variation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4505 to obtain a new distribution value. A random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above process is step A4.
The process is repeated until it is determined in 505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the variation patterns (variation numbers) defined in the target selection table (variation selection table) is changed.
Is selected.

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "Y"), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), and the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation start information setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 (A4601). Next, the fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation number is acquired (A4603).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the variable time value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4604). After that, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation number
Is prepared as an effect command (A4605), and effect command setting processing is performed (A460).
6). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4607),
The address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (A4608). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4609), and the free area after the shift is cleared (A46).
10) Then, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern and a stop information command including information about extending stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Big hit end processing]
Referring to FIG. 144, the jackpot end process (A in the special figure game process (FIG. 12) described above is performed.
2614) will be described in detail. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process according to the fifteenth embodiment, which is executed by the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability variation determination data is high probability data (A6201). In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25)
In step A4008 and step A4108 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is set. Probability fluctuation determination data is high probability data when it is a probability change big hit stop symbol number that becomes a probability change state after the big hit ends, and becomes low probability data when it is a normal big hit stop symbol number that becomes a time saving state after the big hit end ..

If it is not high probability data (the result of A6201 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting processing 1 (A6202), and if it is high probability data (the result of A6201 is “Y”), , Big hit end setting processing 2 is executed (A6203).

In the jackpot end setting process 1, in order to achieve a time saving state (low probability state of the special figure variation display game) after the end of the big jackpot, the special figure high probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area and the special figure game mode flag is set. Save the special map low probability & time saving flag in the area. Also, in the jackpot end setting process 1, the initial value of the number of times of shortening fluctuations is saved in the area of the number of times shortening fluctuations.

In the big hit end setting process 2, the special figure high probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area and the special figure game mode flag is set in order to bring the probability change state (high probability state of special figure variation display game) after the big hit ends. Save the special map high probability & time saving flag in the area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the universal communication support (time saving) is generated after the big hit ends (see FIG. 14).
(See 6), in the jackpot end setting process 2, the latent probability variation state without the ordinary electric power support is not generated. However, when the latent probability change state is generated, in the jackpot end setting process 2, the general figure low probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area, and the special figure high probability & no time saving is performed in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the flag.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6204).
), the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (especially A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation is obtained (A6205), and is set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) The effect mode number of the mode (effect mode number) is acquired and saved (A6206).

Next, the game control device 100 obtains and saves the effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) of the effect mode set after the special game state ends (A6207), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Next mode transfer information is acquired and saved (A6208).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as an effect command in the power failure recovery transmission command area ( (A6210), effect command setting processing is executed (A6211).

Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the presence/absence of time saving (universal power support), and the effect mode. As a probability information command, one of "high probability/time saving", "low probability/time saving", "high probability/time saving",
Further, there are a plurality of commands including information on the effect mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes effect command setting processing (A6213).
Then, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6215).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a time saving (universal support) after the jackpot is over (A6216). When there is a reduction in working hours (universal support) (the result of A6216 is “Y”)
, The process proceeds to step A6219. When there is no reduction in working hours (universal support) (A6216)
The result is "N"), and the left-hand instruction command notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6217).
, Production command setting processing is executed (A6218), and the process proceeds to step A6219.

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number related to the special figure normal process (A
6219), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6220).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, one big hit signal is turned off, three big hit signals are turned off, and four big hit signals are turned off) in the external information output data area (A6221). Save the signal related to the end (for example, turning off the condition device operating signal, turning off the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, turning off the signal for special symbol 1 and turning off the signal for special symbol 2) in the test signal output data area. (A6222).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A622).
3) Clear the information in the pointer area of the round LED that indicates the number of rounds of the big hit (
(A6224), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (A6225). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (A6226), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6227).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a specific game state will be established after the jackpot is over (
A6228). In the present embodiment, the specific game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), but may include a time saving state or a universal electric power support state. In the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, a time saving state (with universal communication support) or a probable variation state (with universal communication support) is set as the specific game state after the completion of the large hit state (see FIG. 146). If the big hit is a probability change big hit, it becomes a probability change state after the big hit state ends, and if it is a normal big hit, it becomes a time saving state.

When the specific game state is not reached after the jackpot is over (result of A6228 is “N”), the game control device 100 normally sets a variation pattern group number (number of variation group table) corresponding to the variation pattern group (A6229). .. In the normal setting, performance mode information,
Fluctuating distribution information is derived based on the stop symbol pattern, etc., the address of the changing group table corresponding to the changing distribution information is acquired, and the changing group table number is set (see FIG.
63, see FIG. 164).

When the gaming state is in a specific gaming state after the jackpot is over (the result of A6228 is “Y”), the variation pattern group number corresponding to the variation pattern group (variation group table) is selected/set according to the set value. (A6230). The fluctuation pattern group number is a parameter that defines the fluctuation pattern group. Here, the numbers (fluctuation pattern group numbers) of the variation group tables A to E are set by lottery at the selection rate according to the set value as defined in the selection rate table (see FIG. 147). It should be noted that the condition other than the specific game state after the special game state may be taken into consideration and the process may proceed to step A6230.

In this way, in the specific game state (result of A6228 is “Y”), the variable group table number is set by a method (mode) different from the normal setting by the ordinary game support in the specific game state. This corresponds to the occurrence of "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). Therefore, when the latent probability changing state without the ordinary electric power support occurs after the big hit state ends, the latent probability changing state need not be included in the specific game state in the determination of step A6228. Note that, as shown in FIG. 145 (described later), in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game, and a small hit occurs with a high probability in each special figure 2 variable display game. Small hit R
"USH" occurs. Further, if the small hit occurs only in the special figure 1 variable display game, not in the special figure 2 variable display game as in the first embodiment, when the normal game state is reached after the big hit state, the normal setting is performed. A configuration in which the variable group table number is set by different methods (modes) is also possible.

In each of the fluctuation group tables A to E, the distribution value (rate of distributing the fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation selection table (variation pattern selection table) is defined (see FIG. 148).
.. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed in the specific game state after the end of the special game state is determined by lottery according to the set value. Therefore, apart from the jackpot probability, it is possible to flexibly adjust the rate of increase in the number of game balls acquired by the player through a variation pattern (that is, a variation time value) that is randomly selected according to the set value. Note that the increasing speed of the number of acquired balls (ball-out speed) is the number of acquired balls that the player can acquire per unit time.

After that, the game control device 100 ends the big hit ending process.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
FIG. 145 illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as the result of the big hit judgment process (FIG. 22) and the small hit judgment process (FIG. 23) for each setting (each set value). It is a table to do.

In the present embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (small in the special figure 1 variable display game. The hit probability is 0 for each setting). The big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process are also the same as in the eleventh embodiment (FIGS. 104C and 104D).

In the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of balls (the total of the number of coins and the number of prize balls) obtained by the jackpot in the unit time increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. The rate of increase in the number of balls acquired increases.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit, is constant regardless of the set value. Further, as shown in the small hit determination process (FIG. 23), there is no distinction between the low probability state and the high probability state in the small hit probability. It is also possible to provide a small setting difference in the small hit probability and slightly change the small hit probability in accordance with the set value. Small hit probability is normal (about big hit probability)
It is set higher than the above, and in the normal electric support state (probability change state, time saving state), a small hit occurs with a high probability (here, about 60%) every time the special figure 2 variable display game is played. RUS
"H" (small hit rush) occurs.

[Example of special design jackpot design distribution]
FIG. 146 is a table exemplifying the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game for each setting.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the distribution ratio of the big hit symbol numbers (type of big hit, symbols 1 to 5) is constant regardless of the set value, and the probability variation inrush rate is also constant regardless of the set value. In addition, special figure 2
The variable display game is more likely to generate a 16R big hit than the special figure 1 variable display game, which is advantageous to the player.

[Selection rate of variable group table]
FIG. 147 shows the variable group table A to which is selected by the lottery in step A6230.
It is a selection rate table (distribution table) which defines the selection rate (ratio, distribution rate) of the number E (variation pattern group number). As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern group number is selected according to the set value when the specific game state is reached after the jackpot is over (A6230 in FIG. 141). In this way, the variation group table (sorting table) that defines the proportion of the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game executed after the special gaming state is randomly selected with the probability (selectivity) according to the set value. ..

In addition, regarding the variation patterns of the variation group tables A to E, the expected value of the variation time is A
It becomes smaller in the order of >B>C>D>E. That is, the average variation time (average variation time) of the special figure variation display game decreases in the order of A>B>C>D>E for the selected variation group tables A to E. The average fluctuation time is the longest when the fluctuation group table A is selected and the shortest when the fluctuation group table E is selected.

As described above, the average fluctuation time (expected value of fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed is different for each selected fluctuation group table (sorting table). In the selection rate table of FIG. 147, the lower the setting value is, the lower the setting value becomes, the easier it is to select the fluctuation group table E having the smaller expected value of the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation group table B having the relatively larger expected value of the fluctuation time is selected. It becomes difficult to be done. Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average fluctuation time (expected value of fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game during operation of the gaming machine 10.

In this way, the lower the setting value is, the smaller the average fluctuation time (expected value of the fluctuation time) of the special map fluctuation display game becomes, so even if the small hit probability is constant, it is during the specific game state (here, the probability change The expected value of the number of balls (the total of the number of coins and the number of prize balls) obtained by “small hit RUSH” in the unit time of (state) is as follows: setting 6<setting 5<setting 4<setting 3<setting 2<setting 1 The lower the setting, the higher the rate of increase in the number of balls acquired. Further, the lower the setting, the smaller the average fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game during the specific game state, so that the holding is exhausted more quickly, and the rate of increase in the number of balls acquired obtained by "small hit RUSH" is increased. As the number of holdings reaches the upper limit, the number of shooting balls that the special figure variation display game does not start even if the variation winning device 37 (the second starting winning opening) is won is reduced. As described above, the lower the small hit, the more advantageous the player is, and the higher the big hit, the more advantageous the player is, which is the opposite tendency, and the difference between the set values (the set difference) is eased. It

[Example of fluctuation group table and fluctuation selection table]
148 and 149 exemplify the variation group tables A to E and the variation selection tables of the reachless system that can be selected in each variation group table. Note that FIG. 148 is an example of the case where the special figure variation display game is out of the probability variation state, and FIG. 149 is an example of the case where the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state. Note that a concrete fluctuation group table as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149 is obtained by changing the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A4301.
In addition to the variation pattern group number, it is set based on the current game state and the result of the special figure variation display game to be started (defeat, small hit, big hit).

In FIG. 148A-E, each of the fluctuation group tables A to E constitutes a fluctuation pattern group including fluctuation patterns of the reachless system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system. As a result of the 2-byte distribution processing (A4303) based on the set variation group tables A to E, the variation selection tables (variation pattern selection tables) of the reachless system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system are selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, as a result of the distribution process (A4306) by the selected variation selection table, variation numbers (variation pattern numbers) are selected at a predetermined ratio. Note that, in FIG. 148, for simplification of description, an example in which one variation number is selected at a rate of 100% by the variation selection table is shown for a system without reach.
As shown in another example), a plurality of fluctuation numbers may be selected at a predetermined ratio by the fluctuation selection table.

As shown in FIGS. 148A-E, when the variation selection tables for the reachless system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system are selected, the expected value of the variation time increases in the order of reachless system<normal reach system<SP1 reach system. Is set as follows. For example, the expected value of the variation time may be set to 7 seconds for the reachless system, 15 seconds for the normal reach system, and 30 seconds for the SP1 reach system.

The selection ratio of the variation selection table of the reachless system is as follows: variation group table A<variation group table B<variation group table C≦variation group tables D, E (D′, E
'), and the selection ratio of the normal reach type or SP1 reach type variation selection table is as follows: variation group table A> variation group table B> variation group table C
≧Fluctuation group tables D and E (D′, E′) are decreased in this order. Furthermore, the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table of the same reach system (any one of the reachless system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system) is selected is the fluctuation group table A> the fluctuation group. It is set to decrease in the order of table B>fluctuation group table C>variation group table D (including D′)>variation group table E (including E′). Therefore, the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time decreases in the order of fluctuation group table A> fluctuation group table B> fluctuation group table C> fluctuation group table D> fluctuation group table E. Becomes a short fluctuation.

The variation group tables D and E and the variation selection tables associated therewith are the variation pattern groups when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the jackpot state ends exceeds a predetermined number n (here, 100 times). By switching the numbers (parameters), the fluctuation group tables D′ and E′ and the fluctuation selection tables associated therewith can be switched. That is, these are switched according to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the jackpot state is over. Note that, for example,
The fluctuation pattern group numbers corresponding to the fluctuation group tables D′ and E′ are, for example, number 6,
7, the variation pattern group number is changed from the numbers 4 and 5 to the numbers 6 and 7 when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game exceeds the predetermined number n (here, 100 times). It should be noted that in the fluctuation group table E′, the expected value of the fluctuation time is significantly shorter than in the fluctuation group table D′.

In this way, the expected value of the fluctuation time is a normal length (for example, the same as the fluctuation group table C) when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed 1 to n times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot is over. However, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game after the jackpot is n+1 times (here, 10
If it is 1 time or more, the expected value of the fluctuation time becomes short. Therefore, if the special game state (big hit state) does not occur easily (so-called Hamari state) for more than a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), the increase rate of the number of acquired balls is increased to give the player a privilege. Can be given, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Also, in the specific game state (probably variable state, time saving state, normal power support state) where the influence of the fluctuation time on the increase speed of the number of balls acquired is large, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game after the jackpot is over a predetermined number (here When it exceeds 100 times, the expected value of the fluctuation time can be shortened, and the increasing speed of the number of acquired balls can be remarkably improved.

In this way, when the special gaming state (here, the probability variation state) in which the special gaming state is more likely to occur than the normal state after the special gaming state occurs, the special figure variation display game executed after the special gaming state is executed. By changing the parameter (fluctuation pattern group number) corresponding to the fluctuation group table (sorting table) according to the number of times, the fluctuation group table (sorting table) is switched. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to estimate the set value from the variation pattern.

The expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table of the same reach system is selected is fluctuation group table A (7.0 seconds) only for the fluctuation selection table of the system without reach shown in FIG. 148. >Variable group table B (5.0 seconds)>Variable group table C
(3.0 seconds)> fluctuating group table D (3.0 seconds to 2.0 seconds)> fluctuating group table E (3.0 seconds to 0.5 seconds) in the order of normal reach type or SP1 reach type Then, it may not be changed.

149 is the same as FIG. 148, but when the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state, the variation selection tables that can be selected from the variation group tables A to E are:
Only the reachless type and the normal reach type are available. Further, the variation time value of the variation of the reachless system defined by the variation selection table of the reachless system is different from FIG. 148. The variation time value of the variation in the reachless system is shorter in FIG. 149 than in FIG. 148, but may be longer. Special Figure 2 The probability of small hits in the variable display game is higher than the probability of outfall, so if the fluctuation time value when a small hit occurs is shorter than that in the outfall, the speed of holding shortage in "small hit RUSH" will increase. The speed at which the number of balls acquired increases as the speed increases.

Further, the contents of the fluctuation group tables A to E and the fluctuation selection table may be made the same to reduce the data capacity of the table depending on whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit or not in the probability changing state.

[Modification of Fifteenth Embodiment]
A modified example of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. This modified example relates to lottery/setting of a variable group table (fluctuation pattern group).

With reference to FIG. 150, the jackpot end process (A2614) in the special figure game process (FIG. 12) according to the modification will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit ending process according to the modification of the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the same step numbers are given to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 144, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (A7201). In addition, step A400 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25)
In step A4108 of 8 and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is set. In addition, when there is universal power support after the end of the big hit, the time reduction determination data is time saving operation data, and when there is no universal power support after the end of the big hit, the time reduction determination data is not time saving operation data.

Game control device 100, first, when it is not the time saving operation data (the result of A7201 is "N")
), the big hit end setting process 3 is executed (A7202), and when it is the time saving operation data (A7
If the result of 201 is “Y”), the big hit end setting process 4 is executed (A7203).

In the jackpot end setting process 3, the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area and the special figure high probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area in order to make the latent probability change state after the big hit ends. To save. In addition, in the jackpot end setting process 3, the high probability variation frequency initial value is saved in the high probability variation frequency region. In this modification, since the normal electric power support always occurs after the big hit ends, the big hit end setting process 3 is not executed, and the latent latency change state does not occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the latent latent variation state is generated after the end of the big hit is also possible.

In the big hit end setting process 4, the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area and the special figure high level is set in the special figure game mode flag area in order to bring the probability change state (not the latent probability change state) after the big hit. Probability & Save time flag. Further, in the jackpot end setting process 4, the high probability variation number initial value is saved in the high probability variation number region.

Further, after step A6213, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number as an effect command (A7214), and executes an effect command setting process (A6215).

Then, the game control device 100 sets the variation pattern group number (and thus the variation group table) according to the set value when the specific gaming state (here, the probability variation state) is reached after the jackpot is over (the result of A6228 is “Y”). It is set corresponding to the jackpot pattern drawn by lottery (A
7230). In this modification, it is configured to be in a specific game state (here, a probability change state) after the jackpot is over.

In this way, the big hit symbol (big hit stop symbol) is a parameter (index value, intermediary value) associated with the fluctuation group table in order to define the fluctuation group table (sorting table). In step A4004 of the 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25) and step A4104 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), the big hit stop symbol number is randomly selected according to the set value.

FIG. 151 is a jackpot symbol table exemplifying the jackpot symbol distribution (b jackpot breakdown) of the special symbol variation display game for each setting in the modified example of the fifteenth embodiment. As in FIG. 27, this big hit symbol table defines big hit symbols A to E (each corresponding to a big hit stop symbol number) indicating the type of big hit and its distribution rate (selection rate). In the present embodiment, the types of big hits are all probability varying big hits, and the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine having a high probability variation frequency of a predetermined number (for example, 300 times).

The big hit symbols A to be randomly selected (sorted) based on the distribution ratio (selection rate) of the big hit symbol table
The numbers of the variable group tables A to E (fluctuation pattern group numbers) are set in correspondence with E (A7230).

In addition, regarding the variation patterns of the variation group tables A to E, the expected value of the variation time is A
It becomes smaller in the order of >B>C>D>E. In the jackpot pattern table of FIG. 151, the lower the setting, the easier it is to select the fluctuation group table E having a smaller expected value of the fluctuation time, and it becomes more difficult to select the fluctuation group table B having a relatively large expected value of the fluctuation time ( (Similar to FIG. 147). Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average fluctuation time (expected value of fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game during operation of the gaming machine 10.

[Operation/Effect of Fifteenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, a winning in a start winning opening) (game control device 1
00, effect control device 300), and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 has a setting changing means (for example, a setting key switch 93) capable of changing a set value according to a setting related to a game.
And a set value change switch 102). The control means lottery determines the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special game state (eg, big hit) according to the set value.

Therefore, in addition to the probability of occurrence of a special game state (big hit probability), the rate of increase in the number of game balls obtained by the player is flexible through a variation pattern (that is, variation time value) that is randomly selected according to the set value. Can be adjusted to Especially, after the special game state, usually, the special game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal power support state), so the variation pattern (that is, the variation time value) has a large influence on the increase rate of the number of balls acquired. ..

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300),
Set a parameter (for example, fluctuation pattern group number or jackpot pattern) that is associated with a distribution table (for example, fluctuation group table) that defines the ratio of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation display game that is executed after the special game state. It is decided by lottery with a probability according to.

Therefore, it is possible to select the distribution table by randomly selecting the parameters associated with the distribution table with the probability according to the set value, and further to distribute the variation patterns by the distribution table. Therefore, it is possible to suitably select the variation pattern according to the set value. Also,
If you change the ratio (selection rate) that sorts the variation patterns for each sort table,
Further, it is possible to more suitably select the variation pattern according to the set value.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the expected value of the variation time of the variation pattern sorted by the sorting table differs for each sorting table. Therefore, for a set value with a low jackpot probability,
By facilitating the lottery of the distribution table having the short expected value of the fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the increase rate of the number of acquired balls and reduce the set difference (difference due to the set value) with respect to the increase rate of the acquired number of balls. On the other hand, for a set value with a high jackpot probability, it is possible to increase the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls by facilitating the lottery of a distribution table with a short expected value of the fluctuation time, and to increase the difference (Difference due to set value) can be increased.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, a parameter corresponding to the distribution table (eg, the distribution table is switched so as to switch the distribution table according to the number of times of execution of the variable display game executed after the special game state).
Change the fluctuation pattern group number). Therefore, depending on the number of times the variable display game is executed after the special gaming state, the player estimates the set value from the variation pattern by switching to a distribution table with a short or long expected value of the variation time, compared to the case without switching. Difficult to do.

Further, for example, the number of executions of the variable display game after the special game state is a predetermined number (for example, 10).
When it becomes larger than 0 times, by switching to the distribution table with a short expected value of the fluctuation time, the state where the special game state (big hit state) does not occur easily (so-called Hamari state) continued over the predetermined number of times. In this case, the player can be given a privilege by increasing the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls, and the interest in the game is improved.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, the control means causes the first special game state (big hit state), and the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result. When the result is obtained, a second special game state (small hit state) having a smaller game value that can be acquired by the player than the first special game state is generated. The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the first special gaming state by lottery according to the set value. The control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of probability variation big hit), the second special game state (small hit state) is likely to occur after the first special game state (for example, in the specific game state). It is possible to generate a small hit RUSH). Therefore, if the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the first special game state (big hit state) is drawn so as to be short according to the set value, the second special game state (small hit state) is likely to occur. The speed of holding and digesting in a state (for example, a small hit RUSH in the specific game state) is increased, the rate of increase in the number of balls acquired in the second special game state (small hit state) is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means performs lottery with a probability corresponding to the set value for the parameter associated with the distribution table that defines the ratio of distributing the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special game state. .. The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special game state by lottery based on the distribution table corresponding to the selected lottery parameter. The control means, after a special game state (big hit state), after a special game state, when a specific game state (probable change state, time saving state, normal power support state) in which the special game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state occurs A parameter (for example, a variation pattern group number) corresponding to the distribution table is changed so as to switch the distribution table in accordance with the number of times the variable display game is executed. Therefore, for example, depending on the number of times of execution of the variable display game, by switching to a distribution table having a short expected value of the variable time, the specific game in which the effect of the variable time on the increase speed of the number of acquired balls is larger than in the normal game state. In this state, the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls can be greatly improved.

[Sixteenth Embodiment]
The 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 166. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

The sixteenth embodiment relates to changing the effect pattern (effect mode) according to the above-mentioned set value (setting). In particular, in the sixteenth embodiment, even when the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of setting values, the appearance rate (appearance mode) of the predetermined effect is made different for each setting value among the plurality of setting values. As will be described later, the predetermined effects include normal notice, reach effect, look-ahead effect, special number notification effect of lucky number notification effect, character effect, background effect, and the like. The appearance rate of the effect may be a probability (appearance probability) that the effect appears per one special figure variation display game, or the appearance of the effect per unit time (for example, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 1 day). It may be the number of times (appearance speed).

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the sixteenth embodiment. The game board 30 according to the sixteenth embodiment is obtained by adding a lucky number display device 82 to the game board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the first embodiment. The lucky number display device 82 is controlled by the effect control device 300 and performs a lucky number notification effect of notifying a number (lucky number, here 1 to 9) selected by a lottery when a big hit occurs. The lucky number display device 82 may be controlled by the performance control device 300 so as to continuously notify the selected number (lucky number) when a big hit occurs until the next big hit occurs.

In the lucky number display device 82, when a special number notification effect (special notification effect) for notifying a specific number (for example, 3, 7) of the lucky numbers (1 to 9) appears, a game hall (game). The staff and managers of the store give the player special benefits. Benefits include the right not to redeem the prizes of the acquired game balls for each big hit, and points that can be used at the game hall. As a result, the player comes to pay attention to the numbers (display contents) of the lucky number display device 82, and the interest of the game is improved.

In FIG. 152, the position of the lucky number display device 82 is the lower right side of the game board 30 and the lower side of the special variation winning device 39, but the position is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 152, when the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (opposed to) the special variation winning device 39, the special variation winning device 39 is lit by the light emission of the lucky number displaying device 82 and a big hit.
The player can visually recognize that the game is in the open state in association with the game continuously or simultaneously, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, as shown in FIG. 152, if the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (opposing) the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure variation display portion 52 of the collective display device 50,
The special figure variation display game on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52 and the light emission of the lucky number display device 82 can be continuously or simultaneously associated with each other to be visually recognized, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. To do.

In the present embodiment, the lucky number display device 82 is the LE corresponding to each of the numbers 1 to 9.
Equipped with a D lamp as a light emitting part, an LED corresponding to a selected number among numbers 1 to 9
The lamp is turned on or blinked to notify the player of the selected number. For example, when the number 3 is selected, the LED lamp of the number 3 of the lucky number display device 82 emits light.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit is an LED lamp that illuminates the numbers shown on the surface cover and represented by the form from the back side by the light of the light emitting member (LED), and as shown in FIG. ) Is provided. However, the lucky number display device 82 may be one 7-segment type lamp that lights or blinks the selected number or one liquid crystal display device (the display device 41 can also be used).

[Big hit probability and production pattern]
FIG. 153 is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability and the effect pattern for each setting (each set value). The jackpot probability, which is the probability that a jackpot occurs in the special figure variation display game, is the same in the settings 1, 2, and 3, and is the same in the settings 4, 5, and 6. Settings 4, 5, 6
The jackpot probability of is higher than the jackpot probability of settings 1, 2, and 3. Even when the jackpot probability is the same among the plurality of setting values (1, 2, 3 or 4, 5, 6), the effect control device 300 sets the effect pattern for each of the setting values of the plurality of setting values. Make them different. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern is a predetermined effect (normal notice, reach effect, prefetch effect, special number notification effect,
It is the appearance mode (appearance rate, etc.) of the character effect, background effect, etc.

In the same jackpot probability settings 1, 2, and 3, setting 1 is effect pattern 1, and setting 2
Is the effect pattern 2 and setting 3 is the effect pattern 3, which is different for each set value. In settings 4, 5, and 6 of the same jackpot probability, setting 4 is effect pattern 1, setting 5 is effect pattern 2, setting 6 is effect pattern 3, and effect patterns are different for each set value.

154(A) and (B) show another example of the big hit probability and the effect pattern according to the set value. In FIG. 154(A), in the same jackpot probability settings 1 and 2, setting 1 is effect pattern 1, setting 2 is effect pattern 2, and effect patterns are different for each set value. In settings 3 and 4 of the same jackpot probability, setting 3 is effect pattern 1, setting 4 is effect pattern 2, and effect patterns are different for each set value. Same big hit probability setting 5
, 6 is effect pattern 1 in setting 5, effect pattern 2 in setting 6, and effect patterns are different for each set value. In FIG. 154(B), the same jackpot probability setting 1
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, setting 1 is effect pattern 1, setting 2 is effect pattern 2, setting 3 is effect pattern 3, setting 4 is effect pattern 4, and setting 5 Is the effect pattern 5, setting 6 is the effect pattern 6, and the effect pattern is different for each set value.

As described above, even when the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of setting values and there is no difference in the number of balls acquired (setting difference) due to the setting value, the player can change the effect pattern ( It is possible to expect an effect difference), and it is possible to select a gaming machine in which a predetermined effect is frequently generated. Then, the operation of the game machine is improved in the game arcade.

Further, for example, in the effect pattern 1, as a predetermined effect, the appearance rate of the character effect by the character A (for example, Daruma) and the background effect (for example, New Year) that matches the character A (
The selection rate is set to 100%, the appearance rate (selection rate) of the character effect by the character B (for example, Santa Claus) and the background effect (for example, Christmas) suitable for the character B is set to 0%, and conversely, in the effect pattern 2. , Character production by character A and character A
It is possible to set the appearance rate of the background effect matching 0 to 0% and the appearance rate of the character effect by the character B and the background effect matching the character B to 100%. If you do this,
The setting value can dramatically change the atmosphere of the game machine's effect, giving the impression that it is a different game machine, and it is possible to increase the number of game machines installed in the game hall in appearance. it can.

The character effect may be an effect of displaying the character on the display device 41, an effect of including the character in the decoration identification pattern, an effect of operating a movable accessory imitating the character, or the like. The background effect is an effect of displaying a background on the display device 41.

[Variation effect setting process]
Referring to FIG. 155, variation effect setting processing according to the sixteenth embodiment (B1905 in FIG. 43)
Will be described in detail. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. Note that the same step numbers are given to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 44, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

To simplify the description, FIG. 155 corresponding to steps B2002 and B2004 of FIG.
In steps B2002a and B2004a, the first-half notice distribution group address table is set without depending on the set value. Therefore, the advance notice lottery (selection rate, advance notice appearance rate) that appears during the first half fluctuation does not depend on the set value.

In Step B2007a, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points,
The second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set. Note that, in order to simplify the description, unlike the step B2007 in FIG. 44, the latter half notice distribution group address table does not depend on the set value. Next, the address of the latter half notice group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable command is acquired (B20).
08).

Then, production control device 300 executes the latter half notice distribution group table changing process capable of changing the address obtained at step B2008 to change the latter notice distribution group table (B2008a). Note that changing the latter half notice distribution group table is synonymous with changing the address of the latter half notice distribution group table. Then, based on the changed latter half notice distribution group table (which may not be changed), the second half notice lottery, which is a notice that appears during the second half change (during reach), is performed (B2009).

In addition, after step B2018, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the decorative special figure variation display game started by the variation system command (variation command) received this time is a big hit (B2019). Whether or not it is a big hit can be known from the symbol type (B1802). When the decorative special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2019 is “N”), the variation effect setting process is ended.

When the decoration special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B2019 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the lucky number allocation table according to the set value and the previous lucky number (B2020), Set lucky number allocation table (see Figure 161)
Based on, the lucky number is selected from the numerical values 1 to 9 (B2021). The last lucky number is the lucky number selected at the last big hit. After that, notification setting is performed to notify the lucky number display device 82 of the lucky number selected by the lottery (B2022). The set value included in the set value information command is stored in the storage unit such as the RAM in the set value receiving process (B1324).

Thereby, the lucky number notification effect is executed. Here, as the notification setting, the LED lamps of the respective numbers on the lucky number display device 82 are cyclically turned on during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game (or if the lucky number is one 7-segment type lamp, the lucky number is displayed). Lucky numbers 1 to 9 may be cyclically displayed on the display device 82), and the lucky number selected immediately before the end of the decorative special figure variation display game may be set to be notified to the lucky number display device 82.

Note that the process of steps B2019-B2022 may be configured to be executed when the symbol stop command is normally received (when the result of B1329 of FIG. 39 is “Y” and the result of B1330 is “Y”). is there. With this configuration, the selected lucky number is notified to the lucky number display device 82 when the decorative identification pattern is stopped.

Further, the processing of steps B2019-B2022 is the fanfare production setting processing (B2
A configuration carried out in 102) is also possible. With this configuration, the selected lucky number is notified to the lucky number display device 82 as part of the fanfare production.

Furthermore, the process of steps B2019-B2022 is a stop symbol setting process (B2012).
It is also possible for the configuration to be performed in. In this configuration, the display device 41 is used as the lucky number display device 82, and the jackpot stop design of the decorative special figure variation display game becomes the number of the selected lucky number. That is, the jackpot stop symbols are "1,1,1", "2,2,2"... "9,9,9" corresponding to each of the lucky numbers 1-9. In other words, the number of the big hit stop design of the decorative special figure variable display game is used as the lucky number.

[Late notice distribution group table change process]
With reference to FIG. 156, the latter half notice distribution group table change processing (
Details of B2008a) in FIG. 155 will be described. 156A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half notice group table changing process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 156B corresponds to FIG. 154(A) and is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half notice group table changing process executed by the effect control device 300.

In FIG. 156A, the effect control device 300 first executes a branch process according to the set value (B5201).

When the setting value is 1 or 4, the production control device 300 does nothing and ends the latter half notice distribution group table changing process, and the second notice distribution group table set by the address in step B2008 is not changed. ..

FIG. 157(A) exemplifies a normal latter half notice distribution group table that is not changed. In addition, in the order of button operation system notice, role action action notice, role emission system notice, group notice in order of the bottom of the table, the latter half of the notice will make the player feel more lively and entertaining. Notice).

When the set value is 2 or 5, production control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC 338 or the time timer) is within the predetermined period (B52).
02). The predetermined period may be a period that is regularly set for each hour (for example, 5 minutes for each hour), or a specific period of the day (for example, a period from 2:00 pm to 2:30 pm) But it's okay. If the time is not within the predetermined period (result of B5202 is “N”), the second half notice distribution group table changing process is ended without doing anything. If the time is within the predetermined period (B5
When the result of 202 is "Y"), the latter half notice distribution group table change processing (address change) that is referred to in the subsequent step B2009 is performed (B5203), and the second half notice distribution group table change processing ends.

FIG. 157(B) exemplifies the latter half notice distribution group table when the setting value is changed to 2 or 5. Note that in FIG. 157(B), the normal case of FIG. 157(A) (the setting value is 1
Or the case of 4), the latter half of the table is more lively (the notice that appears during the reach).
The selection rate increases. Also, the selection rate without notice will be lower than in the normal case. Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, the notice during the reach within the predetermined period makes the player have high expectations, and thus does not tire the player.

When the setting value is 3 or 6, production control device 300 determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting (that is, when the variable system command is received) (B5204). When the customer waiting demo command is received and the customer waiting demo is being executed on the display device 41, it can be determined that the customer is waiting. When the customer is not waiting (the result of B5204 is "N"), the second half notice distribution group table changing process is ended without doing anything. When the customer is waiting (the result of B5204 is “Y”), the latter half notice distribution group table referred to at the later step B2009 is changed (address change) (B5205), and the latter notice distribution group table is obtained. The change process ends.

FIG. 157(C) illustrates the latter half notice distribution group table when the setting value is changed to 3 or 6. Note that in FIG. 157(C), in the normal case of FIG. 157(A) (the set value is 1
Or 4) or when the set value is changed to 2 or 5 as shown in FIG. 157(B),
The selection rate of the bustling second half notice (the notice that appears during the reach) under the table is further increased. Moreover, the selection rate without notice is further reduced. Therefore, if the setting value is 3 or 6, the notice during the first reach immediately after the end of waiting for customers becomes lively and makes the player have high expectations. Therefore, the player tends to continue the game thereafter. Become stronger.

In this way, the effect pattern as the appearance mode of the notice (predetermined effect) that appears during the latter half of the change is the effect pattern 1 with the set value 1 or 4 and the effect value 2 or 5 corresponding to FIG. The effect pattern 2 and the set value 3 or 6 become the effect pattern 3.

FIG. 156B is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change processing. Note that, in FIG. 156B, the same step numbers are given to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 156A.

In FIG. 156B, the effect control device 300 first executes a branch process according to the set value (B5201).

If the setting value is 1, 3, 5, the effect control device 300 ends the second-half notice distribution group table changing process without doing anything, and the second-half notice distribution group table set by the address in step B2008 Not changed

If the set values are 2, 4, and 6, production control device 300 determines whether the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (B5202a).
). When the time is not within the predetermined period and the customer is not waiting (the result of B5202a is “N”)
, The latter half notice distribution group table changing process is ended without doing anything. If the time is within the predetermined period or the customer is currently waiting (the result of B5202a is “Y”), the subsequent step B20.
Change (address change) of the latter half notice group table referenced in 09 (B5
203), the latter half notice distribution group table change processing ends.

FIG. 157 shows the latter half notice distribution group table when the set values are changed to 2, 4, and 6.
It may be the same as in (B), and the selection rate of the second-half notice that makes the lower side of the table hold expectations is increased more than in the normal case (when the set value is 1, 3, 5). Also, the selection rate without notice will be lower than in the normal case.

As shown in FIGS. 156A and 156B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) has predetermined jackpot probability among a plurality of set values even under a predetermined condition (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or In the case of waiting for customers), the latter half notice distribution group table is changed according to the set value, and the appearance rate of the notice (predetermined effect) that appears during the second half change is set differently for each set value. To do. Therefore, only under a predetermined condition, the notice that appears during the latter half of the variation with respect to the specific set value can be violent or lively.

Note that in FIGS. 156A and 156B, step B5202 (B5202a) and step B5
By omitting 204, the latter half notice distribution group table is changed according to the set value regardless of the predetermined condition, and the appearance rate of the notice (predetermined effect) appearing during the second half change is always set for each set value. It is also possible to set different settings.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Referring to FIG. 158, the look-ahead variable system command processing (B1 in FIG. 38) according to the sixteenth embodiment is performed.
216) will be described in detail. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300. Note that FIG. 158 corresponds to FIG.
Only step B1711a has been added to step 1. Therefore, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

Rendering control device 300, in step B1711, loads the hold information of the prefetching target from the prefetching variable command area, and then executes the prefetching rendering distribution table setting process that sets the prefetching rendering distribution table for each set value (B1711a). Then, the pre-reading lottery process for lottery the pre-reading effect is executed based on the set pre-reading effect distribution table and the reservation information of the pre-reading target (B1712).

[Pre-reading effect distribution table setting process]
Referring to FIG. 159, the prefetching effect distribution table setting process (FIG. 15) according to the sixteenth embodiment.
8 of B1711a) will be described in detail. FIG. 159A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetching effect distribution table setting process executed by the effect control device 300. 159B corresponds to FIG. 154(A) and is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetching effect distribution table setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

In FIG. 159A, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal look-ahead effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes branch processing according to the set value (B5402).

When the setting value is 1 or 4, the production control device 300 ends the prefetching effect distribution table setting process without doing anything, and the prefetching effect distribution table set in step B5401 is not changed.

FIG. 160(A) exemplifies a normal look-ahead effect distribution table that does not change. Note that FIG.
In 60, a look-ahead effect distribution table relating to the notice of pending change is illustrated. Hold (starting memory)
Corresponding to, the display mode of the hold display (starting memory display) displayed on the display device 41 or the like is randomly selected with different distribution ratios (selection ratios) depending on whether the pre-reading target is a big hit or not. .. The display mode of the hold display is white (normal mode), blue (first color change mode), and red (second color change mode) in that order, which is easy to select in the case of a big hit and difficult to select in the case of a big hit, In this order, the expectation of a big hit increases.

When the setting value is 2 or 5, production control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC 338 or the time timer) is within the predetermined period (B54).
03). The predetermined period may be a period that is regularly provided every hour or may be a specific period of the day. If the time is not within the predetermined period (result of B5403 is “N”), the prefetch effect distribution table is ended without doing anything. If the time is within the predetermined period (result of B5403 is “Y”), the look-ahead effect distribution table referenced in the subsequent step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5404), and the look-ahead effect distribution table is changed. finish.

FIG. 160(B) exemplifies the prefetch effect distribution table when the setting value is changed to 2 or 5. Note that in FIG. 160(B), in the normal case of FIG. 160(A) (the setting value is 1 or 4).
In the case of), the distribution ratio (selection rate) of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) with a high expectation of a big hit on the lower side of the table increases. Here, in particular, when the hold of the prefetch target is a failure that occurs more frequently than the big hit, the selection rate of the hold display having a higher expectation than the normal mode increases.
Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, more notice of pending change to a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than usual occurs within a predetermined period, and the player has great expectations, so that the player is not bored.

When the setting value is 3 or 6, production control device 300 determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting (that is, at the time of receiving the variable system command) (B5405). When not waiting for customers (
The result of B5405 is "N"), and the prefetch effect distribution table setting process is ended without doing anything. When the customer is waiting (the result of B5405 is “Y”), the look-ahead effect distribution table referenced in the subsequent step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5406), and the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process is performed. finish.

FIG. 160C exemplifies the prefetch effect distribution table when the setting value is changed to 3 or 6. Note that in FIG. 160C, the normal case of FIG. 160A (the setting value is 1 or 4)
Case) or the setting value of 2 or 5 as shown in FIG. 160(B), the selection rate of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) with a higher expectation of the big hit at the bottom of the table Will be further increased. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the prefetching effect immediately after the end of waiting for the customer becomes particularly lively and makes the player have high expectations, and therefore the player tends to continue the game thereafter.

In this way, the effect pattern as the appearance mode of the prefetch effect (predetermined effect) is shown in FIG.
Corresponding to, effect pattern 1 with a setting value of 1 or 4, effect pattern 2 with a setting value of 2 or 5,
When the set value is 3 or 6, the effect pattern 3 is set.

FIG. 159B is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch effect distribution table setting processing. Note that, in FIG. 159B, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 159A.

In FIG. 159B, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal look-ahead effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes branch processing according to the set value (B5402).

When the set values are 1, 3, and 5, effect control device 300 ends the prefetch effect distribution table setting process without doing anything, and the prefetch effect allocation table set in step B5401 is not changed.

When the set values are 2, 4, and 6, production control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (B5403a).
). When the time is not within the predetermined period and the customer is not waiting (the result of B5403a is “N”)
, The prefetch effect distribution table setting process is ended without doing anything. When the time is within the predetermined period or when the customer is currently waiting (the result of B5403a is "Y"), the prefetch effect distribution table referred to in step B1712 later is changed from the normal one (B5404). , The prefetching effect distribution table setting process ends.

FIG. 160(B) shows the prefetch effect distribution table when the set values are changed to 2, 4, and 6.
The selection rate of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) having a high expectation at the lower side of the table is increased as compared with the normal case (when the set values are 1, 3, and 5).

As shown in FIGS. 159A and 159B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) has predetermined jackpot probability among a plurality of set values even under a predetermined condition (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or In the case of waiting for customers), the look-ahead effect distribution table is changed according to the set value, and the appearance rate of the pending change notice as the look-ahead effect (predetermined effect) is set to be different for each set value. .. Therefore, the look-ahead effect can be violently or lively for a specific set value only under a predetermined condition.

159A and B, steps B5403 (B5403a) and step B5
405 is omitted, the look-ahead effect distribution table is changed according to the set value regardless of a predetermined condition, and the appearance rate of the look-ahead effect (holding change notice) is always set to be different for each set value. Is also possible.

[Lucky number allocation table]
FIG. 161 shows a lucky number allocation table set in step B2020 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 155).

The lucky number distribution table I of FIG. 161(A) is normally used, and the distribution (selectivity) of each lucky number is the same. In the lucky number allocation table II of FIG. 161(B), the allocation (selectivity) of the predetermined numbers (4, 9) is lower than the other numbers. In the lucky number distribution table III of FIG. 161(C), the distribution of specific numbers (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given is higher than the other numbers. In the lucky number allocation table IV of FIG. 161(D), specific numbers (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given
Is lower than other numbers and is zero.

[Lucky number allocation table change pattern]
FIG. 162 shows a change pattern of the lucky number allocation table (B2020) set corresponding to the set value and the last lucky number when a big hit occurs.

When the set value is 1 or 4, the normal lucky number allocation table I is always set without changing the lucky number allocation table, and the lucky number effect pattern, which is the appearance mode of the lucky number, is the effect pattern 1. Becomes

If the set value is 2 or 5, and the previous lucky number (the one selected at the last big hit) is a specific number (for example, 3 or 7), the lucky number allocation table is Change to II, then return from II to I (change pattern of I→II→I)
.. As a result, when a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given is selected as the lucky number, a predetermined number (4 or 9) to which the privilege is not temporarily given at the next big hit is selected. It will be difficult. Therefore, the lottery (occurrence rate) of the lucky numbers is sharp and the interest of the game is improved. In this way, when the set value is 2 or 5, the lucky number effect pattern that is the appearance mode of the lucky number is effect pattern 2.

In addition, from the normal lucky number allocation table I to the lucky number allocation table II
After being changed to, the lucky number allocation table II may be continuously set not only once but also in several big hits. Further, when a specific number (for example, 3, 7) is selected, the lucky number allocation table may return from II to I.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number distribution table III in which the distribution of the specific numbers (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given is higher than the other numbers is selected by default.
The last lucky number (the one selected at the last big hit) is a specific number (eg 3,
If it is 7), the lucky number allocation table is changed from III to IV, and then,
Return from IV to III (change pattern of III→IV→III). Thus, once a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given is selected as a lucky number, a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is temporarily given at the next big hit is selected. Is difficult to select. Therefore, the lottery (occurrence rate) of the lucky numbers is sharp and the interest of the game is improved. In this way, when the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number effect pattern that is the appearance mode of the lucky number is effect pattern 3.

It should be noted that the lucky number distribution table IV may be continuously set not only once but also in several jackpots after the normal lucky number distribution table III is changed to the lucky number distribution table IV. Further, when a predetermined number (4, 9) is selected, the lucky number allocation table may be changed from IV to III.

As described above, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means), when the big hit probability is the same among the plurality of setting values, when the result mode of the special figure variation display game is the big hit (special result mode). , The appearance rate of the special number notification effect (predetermined effect) for notifying a specific number (for example, 3, 7) of the lucky numbers (1 to 9) is set for each set value (see FIG. 161). For this reason, the lucky number production is sharpened and the interest of the game is improved.

[Modification of Sixteenth Embodiment]
A modified example of the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. In this modification, the game control device 100 has an appearance rate (appearance mode) of a predetermined effect according to a set value (setting).
Be different. Here, the predetermined effect is a reach effect.

[Special map information setting process]
With reference to FIG. 163, the special figure information setting process (A3404 in FIG. 18, FIG.
The details of A3504) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure information setting processing executed by the game control device 100 in the special figure 1 variation start processing (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 variation start processing (FIG. 19).

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection pointer table (A42
01), the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (A4202).
.. Then, the variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information area saves the variable distribution information generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variable allocation information is a table pointer,
It is used later to select a variation group table (variation pattern group).

Referring to FIG. 164, a variation pattern setting process (A340) according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
6, A3506) will be described in detail. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting processing executed by the game control device 100 in the special figure 1 variation start processing (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 variation start processing (FIG. 19). Note that the same step numbers are given to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 141, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A43).
00). Next, referring to the variable group selection address table, the address of the variable group table (fluctuation pattern group) corresponding to the variable distribution information is acquired, and the variable group table is prepared (A4301a). After that, the variable group table changing process capable of changing the variable group table is executed (A4301b).

Then, the game control device 100 loads a random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and prepares it (A4302). Then, referring to the variable group table prepared in step A4301a or the variable group table changed in step A4301b, 2-byte allocation processing is executed (A4303).

[Variable group table change processing]
With reference to FIG. 165, a variable group table changing process according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment (
The details of A4301b) in FIG. 164 will be described. FIG. 165A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable group table changing process executed by the game control device 100. FIG. 165B corresponds to FIG. 154(A),
It is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the variable group table changing process executed by the game control device 100.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes a branch process according to the set value (A4801).

If the set value is 1 or 4, the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the variable group table changing process, and the variable group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

FIG. 166(A) exemplifies a normal variation group table that has not been changed in the normal state (normal gaming state) when the special figure variation display game is out of order. The variable group table is
A fluctuation pattern group including fluctuation patterns of no reach type, normal reach type, SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type, and SP3 reach type is formed. It should be noted that in the order of variation patterns of the reachless system, the normal reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system, the lower the table, the longer the variation time becomes, and the player is expected to win a big hit. As a result of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4303), a variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) of no reach type, normal reach type, SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type, SP3 reach type
Are selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, as a result of the distribution process (A4306) by the selected variation selection table, variation numbers (variation pattern numbers) are selected at a predetermined ratio.

When the set value is 2 or 5, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of games (rotation number) of the current special figure variation display game is within a predetermined range (A4802). The predetermined range may be a range that is regularly provided for every 300 rotations (for example, 50 rotations for every 300 rotations), or a specific rotation speed range for one day (for example, a range from 1000 rotations to 1100 rotations). .. The number of special figure variation display games may be the number of games after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, or the number of games after the jackpot is over. When the number of games is not within the predetermined range (result of A4802 is “N”), the variable group table changing process is ended without doing anything.
If the number of games is within the predetermined range (result of A4802 is “Y”), the variable group table (address change) referred to in the subsequent 2-byte allocation processing (A4303) is changed (A4803) to change. The group table changing process ends.

FIG. 166(B) shows a variation group table when the setting value is changed to 2 or 5.
A case where the special figure variation display game is out of the normal state (normal game state) will be exemplified. Note that in FIG. 166(B), the selection rate of the variation pattern (long reach) on the lower side of the table is longer than in the normal case of FIG. 166(A) (when the set value is 1 or 4). Will increase.
Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, many variation patterns (long reach effects) that make the display device 41 appear promising appear in the number of games within the predetermined range, and the player is not bored.

If the set value is 3 or 6, the game control device 100 is currently (that is, at the start of fluctuation),
It is determined whether or not the customer is waiting (A4804). If the customer waiting demonstration flag (A3210) is set, the game control device 100 can determine that the customer is waiting. When the customer is not waiting (the result of A4804 is "N"), the variable group table changing process is ended without doing anything. When the customer is waiting (result of A4804 is “Y”), the variable group table (address change) referred to in the subsequent 2-byte allocation processing (A4303) is changed (
(A4805), and the variable group table changing process ends.

FIG. 166(C) exemplifies the variation group table when the setting value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. Note that in FIG. 166(C), compared to the normal case of FIG. 166(A) (when the set value is 1 or 4) and the case where the set value is changed to 2 or 5 as in FIG. 166(B). Also, the selectivity of the variation pattern (long reach) on the lower side of the table is long, which increases the variation time. Therefore, if the set value is 3 or 6, the reach effect on the display device 41 immediately after the end of the waiting time becomes particularly long and lively, and the player has great expectations. Therefore, the player tends to continue the game thereafter. Becomes stronger.

FIG. 165B is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the variable group table changing process. Note that, in FIG. 165B, the same step numbers are given to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 165A.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes a branch process according to the set value (A4801).

When the set values are 1, 3, and 5, the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the variable group table changing process, and the variable group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

When the set values are 2, 4, and 6, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of games of the special figure variation display game is currently within a predetermined range, or whether or not the customer is currently waiting. Judge (A4
802a). When the number of games is not within the predetermined range and is not waiting for customers (result of A4802a is “N”), the variable group table changing process is ended without doing anything. When the number of games is within a predetermined range or is currently waiting for customers (result of A4802a is "Y"), change of variable group table (address change) referred to in subsequent 2-byte allocation processing (A4303) (A4803), and the variable group table change process ends.

The variation group table when the set values are changed to 2, 4, and 6 may be the same as that in FIG. 166(B), and the variation group table may be the same as that in the normal case (when the set values are 1, 3, and 5). The selection rate (rate) of the fluctuation pattern (long reach) that makes the lower fluctuation time long and holds expectations increases.

As shown in FIGS. 165A and 165A, the game control device 100 (production appearance rate setting means) has predetermined jackpot probability among a plurality of set values even if the jackpot probability is the same (for example, the number of games in a special figure variation display game). Is within the predetermined range or waiting for customers), change the fluctuation group table according to the set value, and if the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern (long reach) with a long fluctuation time differs for each set value. Set it. For this reason, it is possible to make the player greatly expect a big hit only under a predetermined condition.

[Operation/Effect of Sixteenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result mode of the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed is the special result mode. The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) capable of changing the setting value according to the setting related to the game. Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state is the same among a plurality of setting values, a predetermined effect (normal notice, reach effect, The pre-reading effect, a special number notification effect of the lucky number notification effect, a character effect, a background effect, etc. are provided with effect appearance rate setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 300).

Therefore, even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of setting values, and there is no difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting value, the player causes a difference in the effect pattern (effect difference) depending on the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to select a gaming machine that can expect a lot of predetermined effects. Then, the operation of the gaming machine is improved in the gaming hall (gaming store).

According to the sixteenth embodiment, effect appearance rate setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 3).
00) makes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect different for each set value under a predetermined condition (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or when waiting for a customer). Therefore, the appearance of the predetermined effect can be increased or decreased with respect to the specific set value only under the predetermined condition.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a clocking means for clocking the time. The effect appearance rate setting means changes the appearance rate of the predetermined effect for each set value when the time measured by the time measuring means is within the predetermined period. Therefore, when the time is within the predetermined period, the appearance of the predetermined effect can be increased or decreased with respect to the specific set value, and the interest of the game within the predetermined period can be significantly improved. By periodically providing the predetermined period, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, when the variable display game is started while waiting for a customer, the effect appearance rate setting means changes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect related to the variable display game for each set value. Therefore, with respect to a specific set value, it is possible to increase the appearance of a lively (flashy) predetermined effect after the end of waiting for a customer, fuel the expectations of the player, and prolong the operating time of the gaming machine.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, the effect appearance rate setting means changes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect for each set value when the result mode of the variable display game is the special result mode. Therefore, with respect to a specific set value, the appearance (special number notification effect) related to the special result mode (for example, the big hit mode) and the effect related to the special game state (big hit state) (fanfare game effect, big hit medium effect) By increasing the number, the expectations of the player can be fueled and the operating time of the gaming machine can be lengthened.

[17th Embodiment]
The seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 189. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to sixteenth embodiments. First
The seventh embodiment relates to a prediction effect using a touch sensor or the like.

[Game board according to the seventeenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 167, a game board 30 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment. In the upper left part of the center case 40 of the game board 30, a character effect unit 40f and a touch sensor 530 are provided.

The character rendering unit 40f is composed of a translucent character member (Tora Taro) and a light emitting member which has an LED capable of emitting an image of the character and is provided behind the character member. Alternatively, a non-translucent character member may be used to illuminate the character member with a light emitting member provided around the character member.

The touch sensor 530 is a sensor that is provided in the vicinity of the center of the character member (for example, the nose portion of the tiger taro) and functions as an operation detection unit that detects the operation of the player. In the present embodiment, the touch sensor 530 is an infrared sensor that irradiates infrared rays from the light projecting unit, and detects infrared rays reflected from an object to be detected, such as the player's hand, by the light receiving unit, thereby operating the player. Can be detected.

The touch sensor 530 has a predetermined range of the cover glass 14 (transparent member) of the glass frame 15 (
It is possible to detect an operation in which the player's hand approaches the detection range). The touch sensor 530 is called a “touch sensor” in the sense that the player detects an operation to touch the cover glass 14, but the player can detect the operation without necessarily touching the cover glass 14. Instead of the touch sensor 530 of the infrared sensor, a touch panel may be provided on the cover glass 14 to detect that the cover glass 14 is actually touched by a hand. Further, instead of the touch sensor 530, a touch switch of the operation handle 24 may be used.

The light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may be caused to emit light when the touch sensor 530 detects the operation of the player or when the operation of the player can be detected. Further, in this case, the light emission degree of the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f can be changed depending on whether the player's operation is detected or not. And brightly emit light when operation is detected).

In order to reduce the manufacturing cost, instead of providing the character effect unit 40f,
When the touch sensor 530 detects the operation of the player, the image of the character of the character effect unit 40f may appear and be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Production control device according to seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, a configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment.

In the production control device 300 of the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168, the touch sensor 53
The signal from 0 is also input to the SW input circuit 366. The character effect unit 40f
The light emitting member is controlled to emit light as a part of the board decoration device 46 by receiving a signal from the board decoration LED control circuit 332 of the effect control device 300.

[Main Processing According to Seventeenth Embodiment]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process of the effect control device 300 according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The main processing according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 36), but FIG.
As shown in, after the effect button input process (B0010), touch sensor input process (B560).
0) and the touch game process (B5601) are executed, and then the process proceeds to the hall/player setting mode process (B0011). The touch game is a game played by the touch sensor 530 detecting an operation of the player.

[Touch sensor input processing]
The details of the touch sensor input process (B5600) in the main process (FIG. 169) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the touch sensor input process according to the seventeenth embodiment.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not there is an input to touch sensor 530 (B5601). Production control device 300, if there is no input to the touch sensor 530 (
When the result of B5601 is “N”), the touch sensor input process ends.

On the other hand, if there is an input to the touch sensor 530, the effect control device 300 (B5
If the result of 601 is "Y"), the process advances to step B5602 to determine whether or not the touch game period is in progress (B5602). In the touch game period, for example, a period in which the player's handle operation is unnecessary, that is, a period in which the player's handle operation is relatively difficult to perform, such as when waiting for customers or when starting memory is held up to the upper limit, is set. Is set. The predetermined period during the reach in the variable display game may be set as the touch game period. When the effect control device 300 determines that it is during the touch game period (the result of B5602 is “Y”).
), the touch sensor input process ends.

When the effect control device 300 determines that it is not in the touch game period (result of B5602 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B5603 and it is determined whether the identification information is changing (changing special figure). A determination is made (B5603). For example, it is determined that the command is changing from the time the variable system command (B1206) is received until the symbol stop command (B1329) is received. When effect control device 300 determines that the identification information is not changing (result of B5603 is “N”), touch sensor input process ends.

When it is determined that the identification information is changing (result of B5603 is “Y”), effect control device 300 proceeds to the process of step B5604 and executes a predictive effect process (B5604).
.. The predictive effect process is a process for executing a predictive effect of predicting and informing the content of a predetermined effect in advance, and functions as a predictive effect executing means. The prediction effect is executed in response to the input to the touch sensor 530. After that, the affection degree notification production process (B5
605) is executed, and then it is determined whether or not there is an effect that overlaps with the previously set effect (effect set in the variable effect setting process) (B5606). The effect control device 300 ends the touch sensor input process when there is no effect that overlaps with the previously set effect (the result of B5606 is “N”).

If there is an effect that overlaps with the previously set effect (B560).
6 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B5607, the prediction effect or the affection degree notification effect that overlaps with the previously set effect is stopped (B5607), and then the effect control device 300 performs the touch sensor input process. To finish.

[Prediction production processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 171 and 172, the touch sensor input processing described above (FIG. 170)
The details of the predictive effect process (B5604) in step S6 will be described. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the predictive effect processing according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the latter half of the predictive effect processing.

By the predictive effect process, predictive effects such as one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, change content notification effect, and continuation suggestion notification effect will be executed. The variation content notification effect and the continuation suggestion notification effect predict and inform the content of the effect associated with the special figure variation display game being executed, and may be referred to as a first predictive effect. The one-shot notification effect, the pending content notification effect, and the SP reach content notification effect predict the content of the effect that appears in at least one of the plurality of variable display games based on the determination result (prefetch result) of the pre-determination means. This is a notification and may be referred to as a second prediction effect.

For example, in the first predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) sets the notice effect and the variable effect set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 182 described later) at the start of the change in the variable display game being executed. Based on the information (including the effect execution timing), these predetermined effects (preliminary effect, variable effect) to be executed in the variable display game being executed are predicted and notified before execution. For example, in the second predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) is executed in the variable display game based on the information of the predictive effect set in the predictive variation system command processing (FIG. 181 described later). A predetermined effect (prefetch effect) is predicted and notified.

First, production control device 300 determines whether or not there is a one-shot notification flag (B5701).
). The one-time notification flag is a flag set in the process of step B5709 described later.
Production control device 300, if there is a one-time notification flag (the result of B5701 is “Y”),
The processing moves to step B5711.

If there is no one-off notification flag (the result of B5701 is “N”), the effect control device 3
00 performs branch determination based on the degree of affection (operation value) (B5702), and executes one-notice lottery according to the value of degree of affection (B5703 to B5707). The affection degree is a value that is increased or decreased by the affection degree notification effect process (FIG. 173) described later, and is calculated by the effect control unit 300 as a value that changes in response to the touch sensor 530 detecting an operation by the player. The degree of affection is displayed as an integer of 0 to 100%, for example. The degree of affection may be displayed in a range other than 0 to 100%, or may be displayed in a number other than an integer. In this way, the production control means 30
0 functions as a friendship degree calculation unit (operation value calculation unit) that calculates a degree of love (operation value).

Production control device 300, if the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, one-shot announcement lottery for 0-20% (B5703), if it is 21-40%, one-shot announcement lottery for 21-40%. (B5704
) In the case of 41-60%, one-shot announcement lottery for 41-60% (B5705), 61-8
In the case of 0%, the one-shot announcement lottery for 61-80% is carried out (B5706), and in the case of 81-100%, the one-shot announcement lottery for 81-100% is carried out (B5707). The details of the winning rate a% (execution rate) of the one-time announcement lottery according to each degree of affection will be described later with reference to FIG. 174A(a). After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the player has won the one-shot notification lottery, that is, whether or not there is one-shot notification (B5708).

If there is one notification (the result of B5708 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the one-effect notification effect informing that there is a hold that is a big hit and sets the one-event notification flag. (B5709). After that, the effect control device 300 ends the predictive effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no notification (the result of B5708 is “N”), the effect control device 300
Shifts the processing to step B5711, and determines whether or not there is a pending content notification flag (
B5711). Production control device 300, if there is a pending content notification flag (B5711
Result of "Y"), the process moves to step B5721.

If there is no hold content notification flag (the result of B5711 is “N”), the effect control device 300 makes a branch determination based on the degree of affection (operation value) (B5712), and the hold according to the value of the degree of affection. A content notification lottery is executed (B5713 to B5717).

Production control device 300, if the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, hold content notification lottery for 0-20% (B5713), if it is 21 to 40%, hold content notification lottery for 21-40%. (B
5714) In the case of 41% to 60%, the held content notification lottery for 41-60% is selected (B5715).
), in the case of 61 to 80%, hold content notification lottery for 61-80% (B5716), 81
In the case of ˜100%, the held content notification lottery for 81-100% is performed (B5717). 174A(b) of FIG. 174A(b) for details of the winning rate b% (execution rate) of the held content notification lottery according to each degree of affection
Will be described later. After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the holding content notification lottery has been won, that is, whether or not there is a holding content notification (B5718).

When there is a notice of the pending content (the result of B5718 is “Y”), the effect control device 300
The hold content notification effect for notifying the hold content is executed and the hold content notification flag is set (B5719). After that, the effect control device 300 ends the predictive effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no notice of the pending content (the result of B5718 is “N”), the effect control device 3
In step 00, the process proceeds to step B5721, and it is determined whether or not there is an SP reach content notification flag (B5721). Production control device 300, if there is an SP reach content notification flag (the result of B5721 is “Y”), shifts the processing to step B5731.

In addition, production control device 300, if there is no SP reach content notification flag (B5721)
Result is “N”), branch determination is performed based on the degree of affection (operation value) (B5722), and SP reach content notification lottery is executed according to the value of degree of affection (B5723 to B5727).

Production control device 300, SP reach content announcement lottery for 0-20% when the degree of affection is 0-20% (B5723), 21-40% SP reach content for 21-40%. Notification lottery (B5724), 41-60% SP reach content announcement lottery for 41-60% (B5725), 61-80% SP reach content announcement lottery for 61-80% (B5726), in the case of 81 to 100%, SP reach content notification lottery for 81-100% is carried out (B5727). Winning rate of SP reach content announcement lottery according to each degree of affection c% (
Details of the execution ratio) will be described later with reference to FIG. 174A(c). After that, the performance control device 30
0 determines whether or not the player has won the SP reach content notification lottery, that is, whether or not there is the SP reach content notification (B5728).

When there is the SP reach content notification (the result of B5728 is “Y”), the effect control device 30
0 executes the SP reach content notification effect for notifying the content of the SP reach and sets the SP reach content notification flag (B5729). After that, the effect control device 300 ends the predictive effect process.

On the other hand, if there is no SP reach content notification (result of B5728 is “N”), production control device 300 moves the process to step B5731, and determines whether there is a variation content notification flag (B5731). ). Production control device 300, if there is a variation content notification flag (
When the result of B5731 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step B5741 (Fig. 172).

Moreover, if there is no variation content notification flag (result of B5731 is “N”), effect control device 300 performs branch determination based on the degree of affection (operation value) (B5732), and changes according to the value of degree of affection. A content notification lottery is executed (B5733 to B5737).

Production control device 300, when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, the variation content notification lottery for 0-20% (B5733), in the case of 21 to 40%, the variation content notification lottery for 21-40%. (B
5734), in the case of 41% to 60%, a variation content announcement lottery for 41-60% (B5735)
), in the case of 61 to 80%, a fluctuation content announcement lottery for 61-80% (B5736), 81
In the case of -100%, the variation content announcement lottery for 81-100% is carried out (B5737). 174B(a) in FIG. 174B(a) for details of the winning rate d% (execution rate) of the variation content announcement lottery according to each degree of affection
Will be described later. After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the variation content notification lottery is won, that is, whether or not there is a variation content notification (B5738).

When there is a change content notification (the result of B5738 is “Y”), the effect control device 300
A variation content notification effect for notifying the content of the special figure variation display game currently being executed is executed and a variation content notification flag is set (B5739). After that, the effect control device 300 ends the predictive effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no change content notification (the result of B5738 is “N”), the effect control device 3
00 shifts the processing to step B5741 (FIG. 172), and determines whether or not there is a continuation suggestion notification flag (B5741). When the continuation suggestion notification flag is present (result of B5741 is “Y”), effect control device 300 moves the process to step B5751.

When there is no continuation suggestion notification flag (result of B5741 is “N”), effect control device 300 performs branch determination based on the degree of affection (operation value) (B5742) and continues according to the value of degree of affection. The suggestion notification lottery is executed (B5743 to B5747).

Production control device 300, if the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, a continuous suggestion announcement lottery for 0-20% (B5743), if it is 21 to 40%, a continuous suggestion announcement lottery for 21-40%. (B
5744) In the case of 41-60%, continuation suggestion announcement lottery for 41-60% (B5745)
), in the case of 61 to 80%, continuation suggestion announcement lottery for 61-80% (B5746), 81
In the case of -100%, the continuation suggestion notification lottery for 81-100% is carried out (B5747). The details of the winning rate e% (execution rate) of the continuation suggestion notification lottery according to each degree of affection are shown in FIG. 174B(b).
Will be described later. After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the continuation suggestion notification lottery has been won, that is, whether or not there is a continuation suggestion notification (B5748).

When there is a continuation suggestion notification (the result of B5748 is “Y”), the effect control device 300
The continuation suggestion notification effect for notifying the continuation of the change of the special figure change display game currently being executed is executed and the continuation suggestion notification flag is set (B5749). After that, the production control device 300,
The prediction effect process ends.

On the other hand, when there is no continuation suggestion notification (the result of B5748 is “N”), the effect control device 3
In the case of 00, the processing shifts to step B5751 and it is determined whether or not there is a setting suggestion notification flag (B5751). Production control device 300, if there is a setting suggestion notification flag (B57
If the result of 51 is “Y”), the process moves to step B5762.

Further, if there is no setting suggestion notification flag (result of B5751 is “N”), effect control device 300 performs branch determination based on the degree of affection (operation value) (B5752), and sets according to the value of degree of affection. The suggestion announcement lottery is executed (B5753 to B5757).

Rendering control device 300, if the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, setting suggestion announcement lottery for 0-20% (B5743), if it is 21-40%, setting suggestion announcement lottery for 21-40%. (B
5744) in the case of 41-60%, the setting suggestion announcement lottery for 41-60% (B5745)
), in the case of 61 to 80%, a setting suggestion notification lottery for 61-80% (B5746), 81
In the case of ˜100%, a setting suggestion notification lottery for 81-100% is carried out (B5747). The details of the winning rate f% (execution rate) of the setting suggestion notification lottery according to each degree of affection are shown in FIG. 174B(c).
Will be described later. After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the setting suggestion notification lottery has been won, that is, whether or not there is a setting suggestion notification (B5758).

When there is a setting suggestion notification (the result of B5758 is “Y”), the effect control device 300
The setting suggestion notification effect for suggesting the setting (setting value) is executed and the setting suggestion notification flag is set (B5759). After that, the effect control device 300 ends the predictive effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no setting suggestion notification (the result of B5758 is “N”), the effect control device 3
00 shifts the processing to step B5762, and performs branch determination based on the degree of affection (operation value) (
(B5762), a dialogue lottery corresponding to the value of the degree of affection is executed (B5763 to B5767).

Production control device 300, if the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, a 0-20% dialogue lottery (
(B5763) In the case of 21-40%, a 21-40% dialogue lottery (B5764),
In the case of 41 to 60%, the dialogue lottery for 41-60% (B5765), in the case of 61-80%, the dialogue lottery for 61-80% (B5766), in the case of 81-100% 81
A dialogue lottery for -100% is carried out (B5767). Details of the winning rate g% (execution rate) of the dialogue lottery according to each degree of affection will be described later with reference to FIG. 175. After that, the performance control device 30
0 determines whether or not the player wins in the dialogue lottery, that is, whether or not there is a dialogue (B5768).
.. In the present embodiment, the winning rate g% is set so as to always win one of the lines, so it is always determined that there is a line (the result of B5768 is “Y”). ..

If there is a dialogue (the result of B5768 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the dialogue effect such as displaying the dialogue or outputting a voice (B5769). After that, the effect control device 300 ends the predictive effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no dialogue (the result of B5768 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the predictive effect process as it is.

[Dearness notification production processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the details of the affection degree notification effect process (B5605) in the above-described touch sensor input process (FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the affectionate degree notification effect process according to the seventeenth embodiment.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether the degree of affection is less than 100% (B59).
01).

When the degree of affection is less than 100%, that is, when the degree of affection is 0 to 99% (the result of B5901 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 shifts the processing to step B5902, and the game condition (
Branch determination is performed based on the set values (settings 1 to 6) related to the game (B5902), and a friendship increase value lottery corresponding to the set value is executed (B5903 to B5908). The set value is changed by the operator operating the set key switch 93 or the set value change switch 102 in the setting change mode (setting change state) as described above.

When the set value is the setting 1, the effect control device 300 selects the friendliness increase value lottery for the setting 1 (B
5903), in the case of setting 2, the affectionate degree increase value lottery for setting 2 (B5904), in the case of setting 3, the affectionate degree increase value lottery for setting 3 (B5905), in the case of setting 4 4 affection degree increase value lottery (B5906), in the case of setting 5, affection degree increase value lottery for setting 5 (B
5907), in the case of setting 6, the affinity increase value lottery for setting 6 is performed (B5908). The intimacy degree increase value is a value used to increase the intimacy degree in the process of step B5909. The details of the win rate h% (execution rate) of the affection degree increase value lottery according to each set value will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

After that, the effect control device 300 calculates a new degree of affection by adding the degree of affection increase value won in the degree of affection increase value lottery to the current degree of affection (B5909), and in a mode that the player can recognize. After notifying the new degree of affection (B5911), the affection degree notification effect process ends. The calculated degree of affection is stored in the storage unit such as the RAM 322. Examples of modes that can be recognized by the player include a mode of displaying on the display screen of the display device 41, a mode of displaying on a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) that can be confirmed by the player, and a mode of notifying by voice. To be

On the other hand, when the degree of affection is not less than 100%, that is, when the degree of affection reaches the upper limit of 100% (result of B5901 is “N”), the effect control device 300 shifts the processing to step 5910. The falling lottery is executed (B5910). The falling lottery is a lottery for reducing the degree of affection to 50% when the winning is won, and the winning percentage is set to 1% (1/100), for example. After that, the production control device 300 notifies the degree of affection in a manner that the player can recognize (B59
11), the affection degree notification effect process ends. Therefore, when the player wins the falling lottery, the player can confirm the reduced degree of affection. In addition, you may perform the effect of notifying the player that the winning of the falling lottery has been won.

It should be noted that each time there is a touch sensor input without performing the friendship increase value lottery, a predetermined value (for example, 1%
It is also possible to increase the degree of affection.

[Winning rate of each lottery in the prediction production process]
Next, referring to FIG. 174A, FIG. 174B and FIG. 175, one-shot announcement lottery, predictive content announcement lottery, SP reach content announcement lottery, fluctuation content announcement lottery, continuation suggestion announcement lottery, setting suggestion announcement lottery The details of the winning rate (execution rate) of the dialogue lottery will be described.
FIG. 174A is a diagram exemplifying the winning rates of the one-time announcement lottery, the held content notification lottery, and the SP reach content notification lottery according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 174B shows the variation according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of content announcement lottery, continuation suggestion notice lottery, and setting suggestion notice lottery for each affection degree. In addition, FIG. 175 is a diagram exemplifying the winning rate of the line drawing according to the seventeenth embodiment with respect to each affection degree.

[Winning rate of one-shot announcement lottery]
First, with reference to FIG. 174A(a), the winning rate a% of the one-shot notification lottery will be described.
In the one-off notification lottery, for example, when there is a big hit (special result mode) in the stored hold (starting memory) as a winning condition, it is possible to win with one notification and notify the big hit. You will be able to make announcements. If the winning conditions for winning are not met or if the one-shot announcement lottery is not won, no one-shot notification (the result of B5708 is "N") and one-shot notification is not given. The one-shot notification (one-shot notification effect) can be performed by displaying on the display device 41, outputting a sound from a speaker, or operating or emitting light from a character accessory such as the board decoration device 46 or the board effect device 44.

At that time, the winning rate a% of the one-shot announcement lottery changes according to the degree of affection after satisfying the winning conditions. The winning rate a% with one notification is, for example, 30% when the degree of affection is 0-20%,
40% when the degree of affection is 21-40%, 50% when the degree of affection is 41-60%
When the degree of affection is 61 to 80%, it is 60%, and when the degree of affection is 81% to 100%, it is 70%. In addition, depending on the value of the degree of affection, the winning rate a% is set to 100% so that the one-off notification that satisfies the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate a% is set to 0 so as not to be notified.
It may be%.

[Winning rate of held content announcement lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174A(b), the winning percentage b% of the held content notification lottery will be described. In the hold content notification lottery, when the winning condition of each hold content notification (holding content notifications 1 to 5) is satisfied, it is possible to win the holding content notification that satisfies the winning condition. In addition, notice 1
In the case where a plurality of held content notifications among 5 to 5 are repeatedly won, only the held content notification having the largest number (for example, the held content notification 5) is notified from among the plurality of held content notifications that have been won. When the winning condition is not satisfied or when the winning selection is not made in the holding content notification lottery, the holding content notification is not given (the result of B5718 is “N”), and the holding content notification is not performed.

In the hold content notification lottery, for example, as a winning condition, when there is a difference between the color (mode) of the current hold display and the color (mode) of the final hold display in the hold of the target of the prefetch effect (preliminary change notice) You will be able to win, and you will be able to inform you that "Attention to hold". The current hold display is the current hold display. The final hold display is a final hold display when the hold display changes stepwise from the initial state when the hold occurs in the hold change notice. The color of the hold display can be changed, for example, from white with a low expectation level to blue, green, red, gold, or a rainbow with a high expectation degree according to the expectation degree of the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition to the case where there is a difference in color between the current hold display and the final hold display, similar hold content notification may be performed if there is a difference in the hold display mode such as the shape or the pattern. Also, for example, when the currently held display is less than green (for example, white) and the final held display is green or more, it is possible to win the held content notification 2 and notify "Good holding", and the currently held display is red. When it is less than (for example, blue) and the final hold display is red, it is possible to win the hold content notification 3 and to notify "red hold?". Furthermore, for example, when the current hold display is less than gold (eg, green) and the final hold display is gold, it becomes possible to win the hold content notification 4, and it is possible to notify that “Is it on gold”? Eg white)
Then, when the final hold display is a rainbow, it is possible to win the hold content notification 5, and it becomes possible to inform the user of "Is the heat on hold?"

At that time, the winning rate b% of the held content notification lottery changes according to the degree of affection after satisfying the winning condition. The winning rate b% of the notice 1 of pending contents is, for example, 20% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 30% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 40% when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%. When the degree of affection is 61-80%, it becomes 50%, and the degree of affection is 81%-100
When it is %, it becomes 60%.

Further, the winning rate b% of the notice 2 of pending contents is, for example, 30% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%.
When the degree of intimacy is 21-40%, it is 40%, when the degree of intimacy is 41-60%, it is 50%, when it is 61-80%, it is 60%, and the degree of intimacy is 81%-10.
When it is 0%, it becomes 70%.

The winning rate b% of the notice 3 of pending contents is, for example, 40% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 50% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 60 when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%.
%, 70% when the degree of affection is 61-80%, and 80% when the degree of affection is 81%-100%.

The winning rate b% of the notice 4 of pending content is, for example, 50% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 60% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 70 when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%.
%, 80% when the degree of affection is 61-80%, and 90% when the degree of affection is 81%-100%.

The winning rate b% of the notice 5 of pending contents is, for example, 60% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 70% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 80 when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%.
%, 90% when the degree of affection is 61-80%, and 99% when the degree of affection is 81%-100%. Depending on the value of the degree of affection, the winning rate b% may be set to 100% so that notification of the held content satisfying the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate b% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified.

As a procedure of the held content notification lottery, when the winning condition of the held content notification 1 is satisfied, the lottery of the held content notification 1 is performed, and when the winning condition of the held content notification 2 is satisfied, the held content notification 2 is performed.
If the winning condition of the held content notice 3 is satisfied, the lottery of the held content notice 3 is drawn, and if the winning condition of the held content notice 4 is satisfied, the lottery of the held content notice 4 is held Announcement 5
When the winning condition of No. 5 is satisfied, the lottery of the notice 5 of held contents is changed to the winning rate b of FIG. 174A(b).
Execute in sequence based on %. Therefore, the lottery may be performed a plurality of times, and as described above, a plurality of pending content notifications may be repeatedly won.

[SP Reach Content Notification Lottery Win Rate]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174A(c), the winning rate c% of the SP reach content notification lottery will be described. In the SP reach content notification lottery, as in the case of the hold content notification lottery described above, when the win condition of each SP reach content notification (SP reach content notification 1 to 3) is satisfied, the SP reach content notification that satisfies the win condition You will be able to win. When multiple SP reach content notifications among SP reach content notifications 1 to 3 are repeatedly won, the SP reach content notification having the largest number among the plurality of SP reach content notifications that have been won (for example, SP reach content notification). Only 3) is reported. If the winning conditions are not satisfied or if the SP reach content announcement lottery is not won, the SP reach content announcement is not made (the result of B5728 is “N”), and the SP reach content announcement is not performed.

In the SP reach content notification lottery, for example, as a winning condition, the character 7 described later with reference to FIG. 176.
If the hold that is the reach (for example, SP1 reach) in which 25a (Torarou) appears is in the stored hold (starting memory), SP reach content notification 1 can be won and "My turn!" You will be able to inform. In addition, for example, if the hold that is the reach (for example, SP2 reach) in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears is within the stored hold, S
You can win the P-reach content notification 2, and you can be notified as "Beauty!" Further, for example, when the hold that is the reach (for example, SP3 reach) in which the character 725c (girl) appears is within the stored hold, it is possible to win the SP reach content notification 3 and notify "Rice ball!" Like

At that time, the winning rate of SP reach content announcement lottery c% depending on the degree of affection after satisfying the winning conditions
Changes. The win rate c% of SP reach content notification 1 is, for example, 40% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 50% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and the degree of affection is 41 to 60.
When it is %, it is 60%, when it is 61-80%, it is 70%, and it is 8
When it is 1% to 100%, it becomes 80%.

Further, the winning rate c% of the SP reach content notification 2 is, for example, 50% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 60% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and the degree of affection is 41 to 60%. Sometimes it is 70%, when it is 61-80%, it is 80%, and it is 81%.
When it is -100%, it becomes 90%.

The win rate c% of SP reach content notification 3 is, for example, 60% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%.
When the degree of intimacy is 21-40%, it is 70%, when the degree of intimacy is 41-60%, it is 80%, when it is 61-80%, it is 90%, and the degree of intimacy is 81%-10.
When it is 0%, it becomes 99%. Depending on the value of the degree of affection, the winning rate c% may be set to 100% so that the SP reach content notification satisfying the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate c% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified. ..

[Winning rate of change content announcement lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174B(a), the winning percentage d% of the variation content notification lottery will be described. Similar to the held content notification lottery described above, in the variation content notification lottery, if the winning conditions of each variation content notification (variation content notification 1 to 3) are satisfied, it is possible to win the variation content notification that satisfies the winning condition Becomes In addition, when a plurality of fluctuation content notifications among the fluctuation content notifications 1 to 3 are won in succession, only the fluctuation content notification with the largest number (for example, fluctuation content notification 3) is notified of the selected fluctuation content notifications. To be done. When the winning condition is not satisfied or when the variation content announcement lottery is not won, the variation content is not announced (the result of B5738 is “N”) and the variation content is not announced.

In the variation content notification lottery, for example, as a winning condition, it is possible to win the variation content notification 1 when a production of reach or higher (reach production of expectation degree of normal reach or higher) occurs in the currently displayed variable display game. Will be able to inform you. Further, for example, when a reach effect having an expectation level of SP1 reach or higher occurs in the currently displayed variable display game, it is possible to win the variable content notification 2 and notify "chance!" Further, for example, when an effect of SP3 reach occurs in the currently displayed variable display game, it is possible to win the variation content notification 3 and to notify "Extreme heat reach!"

At that time, the winning rate d% of the variation content announcement lottery changes according to the degree of affection after satisfying the winning condition. The winning rate d% of the variation content notification 1 is, for example, 40% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 50% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 60% when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%. When the degree of affection is 61-80%, it becomes 70%, and the degree of affection is 81%-100
When it is %, it becomes 80%.

Further, the winning rate d% of the variation content notification 2 is, for example, 50% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%.
When the degree of affection is 21-40%, it is 60%, when the degree of affection is 41-60%, it is 70%, when it is 61-80%, it is 80%, and the degree of affection is 81%-10.
When it is 0%, it becomes 90%.

The winning rate d% of the variation content notification 3 is, for example, 60% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 70% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 80 when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%.
%, 90% when the degree of affection is 61-80%, and 99% when the degree of affection is 81%-100%. Depending on the value of the degree of affection, the winning rate d% may be set to 100% so that the variation content notification satisfying the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate d% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified.

[Winning rate for continuation suggestion announcement lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174B(b), the winning rate e% of the continuation suggestion notification lottery will be described. In the continuation suggestion notification lottery, as in the case of the above held content notice lottery, if the success condition of each continuation suggestion notification (continuation suggestion notification 1 or 2) is satisfied, you can win the continuation suggestion notification that satisfies the win condition. Becomes In addition, when both of the continuation suggestion notifications 1 and 2 are won, only the continuation suggestion notification 2 having a large number is notified. If the winning condition is not satisfied or if the continuous suggestion notification lottery is not won, no continuous suggestion notification is given (the result of B5748 is "N"), and the continuous suggestion notification is not made.

The continuation suggestion notification lottery can be won as the continuation suggestion notification 1 when, for example, as a winning condition, a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo rendition) occurs in the variable display game that is currently being executed, or when an effect exceeding the reach occurs. Will you continue!?" Further, for example, when the pseudo continuous effect is generated in the currently displayed variable display game, it is possible to win the continuation suggestion notification 2, and it is possible to inform the user to "prepare for continuation".

At that time, the winning rate e% of the continuous suggestion announcement lottery changes depending on the degree of affection after satisfying the winning condition. The winning rate e% of the continuation suggestion notification 1 is, for example, 1% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 20% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 4 when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%.
0%, 60% when the degree of affection is 61-80%, 81%-100% of the degree of affection
In case of, it becomes 80%.

Further, the winning rate e% of the continuation suggestion notification 2 is, for example, 20% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%.
When the degree of intimacy is 21 to 40%, it is 50%, when the degree of intimacy is 41 to 60%, it is 70%, when it is 61 to 80%, it is 90%, and the degree of intimacy is 81% to 10
When it is 0%, it becomes 99%. Depending on the value of the degree of affection, the winning rate e% may be set to 100% so that the continuation suggestion notification satisfying the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate e% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified.

[Winning rate for setting suggestion notification lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174B(c), the winning rate f% of the setting suggestion notification lottery will be described. In the setting suggestion notification lottery, when the winning conditions of each setting suggestion notification (setting suggestion notification 1 to 3) are satisfied, it is possible to win the setting suggestion notification that satisfies the winning condition in the same manner as the hold content notification lottery described above. Becomes In addition, when a plurality of setting suggestion notifications among the setting suggestion notifications 1 to 3 are won in succession, only the setting suggestion notification having the largest number (e.g., fluctuation content notification 3) is notified from among the plurality of winning setting suggestion notifications. To be done.

In the setting suggestion notification lottery, for example, when the setting value is set to 3 or more as the winning condition, it is possible to win the setting suggestion notification 1 and to notify "it feels good!" Further, for example, when the set value is set to 5 or more, it is possible to win the setting suggestion notification 2, and it is possible to notify that "the condition is good!" Furthermore, for example, when the set value is set to a value other than the setting 1, that is, the settings 2 to 6, it is possible to win the setting suggestion notification 3 and to notify "It's not a bad day!"

At that time, the winning rate f% of the setting suggestion notification lottery changes according to the degree of affection after satisfying the winning condition. The winning rate f% of the setting suggestion notification 1 is, for example, 0.00 when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%.
1%, when the degree of affection is 21-40%, it becomes 0.010%, and the degree of affection is 41-60
When it is %, it is 0.020%, when it is 61-80%, it is 0.050%, and when it is 81%-100%, it is 0.100%. Also, setting suggestion notification 2, 3
The winning rate f% of the same also changes according to the degree of affection, like the winning rate f% of the setting suggestion notification 1. In addition,
Depending on the value of the degree of affection, the winning rate f% will be kept so that notification of fluctuation content that meets the winning conditions will not be announced.
May be 0%.

[Winning rate of the line drawing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the winning percentage g% of the dialogue lottery for drawing the dialogue of the dialogue effect will be described. In the dialogue lottery, when the winning conditions for each of the dialogues (lines 1 to 5) are satisfied, it is possible to win the dialogue satisfying the winning condition. In the present embodiment, the winning condition is always (in other words, there is no winning condition). In the dialogue lottery, each dialogue (
The range of random number values is distributed (assigned) to the lines 1 to 5), and when the random number value extracted during the line drawing matches the range, the line corresponding to the matched range is selected. It In addition, a dialogue lottery is performed so that one of the dialogues (1 to 5) is surely won. That is, unlike the above-mentioned holding content notification lottery, etc., only one lottery is carried out in the dialogue lottery, and a plurality of dialogues are not won.

In the dialogue lottery, for example, if you win the dialogue 1, you will be notified that you will do your best, if you win the dialogue 2, you will be notified that you are supporting you, and if you win the dialogue 3, you will be told that it has become fun. .. Also, for example, if the player wins the line 4, "I will do my best together" is informed, and if the line 5 is won, "I am attached" is informed.

At that time, the winning rate g% of the dialogue lottery, that is, the distribution of the random number values 1 to 100 changes according to the degree of affection. The win rate g% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20% is, for example, 70% for the dialogue 1 (random value 1-70), 20% for the dialogue 2 (random number 71-90), and 1 for the dialogue 3.
It becomes 0% (random number value 91-100). In addition, the winning percentage g% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20% is
It becomes 0% with words 4 and 5 (no random value distribution).

In addition, the win rate g% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40% is, for example, 35% for serif 1 (random value 1-35), 45% for serif 2 (random value 36-80), and serif 3 15%
(Random number value 81-95), and 5% at serif 4 (random number value 96-100). In addition, the winning rate g% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40% is 0% at the line 5 (no allocation of random number values).

When the degree of affection is 41 to 60%, the winning rate g% is, for example, 20% for the dialogue 1 (random value 1-20), 25% for the dialogue 2 (random value 21-45), and 35 for the dialogue 3. % (Random value 46-80), 15% for serif 4 (random value 81-95), 5% for serif 5
(Random value 96-100).

The win rate g% when the degree of affection is 61 to 80% is, for example, 5% for the dialogue 1 (random value 1-5), 10% for the dialogue 2 (random value 6-15), and 25 for the dialogue 3. % (Random number value 16-40), 35% for serif 4 (random value 41-75), and 25% for serif 5 (random value 76-100).

The win rate g% when the degree of affection is 81 to 100% is, for example, 5% for the dialogue 1 (random value 1-5), 10% for the dialogue 2 (random value 6-15), and 15 for the dialogue 3. % (Random number value 16-30), 20% at serif 4 (random value 31-50), and 50% at serif 5 (random value 51-100).

The degree of intimacy is in any range (0 to 20%, 21 to 40%, 41 to 60%, 61 to 80)
%, 81-100%), be sure to use one line in a single lottery using a random number 1-100.
Random numbers are assigned to each line so that one of ~5 is won. Therefore, as mentioned above, when the dialogue lottery is conducted, there is no case where there is no dialogue (the result of B5768 is always "
Y”).

It should be noted that the above-mentioned notice of holding contents, notice of SP reach contents, notice of fluctuation contents, notice of continuation suggestion, notice of setting suggestion, dialogue effect (serif notification) can be executed by display on the display device 41 or voice output from a speaker.

[Display screen of display device for SP reach 1 to 3]
Next, referring to FIG. 176, S won in the SP reach content notification lottery of FIG. 174A(c)
The effect that the character corresponding to the P-reach content notification appears during SP reach will be described. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when each character appears in the production of SP reach according to the seventeenth embodiment. Note that in FIG. 176, the display screen of the display device 41 and the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530 are also displayed.

First, FIG. 176(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the effect in which the character 725a (tiger Taro) appears is executed during SP1 reach. Since there is a hold that becomes the reach (eg SP1 reach) where Tora Taro appears, after being notified of SP reach content notification 1 and being notified as "My turn!", SP1 reach in the special map variable display game related to this hold Is started. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), a character 725a (tiger taro) that has appeared together with the characters "SP1 reach!!" is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Note that variable display games with reach (special figure variable display games, decorative special figure variable display games)
Since it is in the middle, the decoration first design A in the left area 610A and the decoration first design B in the right area 610B of the plurality of variable display areas 610 are temporarily stopped by displaying the identification information (design) of "3". , The decorative first pattern C in the middle area 610C is displayed in a variable display "↓". In addition, the reserved digestion area 640
In the (specific display portion, changing pending display area), a special figure changing pending display 643 (starting memory display, special drawing running pending display) corresponding to the variable display game being executed is displayed. Since the touch sensor 530 is changing the identification information (the result of B5603 is “Y”), the touch sensor 530 can detect the input in the prediction effect process (B5604) and the affection degree notification effect process (B5605).
Waiting for the player's operation. Further, the character effect unit 40f has a touch sensor 53.
When there is no input to 0, the light emitting member is turned off, and when there is an input, the light emitting member is turned on or blinks. The light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may be appropriately turned on or blinked in accordance with the effect of SP reach.

In addition, FIG. 176(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the effect in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears is executed during SP2 reach. After there is a hold that becomes a reach (for example, SP2 reach) where tiger beauty appears, after being notified of SP reach content notification 2 and being notified as "Tora beauty!", SP2 reach is displayed in the special map variable display game related to this hold. Be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 176(b), for example, “S
P2 reach! !! The character 725b (tiger beauty) that has appeared with the characters "" is displayed.

FIG. 176(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the effect in which the character 725c (girl) appears is executed during the SP3 reach. The SP3 reach is started in the special map variable display game related to this hold after winning the SP reach content notification 3 due to the fact that there is a hold on which the girl appears (eg SP3 reach) It Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 176(c), the display screen of the display device 41 displays “SP3
reach! !! A character 725c (girl) who has appeared with the characters "" is displayed.

It should be noted that the characters 725a to 725c may be made to appear in any of the SP1 to reach effects in order to diversify the effects without being associated with the reach effect systems (SP1 to reach), respectively. Characters such as “SP1 reach!!” on the display screen of the display device 41 may be hidden. Further, even when the SP reach content notification is not performed before the SP reach effect is executed, the effect in which the character appears during the SP reach may be appropriately executed. In addition, in the production at the time of SP reach after the SP reach content notification has been performed, a plurality of characters may be made to appear so as to include the character suggested to appear in the SP reach content notification.

[Winning rate of the affectionate degree increase value lottery in the affectionate degree notification production process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the win rate h of the affection degree increase value lottery in the affection degree notification effect process
The details of% (execution ratio) will be described. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating the win rate h% of the affectionate degree increase value lottery according to the seventeenth embodiment, with respect to each set value.

In the affectionate value increase lottery that draws the increase value of affectionateness, if the win condition of each affectionate increase value (1% increase, 3% increase, 5% increase, 10% increase) is satisfied, You will be able to win the increased degree of affection. In the present embodiment, the winning condition is always (in other words, there is no winning condition). Note that in the friendship increase value lottery, a range of random number values is assigned (assigned) to each friendship increase value, and if the random number value extracted during the friendship increase value lottery matches the range. , The friendship increase value corresponding to the matched range is selected.
Then, the selected affection degree increase value is added to the current affection degree. In addition, since the affection degree increase value lottery is performed, one of the affection degree increase values is surely won. That is, unlike the holding content notification lottery described above, only one lottery is performed in the affectionate degree increase value lottery, and a plurality of affectionate degree increase values are not won.

At that time, the win rate h% of the affection degree increase value lottery, that is, the distribution of the random number values 1-100 changes according to the set values (settings 1 to 6). When the set value is the setting 1, the win rate h% of the affection degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 47% (random number value 1-47), 3% increase is 28% (random number value 48-75. ) 5% increase to 18% (random value 76-93), 10% increase to 7
% (Random value 94-100).

In addition, the win rate h% of the affectionate increase value lottery when the set value is the setting 2 is, for example, 46% when the 1% increase (random number value 1-46) and 28% when the 3% increase (random number value 47 -74), 5%
The increase is 18% (random number value 75-92) and the 10% increase is 8% (random number value 93-10).
0).

The win rate h% of the affection degree increase value lottery when the setting value is setting 3 is, for example, 1% increase is 45%.
(Random number 1-45), 3% increase is 29% (random number 46-74), 5% increase is 18% (random value 75-92), 10% increase is 8% (random value 93-100).

When the set value is 4, the win rate h% of the affection degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 44%.
(Random number 1-44), 3% increase is 29% (random value 45-73), 5% increase is 19% (random value 74-92), 10% increase is 8% (random value 93-100).

When the set value is the setting 5, the win rate h% of the affection degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 43%.
Is (random number 1-43), 3% rise is 29% (random number 44-72), 5% rise is 19% (random number 73-91), 10% rise is 9% (random number value 92-100).

When the set value is 6, the win rate h% of the affection degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase to 40%.
Is (random number value 1-40), 3% rise is 30% (random number value 41-70), 5% rise is 20% (random number value 71-90), 10% rise is 10% (random number value 91-100)
.. Note that, in FIG. 177, all the affection degree increase values are positive values, but the affection degree increase/decrease values may be set such that there are 0 and negative values. The absolute value of the negative value is the friendliness reduction value.

[Design command processing according to the 17th embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, details of the symbol-based command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The symbol system command processing according to the 17th embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 42),
As shown in FIG. 178, after the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved (B1802), it is determined whether or not the symbol type is a normal jackpot symbol (B1803).
If the symbol type is a normal big hit symbol (the result of B1803 is “Y”), processing for clearing the degree of intimacy (degree of intimacy=0%) is performed (B1804).

On the other hand, when the symbol type is not a normal jackpot symbol, that is, a deviant symbol or a probability variation jackpot symbol (the result of B1803 is "N"), the process of B1804 is not performed (without clearing the degree of intimacy). , And ends the symbol-based command processing.

Therefore, the degree of intimacy is not usually cleared until a big hit appears. Even in the case of the normal big hit pattern, if the time-shortening state occurs after the normal big hit, the degree of affection may be cleared when the time-saving state ends.

[Single-shot system command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 179, details of the single-shot system command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart of the single-shot system command processing procedure according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The one-shot command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 39),
As shown in FIG. 179, after the game state flag is set to the normal state after all the symbols are stopped (B1332), the variation content notification flag, the continuation suggestion notification flag and the setting suggestion notification flag are cleared as the first predetermined flag. Processing is performed (B1333). The change content notification flag,
The continuation suggestion notification flag and the setting suggestion notification flag are collectively referred to as a first predetermined flag. That is, while the variable display game is being executed once (single hold), the variation content notification effect is set to set the variation content notification flag as the first predetermined flag (B5739), and the continuation suggestion notification effect is performed. Thus, the continuation suggestion notification flag is set as the first predetermined flag (B
5749), the setting suggestion notification flag is set as the first predetermined flag by performing the setting suggestion notification effect (B5759). Then, the first predetermined flag is cleared every time the symbol is stopped at the end of one variable display game.

Further, when the change content notification flag, the continuation suggestion notification flag, and the setting suggestion notification flag are set as the first predetermined flag, the result of B5731 in FIG. 171 or B5741 or B5751 in FIG. Contents announcement lottery, continuation suggestion announcement lottery, setting suggestion announcement lottery will not be performed. That is, once the variation content notification lottery, the continuation suggestion notification lottery, or the setting suggestion notification is executed once in the one variable display game, the executed notification is not executed thereafter in this one variable display game. As a result, when the touch sensor 530 detects the operation of the player a plurality of times in the variable display game within the single hold and the notification lottery is performed a plurality of times, the notification of the same type is duplicated. It can be avoided.

[Example of screen transition when notification lottery is performed multiple times in a variable display game within a single hold]
FIG. 180 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the seventeenth embodiment, and the screen of the entire game when the announcement lottery is performed a plurality of times in the variable display game within the single hold. It is an example of a transition. In addition to the display screen of the display device 41, the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530 are also displayed.

FIG. 180C shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is started. In the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the left area 610 of the plurality of variable display areas 610 is displayed.
The first decorative symbol A is displayed in A, the first decorative symbol B is displayed in the right region 610B, and the first decorative symbol C is displayed in the middle region 610C in an enlarged manner. Has been done. Further, in the hold exhaustion area 640, a special figure changing pending display 643 corresponding to the changing display game to be started is displayed.

180 (one) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. In the plurality of variable display areas 610, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable display "↓↓↓". The degree of affection is 88% internally, but it is not displayed on the display screen.

180 (e) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects a player's operation during execution of the variable display game. When the touch sensor 530 is touched during the change (the result of B5601 or B5603 in FIG. 170 is “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection degree notification effect process are executed (B5604, B5605).

Then, in the variation content notification lottery of the predictive effect process, by winning the variation content notification 3 in which the winning condition is SP3 reach occurrence, as shown in (e) of FIG. The user is informed and the character 724 "Extreme heat reach!" is also displayed on the display screen. Further, when the touch sensor 530 detects the operation of the player, the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f also emits light. Since the change content notification is a notification of the reach production system (reach type), the change content notification lottery may be executed only before the reach occurrence or the SP reach development.

It should be noted that the upper speaker 19a provided in the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15 relatively close to the character effect unit 40f so that the player feels as if the character depicted in the character effect unit 40f is speaking (Fig. The output of 1) may be made larger than the output of other speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b of the upper right corner portion). Further, a speaker may be provided in the character effect unit 40f so that the character effect unit 40f can directly notify the sound.

In addition, in the affection degree increase value lottery in the affection degree notification production process, if a 1% increase is won, the affection degree increase value (1% increase) is added to the current affection degree (88%), and a new affection degree (89 %=8
8%+1%) is calculated. The new degree of affection is displayed as a degree of affection display 726 on the upper left side of the display screen.

180 (and) shows the display device 41 when the SP3 reach state is set in the variable display game.
Is a display screen of. It should be noted that the normal reach may be developed into the SP3 reach state.
The decoration first design A in the left area 610A and the decoration first design B in the right area 610B of the plurality of variable display areas 610 are temporarily stopped by displaying the identification information (design) of "3", respectively, and the middle area 6
The decorative first pattern C of 10C is displayed in a variable display "↓". "SP3 reach!!
Character is displayed.

180A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects an operation of the player during the SP3 reach state in the variable display game. By touching the touch sensor 530 during the SP3 reach state (the results of B5601 and B5603 in FIG. 170 are "
Y”), the prediction effect processing and the affectionate degree notification effect processing are executed (B5604, B5605).
..

Then, by winning the line 5 in the line drawing of the predictive effect process,
As indicated by 0 (na), the voice "I am here" is notified by voice, the character 724 "I am here" is also displayed on the display screen, and the light-emitting member of the character effect unit 40f is displayed. It emits light. In addition, if a 5% increase is won in the affection degree increase value lottery in the affection degree notification production process, a new affection degree calculated from the current affection degree (89%) and the affection degree increase value (5% increase) ( 94%=89%+5%) is displayed as the degree of affection display 726 in the upper left part of the display screen.

In addition, when there is a predetermined effect by the SP3 reach, the SP3 is more than the notification effect by the predictive effect process or the affection degree notification effect process (the voice of the dialogue 5, the character 724, the display 726, etc.).
You may give priority to a predetermined production by reach.

The subsequent () of FIG. 180 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the result of the variable display game is the special result mode (big hit, specific result mode). A plurality of variable display areas 610 (
In the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C), the decorative first symbols A to C are "3.
The numbers "3, 3" are aligned, and a big hit is displayed on the display screen (characters such as "big hit!!").

[Read-ahead variable system command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a look-ahead variable system command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the readahead variable system command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The look-ahead variable system command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 41), but as shown in FIG. 181, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect that occurs (holding change notice) is an effect that immediately starts. The processing after the determination whether or not (B1715) is different from that of the first embodiment.

When the production control device 300 of the seventeenth embodiment determines that the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary change notice) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (result of B1715 is “Y”), the selected pre-reading effect (for example, , The display corresponding to the continuous notice effect (including the chance eye look-ahead effect), the look-ahead zone effect, and the look-ahead notice effect (holding change notice) is set (B1716). That is, the display corresponding to the notice of the change in the hold when the hold occurs (prefetch notice effect) is set. Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “N”), the display corresponding to the pre-reading effect during the holding shift is set and saved. (B1717). That is, the display of the notice of the change of the hold (prefetch notice effect) at the time of the hold shift is set and saved, and the information of the gradual change of the hold (color change, shape change, etc.) is saved. Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

[Single-shot system command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation effect setting process according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The variation effect setting process according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 44 ), but as shown in FIG. 182, after the lottery (B2006) of the notice (first half notice) that appears during the first half change. The process, the process after the lottery (B2009) of the notice that appears during the second half change (the second notice), and the process after the display setting of the notice effect (B2014) are different from those of the first embodiment. In the variation effect setting process, the notice effect and the variation effect and their effect execution timings are set as in the first embodiment (FIG. 44).

After the lottery (B2006) of the notice that appears during the first half change (the first half notice), the effect control device 300 of the seventeenth embodiment performs the change lottery of the first half notice according to the degree of affection (B2006a). In the change lottery of the first half notice, the effect control device 300, for example, if the degree of affection is a predetermined value or more, B200
The lottery for changing to the production having a higher expectation than the production selected in 6 is performed. Therefore, for example, when the degree of intimacy is a predetermined value or more, the probability (appearance rate) of the production with high expectation can be increased.

Further, after the lottery (B2009) of the notice that appears during the latter half change (B2009), the effect control device 300 performs the change lottery of the second notice according to the degree of affection (B2009a). In the change lottery of the second half notice, the effect control device 300 performs, for example, a lottery in which the affection degree is equal to or higher than a predetermined value and the effect degree is changed to a high expectation effect. Therefore, for example, when the degree of affection is a predetermined value or more, it is possible to increase the probability (appearance rate) of occurrence of an effect having a higher degree of expectation than the effect selected in B2009.

After the display setting of the notice effect (B2014), the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type, and reads the setting information and the like regarding the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift (B2015a). The setting information and the like regarding the notice of the change of the hold at the time of the hold shift is shown in FIG.
This is the information saved in the processing of B1717. It should be noted that the notice of holding change at the time of the holding shift is not limited to the mode executed when the holding display 633 (holding, starting memory) moves to the next one, and the holding display 633 shifts to the special figure changing holding display 643. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which it is executed at that time.

After the process of B2015a, the effect control device 300 sets the one-shot notification flag, the hold content notification flag, and the SP reach content notification flag to the second when the variation related to the target hold of the prefetch effect (hold change change notice, etc.) is started. It is cleared as a predetermined flag (B2015b). In addition, the one-time notification flag, the hold content notification flag, and the SP reach content notification flag are collectively referred to as a second predetermined flag (
Predictive effect execution completed flag). That is, the set one-shot notification flag, the held content notification flag, and the SP reach content notification flag are maintained as the second predetermined flag over the plurality of variable display games until the variation related to the target hold of the prefetch effect is started. .. Then, the second predetermined flag is cleared by starting the variation related to the hold of the target of the prefetching effect. The second predetermined flag may be cleared when the variation related to the pre-reading effect target suspension is completed. In addition, the second predetermined flag may be cleared when all of the holdings existing at the time of execution of the second prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, or SP reach content notification effect) are exhausted. In addition, in the one-shot notification effect, the held content notification effect, or the SP reach content notification effect, the corresponding second predetermined flag (one-shot notification flag, hold content notification flag, or SP reach content notification flag) is cleared. Until it is done, it cannot be executed.

[Screen transition example when notification lottery is performed multiple times in a variable display game over multiple holds]
183 and 184 are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the seventeenth embodiment, and the variable display game is played a plurality of times based on a plurality of stored starting memories. It is an example of a screen transition of the entire game when played. In addition to the display screen of the display device 41, the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530 are also displayed.

(N) in FIG. 183 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. On the display screen of the display device 41, the decorative first pattern A to which the variable display “↓↓↓” is displayed.
C is displayed in a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B middle area 610C). Further, the special figure changing pending display 643 corresponding to the variable display game being executed is displayed in the holding exhausting area 640, and three holding displays are displayed in the holding display section 630. Note that in the description of FIGS. 183 and 184, the third hold display is referred to as a hold display 633a. Note that the hold display 633a is a white hold display, but is a hold display in which the color changes to a red hold display due to the prefetching notice effect (hold change change notice), as will be described later in (184) of FIG. It is a hold display with a difference between the display and the final hold display. Also, the hold display 63
In the special figure variation display game based on 3a, SP reach 2 as will be described later with reference to FIG.
Is performed, and an effect in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears is performed.

(N) in FIG. 183 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the hold is increased during the execution of the variable display game. As the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), FIG.
As shown in (3) of 3, the hold display 633b is displayed as the fourth hold display. Therefore, the hold display unit 630 displays four hold displays including the hold displays 633a and 633b.

183 of FIG. 183 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects a player's operation during execution of the variable display game. When the touch sensor 530 is touched during the change (the result of B5601 or B5603 in FIG. 170 is “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection degree notification effect are executed (B5604, B5605).

Then, in the held content notification lottery of the predictive effect process, the held content notification 3 is won when the winning condition is that the currently held display is less than red (for example, white) and the final held display is red. As a result, as shown in (no) of FIG. 183, a voice notification “Is red on hold?” is displayed, a character 724 “Red on hold?” is displayed on the display screen, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f is turned on. It emits light. In addition, in the affectionate degree increase value lottery in the affectionate degree notification production process, if a 1% increase is won, the new affectionate degree (8%) is added to the current affectionate degree value (88%).
(9%=88%+1%) is displayed as the degree of affection display 726 on the upper left side of the display screen.

After that, in () of FIG. 183, when the variable display game becomes the stop result mode, the plurality of variable display areas 610 (the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C) are decorated with the first decorative symbols A to C. "8, 4, 3" is displayed as a stop symbol. The special figure changing pending display 643 of the pending digestion area 640 is hidden (digested state) when the variation display game ends.

(H) in FIG. 183 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next variable display game is being executed. While the hold display 633 moves to the left one by one (hold shift), the special figure changing hold display 643 is displayed in the holding exhausting area 640, and the decoration first symbols A to C change in the plurality of change display areas 610. The display will be “↓↓↓”.

Further, by touching the touch sensor 530 during the change (B5601 and B5601 in FIG. 170).
If the result of 5603 is “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection degree notification effect are executed (B5604,
B5605). Then, in the SP reach content notification lottery of the predictive effect processing, by winning the SP reach content notification 2 in which the winning condition is that the reach (for example, SP2 reach) in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears appears, As shown in (H) of FIG. 183, “Tora beauty!” is notified by voice, the character 724 “Tora beauty!” is displayed on the display screen, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f emits light.

In addition, in the affection degree increase value lottery of the affection degree notification effect process, by winning 1% increase,
The new degree of affection (90%=89%+1%) to which the degree of increase in affection (1% increase) is added is displayed as the degree of affection display 726 on the display screen. In the predictive effect process, since the pending content notification has already been made regarding the pending content of the pending display 633a that is the target of the pending change notice (() in FIG. 183), the pending content notification lottery is not performed.

In (F) of FIG. 183 thereafter, when the variable display game becomes the stop result mode, the decoration first symbols A to C are displayed in the plurality of variable display areas 610 (the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C). 6, 5, 1” is displayed as a stop pattern. The special figure changing pending display 643 of the pending digestion area 640 is hidden (digested state) when the variation display game ends.

184 () shows the display device 41 when the next variable display game is being executed.
Is a display screen of. While the hold display 633 is further moved to the left one by one (hold shift), the special figure changing hold display 643 is displayed in the holding exhausting area 640, and the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the plurality of changing display areas 610. The fluctuation display is "↓↓↓".

Then, the look-ahead notice 633a in which the color changes from the white hold display to the red hold display (displayed in black) is performed (preliminary change notice), and the characters "read ahead ~!" are displayed on the display screen. .. Two reservation displays 633a and 633b are displayed on the reservation display unit 630, and the reservation display 633b is maintained in a white reservation display state.

In (ho) of FIG. 184 thereafter, when the variable display game is in the stop result mode, the decoration first symbols A to C are displayed in the stop symbols deviating from “2, 5, 3” in the plurality of variable display areas 610. It When the variable display game ends, the special figure changing pending display 643 in the holding digesting area 640 is hidden (digested state).

Then, in (a) of FIG. 184, the hold display 633a shifts to a hold, and the hold exhaustion area 64 is displayed.
When the variable display pending display 643 of red suspension is displayed at 0 and the variable display game is started at 0, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed "↓↓↓" in the plurality of variable display areas 610. .. Further, only one hold display 633b is displayed on the hold display unit 630.

Further, by touching the touch sensor 530 during the change (B5601 and B5601 in FIG. 170).
If the result of 5603 is “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection degree notification effect process are executed (B560).
4, B5605). Then, in the variation content announcement lottery of the prediction effect process, the winning condition is SP
By winning the variation content notification 2 in which one or more reach has occurred, as shown in (c) of FIG. 184, “Chance!” is announced by voice, and the characters “Chance!” 724 are displayed on the display screen. Is displayed, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f emits light. Also, in the affection degree increase value lottery of the affection degree notification production process, a new affection degree (95%=90%+5%) to which the affection degree increase value (5% increase) is added by winning 5% increase Is displayed on the display screen as a degree of friendship display 726. In the prediction effect process, since the pending content notification and the SP reach content notification have been made when the red pending special figure changing pending display 643 is the pending display 633a, the pending content notification lottery and the SP reach content. There will be no announcement lottery.

184() of FIG. 184 thereafter is the display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects the operation of the player after the variable display game is in the SP2 reach state. SP2
By touching the touch sensor 530 during the reach state (B5601 and B5 in FIG. 170).
The result of 603 is “Y”), and the prediction effect process and the affection degree notification effect process are executed (B560).
4, B5605).

Then, by winning the line 5 in the line drawing of the predictive effect process,
As shown in (4) of FIG. 4, the voice and the character 724 notify that "I'm on" and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f emits light. Further, by winning 3% increase in the affection degree increase value lottery in the affection degree notification production process, a new affection degree (98%=95%+3%) is displayed on the affection degree display 726 on the display screen. In the predictive effect process, since the notification has already been made when the special figure changing pending display 643 or the pending display 633a of red pending is displayed, the holding content notification lottery, the SP reach content notification lottery, and the fluctuation content notification There will be no lottery.

Further, as shown in (M) in FIG. 184, when the touch sensor 530 detects again the operation of the player when the variable display game is in the SP2 reach state, the prediction effect processing and the friendship degree notification effect processing are executed again. (B5604, B5605). Further, on the display screen of the display device 41, the SP reach 2 is performed, so that an effect in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears is performed.

Then, by winning the dialogue lottery 2 in the predictive effect process, as shown in (m) of FIG. 184, the voice and the characters 724 inform the player that "I'm supporting you", and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f. Emits light. By winning the 1% increase in the affection degree increase value lottery in the affection degree notification production process, a new affection degree (99%=98%+1%) is displayed in the affection degree display 726 on the display screen. In the prediction effect process, as described above, the holding content notification lottery, the SP reach content notification lottery, and the variable content notification lottery are not performed, but the serif lottery is performed again even if the announcement has been made. In this way, even if the notification has been given, the touch sensor 530 detects the operation of the player, and the dialogue lottery is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to give some response to the operation of the player, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

After that, in FIG. 184 (me), when the variable display game is in the stop result mode, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed as the stop symbols deviating from “3, 6, 3” in the plurality of variable display areas 610. .. The special figure changing pending display 643 of the pending digestion area 640 is hidden (digested state) when the variation display game ends. Then, the red pending special figure changing pending display 643 is exhausted and hidden, and the second predetermined flag (holding content notification flag, SP reach content notification flag) is cleared. The first predetermined flag (variation content notification flag) is cleared each time one variation display game is in the stop result mode. Therefore, with respect to the hold after the hold display 633a, the hold content notification lottery, the SP reach content notification lottery, and the variable content notification lottery are performed. In addition,
The second predetermined flag is not the time when the variable display game is finished and the red pending special figure changing pending display 643 is exhausted and disappears, but the variable displaying game based on the red holding special figure changing pending display 643. It may be cleared when is started.

In addition, the second predetermined flag may be maintained until after the special figure changing pending display 643 of red pending is hidden. In this case, the hold display 633b displayed by winning before winning the hold content notification lottery in () of FIG. 183, that is, before the first second predetermined flag (hold content notification flag) is set. The second reservation flag is cleared by the fact that the reservation is changed to the special figure changing pending display 643 and is consumed and hidden. In addition, the special display of red suspension pending display 64
The second predetermined flag may be cleared after the hold that has been won before the variable display game based on 3 is started and is hidden.

Further, when there is a predetermined effect such as SP reach, notification effect (voice or character 724, display 726, etc.) by the predictive effect process or the affection degree notification effect process, or pre-reading notice effect (hold change notice)
Instead of this, a predetermined effect by the SP reach or the like may be preferentially executed.

[Modification of the seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 185 and FIG. 186, a gaming machine 10 according to a modified example of the seventeenth embodiment will be described.

[Production button input processing according to modified example of seventeenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 185, effect button input processing according to a modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect button input processing according to the modification of the seventeenth embodiment. The effect button input processing according to the modified example of the seventeenth embodiment is the seventeenth embodiment.
Similar to the touch sensor input process (FIG. 170) of the embodiment, but as shown in FIG.
Instead of the processing (B5601) for determining whether or not there is an input from the touch sensor, B6101
The process of B6103 is performed, and the process of B6104 is performed before ending the effect button input process.

In this modification, the touch sensor input process (FIG. 170) is described as not executed, but the touch sensor input process may be executed. When the touch sensor input process is executed, the prediction effect process and the affection degree notification effect process can be executed based on either operation detection by the effect button switch 25a or operation detection by the touch sensor 530.

The effect control device 300 according to the modified example of the seventeenth embodiment determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 25 (operation means) is in a valid button operation period (operation detectable period) (B61).
01). As described above, in the modification of the seventeenth embodiment, not the touch sensor 530 but the effect button 25 is used to detect the operation of the player. If the button operation is not valid (B
If the result of 6101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 shifts the processing to B6104.

On the other hand, when it is the button operation valid period (result of B6101 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the detection of the button operation to be valid (B6102). In order for the player to recognize that the button operation is in the effective button operation period, the light emitting member arranged at a position (in the effect button 25 or in the vicinity thereof) corresponding to the effect button 25 (operation means) is caused to emit light. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 186, the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may be turned on during the operation valid period. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board during the button operation effective period in a modification of the seventeenth embodiment. The light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may have a higher brightness than the lighting intensity during the operation valid period or may be blinked when a button operation is detected, for example. Further, when the button operation is detected, the lighting color of the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may be changed.

The button operation may be detected not only when the effect button switch 25a of the effect button 25 is pressed, but also when the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25 is touch-operated. Good. Further, the touch sensor 530 of the seventeenth embodiment described above may be provided, and the operation of the player may be detected by either the touch sensor 530 or the effect button switch 25a. In this case, as described above, the touch sensor 53
No matter whether 0 or the effect button switch 25a is detected, the predictive effect process and the affectionate degree notification effect process are executed, and the types of operation effects are diversified.

Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a button operation (B6103). When it is determined that there is no button operation (the result of B6103 is “N”), the effect control device 30
For 0, the processing shifts to B6104. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a button operation (
The result of B6103 is “N”), and the effect control device 300 shifts the processing to B5602.

Moreover, the production control device 300 sets the detection of the button operation to be invalid before ending the production button input processing (B6104). Therefore, the button operation can be detected during the operation valid period from the processing of B6102 to the processing period of B6104.

[Second Modification of Seventeenth Embodiment]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 187 to FIG. 189, a gaming machine 10 according to a second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment will be described.

[Game board according to second modified example of seventeenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 187, a game board 30 according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment.

In the game board 30 according to the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment, the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530a (530) are provided on the upper left portion of the center case 40 as in the seventeenth embodiment.
And are provided. Furthermore, in the game board 30 according to the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment, a character effect unit 40g and a touch sensor 530b are provided in the upper right portion of the center case 40. A character effect unit 40h and a touch sensor 530c are provided on the upper part of the center case 40, and a character effect unit 40i is provided on the lower part of the center case 40.
And a touch sensor 530d. Thus, the game board 30 according to the second modification of the seventeenth embodiment has four character effect units (character effect units 40f, 40).
g, 40h, 40i) and four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 53).
0c, 530d) are provided in a substantially cross shape around the center case 40, respectively. Four
Each of the two touch sensors is an infrared sensor that detects an object to be detected in a predetermined detection range, but a touch panel provided on the cover glass 14 (transparent member) of the glass frame 15 can be used instead.

[Touch Game Processing According to Second Modification of Seventeenth Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, a touch game process according to the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing a procedure of touch game processing according to the second modification of the seventeenth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 according to the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment first determines whether or not it is during the touch game period (B6301). In the touch game period, for example, a period during which the player does not easily operate the operation handle 24 such as when waiting for customers or when the starting memory is held up to the upper limit is set. The predetermined period during the reach in the variable display game may be set as the touch game period. When the effect control device 300 determines that it is not during the touch game period (result of B6301 is “N”), the touch game process is ended.

When it is determined that the touch game period is in progress (result of B6301 is “Y”), effect control device 300 proceeds to the process of step B6302 and determines whether the touch pattern has been set (B6302). .. The touch pattern includes four touch sensors (touch sensor 5
The order in which 30a, 530b, 530c, 530d can detect the operation of the player (that is,
It is the order of the effective detection period). If the touch pattern has not been set (result of B6302 is “N”), effect control device 300 proceeds to the process of step B6303 and sets the touch pattern (B6303). The touch pattern may be set so that any one of the four touch sensors can simultaneously detect the operation of the player (double touch pattern).

Next, the effect control device 300 first sets the detection effective period of the touch sensor that can detect the operation of the player based on the touch pattern (for example, 2 sec), and causes the corresponding light emitting member to emit light. For example, when the touch sensor 530b in the upper right part of the center case 40 can detect the operation of the player for the first time, the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40g corresponding to the touch sensor 530b emits light over the effective detection period. After that, the production control device 300
Ends the touch game process.

On the other hand, in the case where the touch pattern has been set, effect control device 300 (B630
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B6305, and it is determined whether there is an input from any one of the four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 530c, 530d) (B6305). Rendering control device 300 ends the touch game process when there is no input from the touch sensor (result of B6305 is “N”), and when there is input from the touch sensor (result of B6305 is “Y”). )), the process advances to step B6306, and it is determined whether or not the detection valid period of the input touch sensor is in progress (B6306).
..

Rendering control device 300, if it is not during the detection effective period of the touch sensor that has been input (
If the result of B6306 is "N"), the process advances to step B6307, and the number of miss-touches is incremented by 1 as the number of miss-touches (B6307), and then the process advances to step B6308. Production control device 300, when it is during the detection effective period of the touch sensor that has been input (
The result of B6306 is “Y”), the process proceeds to B6308, and it is determined whether the touch sensor input is the last touch sensor input in the set touch pattern (B630).
8).

Rendering control device 300, when it is determined that it is not the last touch sensor input (B63
If the result of 08 is "N"), the process advances to step B6309, the effective detection period of the next touch sensor is set based on the touch pattern, and the corresponding light emitting member is caused to emit light (B6309).
, The touch game processing ends.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that it is the last touch sensor input (the result of B6308 is “Y”), it determines whether the number of miss touches is 0 (B63).
10). Note that it may be determined whether or not the number of miss-touches is less than or equal to a predetermined number. When the number of mistouches is 0, that is, when there is no mistouch (the result of B6310 is “Y”).
), and sets or executes a special effect (B6311). The effect control device 300 can execute, as a special effect, an effect that cannot be confirmed during a normal game, such as an effect that celebrates the fact that there is no mistouch in the touch game. When the special effect is set, the special effect can be executed not immediately but at a later desired timing. Then, effect control device 300 ends the touch game process.

[Game board during the touch game period according to the second modification of the seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the game board 30 during the touch game period according to the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 189 is a front view of the game board 30 during the touch game period in the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment.

For example, when the touch sensor 530c on the upper part of the center case 40 is in the detection valid period, the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40h on the upper part of the center case 40 corresponding to the touch sensor 530c is shown by hatching in FIG. 189. To emit light. Then, during the detection valid period, the player touches the portion of the cover glass 14 facing the character effect unit 40h, whereby the touch sensor 530c can detect the operation of the player (B6305). In addition, when the player touches the character effect units 40f, 40g, 40i other than the character effect unit 40h during the detection valid period, that is, the touch sensors 530a, 530b, 530d other than the touch sensor 530c are operated by the player. When it is detected, it is determined as a miss touch and the number of miss touches is updated by +1 (B6307).
).

In addition, the production control device 300 uses four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a and 530b).
530c, 530d), the touch game process can be similarly performed not only when the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 is touch-operated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, when the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40h above the center case 40 is emitting light, the upper side (back side) of the touch panel 25b is touch-operated, The effect control device 300 can proceed the touch game processing in the same manner as when the touch sensor 530c detects the operation of the player.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays the operation guide first image 725 and the operation guide second image on the display screen of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 189, according to the touch sensor in the detection effective period.
The image 726 can be displayed.

The operation guide first image 725 is an image displayed on the edge of the display screen of the display device 41 corresponding to the position of the touch sensor in the detection valid period. For example, as the operation guidance first image, one side of the end portion of the display screen can be switched to a predetermined color, or a character that guides the operation can be displayed. For example, when the touch sensor 530c on the upper part of the center case 40 is in the detection effective period, the operation guide first image 725 is displayed on one side of the upper end portion of the display screen as shown by the diagonal lines in FIG. 189.

The operation guidance second image 726 shows four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a, 530b,
This is displayed when the cross key provided on the upper plate unit or the like is used instead of (530c, 530d). The operation guidance second image 726 is an image that is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, for example, in the shape of a cross key, and emphasizes the key corresponding to the position of the cross key in the detection valid period. For example, if the upper (back) side of the cross key is in the detection valid period,
As shown in black in FIG. 189, the operation guide second image 726 on the display screen is displayed with the upper (back side) key highlighted.

Note that, for example, when the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f in the upper left portion of the center case 40 emits light and the touch sensor 530a is in the detection effective period, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed on one side of the left end portion. The operation guidance first image 725 may be displayed, or the operation guidance first image 725 may be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Further, the detection valid period may be selectable by the player in advance before waiting for a customer or before starting a touch game. In this way, by allowing the player to select the detection effective period, the difficulty level of the touch game can be changed according to the age, ability, etc. of the player, so that various players can enjoy the touch game. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, the detection valid period selected by the player may be stored. In this way, by storing the detection effective period selected by the player, it is possible to obtain statistical information such as the age group of the player who plays the game on the gaming machine 10, and the statistical information concerned with the hall event, product development, etc. Can be utilized.

[Operation/Effect of Seventeenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment has a predetermined variation display game (special figure variation display game) that variably displays identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol). The production control means (production control device 300) capable of executing the production is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes an operation detection unit (touch sensor 530) capable of detecting the operation of the player. The effect control means calculates the operation value (degree of affection) as a value that changes in response to the operation detection means detecting the operation of the player, and the operation detection means detects the operation of the player. In this case, a predictive effect execution that can predict and inform the content of a predetermined effect (one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect, continuation suggestion notification effect) It works as a means. The prediction effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect according to the operation value.

For example, in the predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) uses the information of the predictive effect and the variable effect set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 182) at the start of the change of the variable display game being executed. Based on or based on the information of the pre-reading effect set in the pre-reading variable system command processing (FIG. 181), these predetermined effects (preliminary effect, fluctuation effect, pre-reading effect) executed in the variable display game are predicted. And inform you. Here, the notice production is a notice in the first half before the reach or a notice in the latter half after the reach (during the reach). The variation effect is a reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like. The prefetching effect is a notice of a pending change or the like.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when predicting the content of a predetermined effect in accordance with the operation of the player, the execution ratio of the predictive effect changes according to the operation value, so that the player enjoys the operation. It is possible to experience it and improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, while the predictive effect is executed according to the operation of the player, the predetermined effect of the variable display game is performed even when the player does not operate, so that even the player who does not operate the variable display game You can enjoy the original production of the game itself and improve the fun of the game. Furthermore, in addition to the operation value (degree of affection) increasing according to the number of touches, the execution ratio of the predictive effect changes according to the operation value, and for example, the appearance ratio of hot effects can be increased. Therefore, it is possible for the player to feel the significance of the operation, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a plurality of light emitting members capable of emitting light (light emitting members of the character effect units 40f, 40g, 40h, 40i). A plurality of operation detecting means (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 530c, 530d) are arranged in the gaming machine. The plurality of light emitting members are located at positions corresponding to the respective operation detecting means (the upper left portion, the upper right portion of the center case 40,
Upper and lower). When at least one of a plurality of arranged operation detecting means can detect the operation of the player (during the effective detection period), the effect control means emits a light emitting member corresponding to the detectable operation detecting means. Let According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, various effects can be executed by the operation detecting means and the light emitting members provided, and a touch game effect in which the player can participate can also be executed. The interest can be improved. Also, since the player can use both hands of the player at the timing when he/she does not operate the handle to hit the game ball, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player is just watching the video, and to enjoy the game. Can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a plurality of operation detecting means (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 530c, 530d) arranged to operate the player in a predetermined order. The control is performed so that it can be detected, and the special effect can be executed when a predetermined condition (the number of miss touches=0) is satisfied regarding the detection result of the operation. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, a special effect can be seen according to the result of the touch game in which the player participates, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment is capable of storing a start memory (a hold corresponding to the hold display 633) that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the start condition (the game control device 100 or Before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the effect control device 300 and the start storage means, the preliminary determination means (game control device 100) for determining the execution information of the variable display game regarding the start memory. Or an effect control device 300). The production control unit (production control device 300) executes, as a predetermined production, a look-ahead production (pre-reading notice production (preliminary change notice)) that notifies the determination result of the pre-determination unit, and a prediction production (before execution of the pre-reading production). One-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect, continuation suggestion notification effect) are executed. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, it is possible to perform various effects by combining the various effects by executing the predictive effect before executing the prefetching effect, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the predictive effect execution means (effect control device 300).
) Changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect, continuation suggestion notification effect) according to the operation value (degree of affection), and the prediction effect As at least one of a plurality of variable display games, a first prediction effect (variation content notification effect, continuation suggestion notification effect) for predicting and informing the content of a predetermined effect related to the variable display game being executed. A second predictive effect (one notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP) that predicts and notifies the content of the predetermined effect that appears based on the determination result of the advance determination means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300). Reach content notification production)) can be executed. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the prediction effect is the first which is completed within one change (single change display game).
Since the predictive effect and the second predictive effect that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations (variable display game) are included, the predictive effect in various modes can be performed as the effect related to the game, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

For example, in the first predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) has information about the notice effect and the variable effect set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 182) at the start of the change of the variable display game being executed ( Based on the effect execution timing), these predetermined effects (preliminary effect, variable effect) to be executed in the variable display game being executed are predicted and notified before execution. For example, second
In the predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) performs a predetermined effect (prefetch effect) executed in the variable display game based on the information of the prefetch effect set in the prefetching variable system command process (FIG. 181). ) Predict and inform.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the predictive effect executing means (effect control device 300) is
When the second prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect) is executed, the fact that the second predictive effect has been executed is set as a predictive effect execution flag (second predetermined flag). When the variable display game based on the starting memory (holding corresponding to the hold display 633a) that is stored and determined by the advance determination unit (production control device 300) as the target of the second prediction effect is executed, the above-mentioned stored The prediction effect executed flag is deleted. According to such a gaming machine 10, by prohibiting the second predictive effect when the predictive effect executed flag is present, it is possible to prevent the same second predictive effect from being repeatedly executed for the same starting memory. it can. Then, with respect to a certain starting memory, the content of the second predictive effect performed first and the content of the second predictive effect performed later do not overlap with each other, and a new predictive effect is always performed with respect to the starting memory. It will be. Therefore, the player can enjoy various effects, and can determine whether or not the variable display game based on the starting memory can be expected from a plurality of predictive effects without overlapping. The interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the predictive effect executing means (effect control device 300) is
When the second prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect) is executed, the fact that the second predictive effect has been executed is set as a predictive effect execution flag (second predetermined flag). The starting memory that is stored and stored when the second prediction effect is executed (hold display 6
When all the variable display games based on the starting memory up to 33b) are executed, the stored prediction effect executed flag is deleted. According to such a gaming machine 10, by prohibiting the second predictive effect when the predictive effect execution completed flag is present, a group of start memories (one or more stored when the second predictive effect is executed) It is possible to prevent the same second prediction effect from being repeatedly executed for the first group of starting memories). Then, the content of the second predictive effect that is performed first and the content of the second predictive effect that is performed later do not overlap with the starting memory that is stored when the second predictive effect is executed, A new predictive presentation is always performed for the starting memory. Therefore, the player can enjoy various effects, and can determine whether or not the variable display game based on the starting memory can be expected from a plurality of predictive effects without overlapping. The interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) predicts the content of the predetermined effect when the operation detection means (touch sensor 530) detects the operation of the player. It has a predictive effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predictive effect to notify (one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect, continuation suggestion notification effect). The predictive effect executing means executes a specific effect (serif effect) when the operation detecting means detects an operation by the player, even if the predictive effect is not executed. According to such a gaming machine 10, when the operation detection means detects the operation of the player, the prediction effect or the specific effect is always executed, so that the player can surely experience the enjoyment of operation. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, when the player operates, the prediction effect or the specific effect is always executed, so that when the operation detecting means or the like does not operate due to a problem, the problem can be promptly grasped.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes operation means (effect button 25) operable by the player, and a light emitting member (light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f) capable of emitting light. The effect control means (effect control device 300) calculates an operation value (degree of affection) as a value that changes in response to the operation device detecting an operation by the player.
00), and a predictive effect that predicts and informs the content of a predetermined effect when the operation means is operated by the player (one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect) , And a predictive effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a continuation suggestion notification effect). The prediction effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect according to the operation value. The effect control means causes the light emitting member to emit light when the operation of the operation means can be detected (button operation valid period). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the predicting effect can be executed by using the operating means used for other effects, it is not necessary to provide a new operating means and the gaming machine 10 can be manufactured inexpensively, and the operating means is also provided. When the operation can be detected, the light emitting member emits light so that the timing of the operation can be easily recognized, so that the player can experience the enjoyment of the operation and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, set values (settings 1 to 6) according to settings related to the game are set.
) Changeable means (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102),
And an operation detection unit (touch sensor 530) capable of detecting the operation of the player. The production control means (production control device 300) and an operation value calculation means (production control device 300) which calculates an operation value (degree of affection) as a value that changes in response to the operation detection device detecting the operation of the player. ,
Predictive effect that predicts and informs the content of a predetermined effect when the operation detecting means detects an operation of the player (one-shot notification effect, pending content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect, continuation Prediction effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing suggestion notification effect). The prediction effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect according to the operation value. The operation value calculation means calculates the operation value according to the set value. According to such a gaming machine 10, the operation value calculated according to the set value changes, and the execution ratio of the prediction effect changes according to the operation value, so that the player who wants to know the set value can make the prediction effect. You will be able to improve your interest in playing games.

[Eighteenth Embodiment]
The eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 194. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventeenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to seventeenth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

The eighteenth embodiment relates to a plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time as an effect and voice output for reading out the characters in the character display. Upper speaker 19a and/or lower speaker 19
b functions as sound output means capable of outputting (generating) sound.

[Variation effect setting process]
With reference to FIG. 190, the variation effect setting process according to the eighteenth embodiment (B1905 in FIG. 43).
Will be described in detail. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. In FIG. 190, the processes of steps B2014a and B2014b are added to the variation effect setting process of FIG. Note that FIG.
The same step number is given to the process having the same content as that, and the description thereof is appropriately omitted.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not there are a plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time (simultaneously) after performing the display setting of the variable effect (B2013) and the notice effect (B2014) (B).
2014a). Here, instead, it may be determined whether or not there are multiple types of character display.
When there are no plural characters displayed at the same time (result of B2014a is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2015 without doing anything. When there are a plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time (the result of B2014a is “Y”), the priority order of the plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time is determined according to whether or not a read-aloud voice is read aloud. Is set and the display time is adjusted (B2014b), and the process proceeds to step B2015.

FIG. 191 is a table showing a priority order of a plurality of character displays displayed at the same time. By setting the priority order, even if the display ranges of a plurality of character displays displayed at the same time overlap, it is possible to appropriately overlap and display. That is, the character display with the higher priority is displayed with priority on the front side (upper layer), and the character display with the lower priority is on the back side (upper layer).
Lower layer) is displayed with no priority.

〔Priority〕
As in FIG. 191, in the present embodiment, the character display without reading voice output (character display without reading) has a higher priority than the character display with reading voice output (character display with reading). Therefore, when the non-reading character display and the reading-out character display are overlapped and displayed, the non-reading-out character display is displayed on the front side with priority over the reading-out character display. Therefore, in the case of the non-reading-out character display, which is difficult for the player to recognize due to the absence of the reading-out voice output, the display without priority can be easily recognized by the player.

For example, as the non-reading character display, there are a pseudo continuous number, which is the number of times of pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous production, the number of steps executed in the step-up notice, and a speech announcement without reading. Further, for example, as the read-aloud character display, there is a character display “reach” that is displayed when a reach occurs, a character display “exciting heat” as a highly expected production, and a speech notice with reading. Both the non-reading character display and the reading-out character display notify the expectation of a big hit and become an effect related to the expectation.

It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation (single stop display) in which a decorative special symbol that is variably displayed is pseudo temporarily stopped (pseudo stop displayed) from the start to the end of one special figure variable display game. (Production, sub-production, sub-variation) is performed continuously for a predetermined number of times. In addition, at the time of the pseudo stop display, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed. The step-up notice means that a single effect (sub-effect) set in a plurality of steps is transferred to a predetermined step (step) from a lower step (step).
It is an effect that is sequentially executed up to (step). In this way, the pseudo continuous effect and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of consecutive single effects, and the larger the number of times, the greater the expectation of a big hit.

[Character display expectation (reliability)]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the expectation of a big hit in the non-reading character display and the reading-out character display, using the character display of the serif (character string) as an example. For example, in the line (character string),
There are words A, B, and C, and there is a case with no reading or a case with reading for each line. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of proportion, the selection rate (dividing ratio) of the speech without reading is higher than that of the speech with reading, and conversely, when the result of the special figure variation displaying game is a big hit. In addition, serifs with reading aloud are more selective than those without reading (dividing ratio)
Becomes higher.

Therefore, the character display of the serif with reading is higher than the character display of the serif without reading. Similarly, the expectations are as follows: Dialogue A< Dialogue B< Dialogue C
It becomes large in order. The expectation (reliability) of a big hit corresponds to the probability of a big hit when the notice (character display) appears, and is calculated by the selection rate of the notice in the case of a big hit and the selection rate of a notice in the case of a failure. it can.

In addition, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, as a production having a higher expectation than the dialogue C with reading aloud, a dialogue different from the dialogue displayed as the character display may be presented to surprise the player.

[Screen transition diagram]
193A and 193B are an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the eighteenth embodiment.

193A in FIG. 193A is a display screen when the decorative special figure variable display game is started. First
Hold display 633 in the first hold display portion 630a that displays the start-up memory as the first hold display.
(First hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold digestion area 6 in a rectangular frame
The hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves to 40. Second start memory is second
In the second hold display section 630b displayed as a hold display (second starting memory display),
The hold display 633 is not displayed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game started here, the pseudo continuous effect including the pseudo variation is executed a predetermined number of times (three times). The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations may be determined in step B2010 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 190), for example.

After that, in (S), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is as the identification information. ↓
) Is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol (first symbol A), the right symbol (decoration first symbol B), and the middle symbol (decoration first symbol C) are changed. doing. In addition, a pending change display 633 a indicating a hold (starting memory that was the right to execute the special figure change display game) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number. The indicated number “0” is displayed.

Then, in (S), the first pattern of the pseudo continuous effect (single effect) ends and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol that suggests the pseudo continuous effect. Is stopped. In addition, the text display 755 "Chance" with reading
However, the character 754 is displayed as if the dialogue was emitted from the character 754, and voice output is performed via the speaker (sound output means) in order to read out the letters “Chance” corresponding to the dialogue. At the same time, a character display 752 “pseudo twice” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo variation (pseudo consecutive times) to be started is displayed without reading voice output.

After that, in (S), the second pseudo fluctuation starts. Here, the character display 755 “chance” with reading is erased when the reading is completed, but the character display 752 “pseudo twice” without reading is maintained. That is, the character display 752 without reading is
It is displayed for a longer time (longer period) than the character display with reading 755 displayed at the same time. Therefore, the non-reading-out character display 752 is difficult for the player to recognize because there is no read-out voice output. However, by displaying for a long time, the player can easily recognize it. The read-aloud character display 755 may be erased before the reading is finished, or may be displayed and erased for a predetermined time after the reading is finished. Further, the display time of the character displays 752 and 755 displayed at the same time is adjusted in step B2014b of the variable effect setting process.

Exceptionally, when it takes a very long time to read the read-aloud character display 755, the read-aloud character display 755 may be displayed for a longer time than the non-read-aloud character display 752.

Next, in (SO), the non-reading character display “pseudo two times” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo fluctuation (the number of times of pseudo repetition) is erased. During the second pseudo-variation, the character display "Pseudo-2
“Times” may be displayed.

Then, in (T), the second variation ends and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol indicating the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed.
Further, the character display 755 “Great chance” of the read-out dialogue is displayed as if the dialogue is emitted from the character 754, and the voice output is read out in order corresponding to the dialogue as “Die-chance”. Is executed via the speaker. At the same time, a character display 752 “pseudo three times” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo variation (pseudo consecutive times) to be started is displayed without reading voice output.

Here, the character display with reading 755 "Great chance" and the character display without reading 75
Although 2 "pseudo 3 times" are displayed at the same time with overlapping display areas, the character display without reading 752 "pseudo 3 times" is larger than the character display with reading 755 "great chance". It is displayed preferentially on the front side (upper layer). The non-reading character display 752 “pseudo three times” is difficult for the player to recognize because there is no reading voice output, but by giving priority to the display, it can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, the character display 75 displayed at the same time
The priority order of 2,755 is set in step B2014b of the variable effect setting process.

Next, in (h), the third pseudo fluctuation starts. Here, character display with reading 7
55 “Large chance” is erased when the reading is finished, but the character display 752 “Reading three times” without reading is maintained. That is, the character display 752 without reading is
It is easier to be recognized by being displayed for a longer time (longer period) than the character display with reading 755 displayed at the same time.

Then, in (T), the non-speech character display “pseudo three times” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo fluctuation (the number of times of pseudo repetition) is erased. The character display “pseudo three times” may be always displayed during the third pseudo variation.

Next, in (TE), the reach state is reached, and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, since the pseudo continuous effect has ended, the pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed. Further, a character display 755 "reach" of the line with reading is displayed as if the line is being emitted from the character 754, and a voice output that reads out the characters of this line sequentially as "reach" is output by a speaker (sound output). Means). At the same time, a character display 753 “Ya-ta” without reading aloud, which indicates the expectation of the big hit, is displayed as if the character 754 made the line, and the voice of the character is read aloud. There is no output.

In addition, the character display 755 “Read” with reading is displayed as the character display 753 “without reading.
It may be emphasized so as to be conspicuous by making the size larger than "Yata-" or by using a color different from that of the character display 753 "Yata-" without reading. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which character display is being read aloud, which improves the interest of the game.

Then, in (g), the reach develops from the normal reach state to SP reach, and the movie effect (video effect) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left symbol and the right symbol are on the upper corner of the screen. Moving. Here, the character display 753 "Yayuta" without reading aloud is (TE)
The display has been maintained for a long time since. However, the read-aloud character display 755 "reach" is erased when reading is completed, and thereafter, the read-aloud character display 755 "intense heat" is displayed instead. Then, the voice output of reading out the characters of this line in order as "Gekiatsu" is executed through the speaker.

The character display 755 "reading aloud" with reading is erased when the reading is finished, but the character display 753 "reading" without reading is maintained or erased at the same time. In this manner, the character display 753 “Ya-ta” without reading is displayed for a longer period of time than the character display 755 with read-out “Reach” and “Extreme heat” displayed at the same time, which makes it easier to recognize. The display time of the character displays 753 and 755 displayed at the same time is adjusted in step B2014b of the variable effect setting process.

Exceptionally, when it takes a very long time to read the read-aloud character display 755, the read-aloud character display 755 may be displayed for a longer time than the non-read-aloud character display 753.

It should be noted that the character display with reading 755 "exciting heat" having an expectation level equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation level (for example, the expectation level of SP reach) is temporarily displayed at the same time when the character display 753 without reading is overlapped with the display area. Even when they are displayed in an overlapping manner, they may be displayed preferentially on the front side (upper layer) than the character display 753 without reading. Moreover, even if the character display 755 with reading aloud "intense heat" is displayed overlapping the character display 753 without reading and the display area at the same time, it is more expected than the character display without reading 753. If the degree is high, it may be preferentially displayed on the front side. If the expectation is higher than that of the character display 753, the character display 755 with a high degree of expectation is displayed in a larger size than the character display 753 or in a different color from the character display 753. Good.

After that, in (na), the special figure variation display game ends, and the jackpot stop symbols “3, 3, 3
Is displayed in the variable display area 615.

Subsequently, in (d), the big hit round game is started, and the big hit state (special game state) is started, and the big hit round effect is started.

[Screen transition diagram (modified example)]
FIG. 194 is a modification of the screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the eighteenth embodiment. (C) and (c) of FIG. 194 are the same as (c) and (c) of FIG. 193A.

In (F) of FIG. 194, the effect of the first step (step 1) of the three-step step-up notice starts during the decorative special figure variation display game. At the same time, the current step (
The no-speech character display 756 indicating “step” is displayed as “step 1”. In this modification, the step-up notice (step-up effect) is a window step-up notice, and, for example, a different image (character or the like) is displayed for each step in the window (frame) set in the center of the display screen. It is something.

No text is read for the “No reading” character display 756 “Step 1”.
In response to the number of executions (the number of steps) of the step-up notice of “step 1” “1”, the sound effect “cuin” is output from the speaker only once. In this way, the number of times the step-up notice is executed can be notified to the player with less discomfort depending on the number of sound effects. It should be noted that if the number of times the step-up notice is executed is read aloud as it is, the player may feel a great deal of discomfort.

In addition, in (F), two characters 754 and 757 are displayed, and a dialogue notice for conversation on the screen is executed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 192, the degree of expectation differs for each line.
The character display 758 of the text with reading aloud is displayed while the character 757 is displayed as if the relevant text was emitted, and the character display 7 of the text with reading aloud 7 is displayed.
55 "Perfect" is displayed as if the line was emitted from the character 754. Note that, here, the voice output of reading out the characters of the character display 758 in order as "Chow Sword" is executed via the speaker. In the character display 758 "How are you doing?", the symbol "?" that does not sound normally does not need to be read out.

In addition, the character display 758 “How are you doing?” that is currently read out is made larger in size than the character display 755 “Perfect” that is not currently read out, or a different color from the character display 755 that is not read out “Performance”. For example, it may be highlighted so as to stand out. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which character display is being read aloud at the present time, which improves the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that the unread text display 756 "Step 1" may be displayed for a longer period of time than the read text display 758 "How are you doing?" displayed at the same time to facilitate recognition.

Then, in (to), the effect of the second step (step 2) of the step-up notice (step-up effect) of 3 steps is started during the decorative special figure variation display game. At the same time, the non-speech character display 756 indicating the current step (stage) is displayed as “step 2”. No character is read out for the unread character display 756 “step 2”, but the sound effect “cuin” is associated with the number of executions (steps) “2” of the step-up notice of “step 2”. Is output from the speaker only twice.

In addition, in (to), a character display 75 with reading, which is a line from the character 754.
5 "Perfect" is read out through the speaker as "Zekkoucho", and voice output is executed. As a result, the character 75
The effect that 4 replies with a voice saying, "Gypsy butterfly" is realized.

In addition, the character display 755 "Perfect" read at the current time is larger than the character display 758 "How are you doing?" that is not read at the current time, or a color different from the character display 758 "How are you doing?" It may be highlighted so as to be conspicuous. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which character display is being read aloud at the present time, which improves the enjoyment of the game. The non-reading character display 756 "Step 2" is longer (longer period) than the character display 755 "Reading good" displayed at the same time.
It may be easily recognized by being displayed over.

After that, in (e), the effect of the third step (step 3) of the step-up notice (step-up effect) of 3 steps is started during the decorative special figure variation display game. At the same time, the non-speech character display 756 indicating the current step (stage) is displayed as "step 3". No character is read out for the unread text display 756 "step 3", but the sound effect "cuin" corresponds to the execution count (step number) "3" of the step-up notice of "step 3" Is output from the speaker only three times.

In addition, in (e), the character display 755 “Intense fever” with reading aloud is displayed as the character 7
The dialogue is displayed as if it is emitted from 54, and a voice output is performed through the speaker, reading out the characters in sequence in order of "Gekiatsu" corresponding to the dialogue.

Here, the character display with reading 755 "intense heat" and the character display without reading 756 "Step 3" are overlapped in the display area and displayed at the same time, but the character display without reading 756 "Step" 3” is displayed on the front side of the character display 755 “Intense heat” with reading (
It is displayed preferentially on the upper layer). Character display without reading 756 "Step 3"
Is difficult to be recognized by the player because there is no read voice output, but it can be easily recognized by the player by preferentially displaying. In addition, the non-reading character display 756 “step 3” may be displayed for a longer period of time than the reading-out character display 755 “intense heat” that is displayed at the same time, and thus may be easily recognized.

Note that, in FIG. 194, the sound effect "QUIN" is output from the speaker as many times as the number of times (the number of steps) the single effect (here, a step-up notice) is executed, and the character display is performed as the number of times the single effect is executed is increased. The mode of the output sound other than the reading sound is changed. However, alternatively, BGM (music) corresponding to the number of times of execution of the single effect (the number of steps) may be output from the speaker to notify the expectation level of the jackpot that increases as the number of times of execution of the single effect increases.

[Operation/Effect of 18th Embodiment]
According to the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying effects related to the variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display device. When the stop result is a special result, a special game state that is advantageous to the player can be generated. Further, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) capable of outputting sound. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display a plurality of character displays at the same time as a notice effect capable of notifying the degree of expectation that the variable display game will be a special result. The effect control means performs a voice output to read a character to a part of the character displays (for example, the character display 755) of the plurality of character displays to notify the degree of expectation.
The effect control means displays another character among the plurality of character displays (for example, character displays 752, 75).
3, 756), the degree of expectation is informed only by displaying the other characters without executing voice output for reading out the characters.

Therefore, it can be understood that the player should pay attention to a part of the character displays that read the characters out of the plurality of character displays, and can improve the enjoyment of the game without being confused about which character display to pay attention to. it can. Further, when the character display that reads out the characters has a higher expectation of a special result (big hit) than the character display that does not read out the characters (for example, FIG. 192), the player pays attention to the character display with the high expectation. You can Further, with regard to a part of the character display for reading out the character, the character display can be confirmed even if the voice output for reading out the character is difficult to hear, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, another character display can be displayed for a longer period than a part of the character display. Therefore, the character display that is not read (other character display) can be displayed for a longer period than the character display that is read (partial character display), so the player will have more opportunities to pay attention to the character display that is not read. Or, the possibility of overlooking the undisplayed character display is reduced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of character displays displayed at the same time (for example, the character display 75
3, 755) is a line indicating the degree of expectation, and the effect control unit executes a voice output to read out the line for some character displays to notify the degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 193B (te) (to)).
reference). Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention by executing voice output that reads out the serifs for the character display of some of the serifs with high expectation. Further, by displaying a plurality of character displays as lines, for example, it is possible to produce an effect such as a conversation between a plurality of characters, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, the effect control unit emphasizes a part of the character display (for example, the character display 755) that is executing the voice output over the other character display (for example, the character display 753, 758). It is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 193B (te) and FIG. 194 (to)). Therefore, the player
It is possible to easily understand for which character display the voice output is executed.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, the notice production (pseudo continuous production, step-up notice) is composed of a plurality of continuous single productions, and the larger the plurality of productions, the higher the degree of expectation. Then, the effect control means displays the number of times the single effect is executed in the notice effect by the other character display (for example, the character display 752, 756). Therefore, it is possible to read a part of the character display which is more important than the number of times the single effect is executed, without reading the number of times the single effect is executed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, the effect control means displays the number of times of execution of the single effect in the notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, step-up notice) by the other character display, and also from the sound output means (speaker). A predetermined number of sound effects corresponding to the number of executions are generated. Therefore, even if the player feels uncomfortable if the number of times of execution of the single effect displayed by the character display (the other character display) is read out as it is, the effect is generated by the number of times of execution, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. With the sound effect, the number of executions can be notified to the player.

[19th Embodiment]
The nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eighteenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to eighteenth embodiments, and the duplicated description will be appropriately omitted.

The nineteenth embodiment relates to sound output and non-operation effect and operation effect. The upper speaker 19a and/or the lower speaker 19b function as sound output means capable of outputting (generating) sound. The operated operation effect is an effect in which the operation of the operation means is valid, and the non-operation effect is an effect in which the operation of the operation means is invalid. The effect button 25 functions as an operation unit. The operation effect includes pre-operation effect (operation request sound or operation prompting display) that prompts the player to operate and/or post-operation effect (operation corresponding effect) corresponding to the operation of the player. In the present embodiment, both the no-operation effect and the operated operation effect are accompanied by sound output. In the non-operation effect, since the operation valid period (operation detection possible period) is not set, the operation detection becomes impossible and the operation becomes invalid. On the other hand, in the operation production, the operation effective period (operation detectable period) is set and the operation becomes effective.

[Variation effect setting process]
Referring to FIG. 195, the variation effect setting process according to the nineteenth embodiment (B1905 in FIG. 43).
Will be described in detail. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. In FIG. 190, steps B6501 to B6505 are added to the variation effect setting process of FIG. Note that the same step numbers are given to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 44, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

In step B2011, the production control device 300 determines the content of the production (preliminary production) corresponding to the result of the preliminary announcement lottery, and then lottery whether there is an operational production for each preliminary announcement (B650).
1). Next, when there is an operation effect by winning, the operation effective period and the operation type corresponding to the operation effect of each announcement are set (B6502).

After that, if there is an operation effect, the effect control device 300 performs steps B2012-B2.
After 014, the display setting of the operation prompting display for prompting the player's operation (B6503), the setting of the operation request sound for prompting the player's operation (B6504), and the display setting of the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation (B
6505) is executed.

Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type (B2015). The display setting here also includes reading setting information (set in step B1720 described later) relating to the pending change notice at the time of the pending shift. Further, the notice of the pending change in the pending shift includes a notice of the pending change in the pending digest area 640.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Referring to FIG. 196, the look-ahead variable system command processing (B1 in FIG. 38) according to the nineteenth embodiment.
216) will be described in detail. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300. Note that FIG. 196 corresponds to FIG.
Steps B1720-B1723 are added to step 1. Therefore, the processes having the same contents as those in FIG.

Production control device 300, when the pre-reading notice production which occurs (holding change notice etc.) is the production which starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), sets the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading production (B1716). .. The production that starts immediately includes, for example, a notice of a pending change when the pending occurs. Here, the display setting of the hold change notice when the hold occurs is also executed. A display setting for changing the hold mode is performed as the hold change notice. For example, the color of the hold display is changed from a normal color (for example, white) to black, blue, green, or red, or the shape of the hold display is changed to a shape different from the normal shape according to the expectation of the big hit. ..

When the prefetching notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “N”)
) That is, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect executed at the time of the hold shift, the display information corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift (movement of the hold display 633) is set and stored (
B1720). Here, the information about the display of the notice of change of the hold during the hold shift is set and saved. The notice of pending change in the pending shift includes a notice of pending change in the pending consumption area 640. As the reservation change notice, display information for changing the reservation mode (color, pattern, shape, etc.) is set.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes the lottery for the presence/absence of the operation effect for the pending change notice at the time of the pending shift (B1721). That is, in connection with the notice of the change of the hold during the hold shift,
A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the operation effect. Then, when there is an operation effect by being elected, the operation effective period and the operation type corresponding to the operation effect are set and saved (B1722), and the player operates as the pre-operation effect of the operation effect with respect to the pending change notice. The information of the operation prompting display such as the operation prompting image that prompts the user to set is saved and the information of the operation request sound is set and saved (B17).
23). After that, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

[Production button input processing]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect button input processing according to the nineteenth embodiment. The effect button input process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B0010 of the main process (FIG. 36).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is a button operation valid period (operation detectable period) in which the operation of the effect button switch 25a (main body of the effect button) can be detected (B6).
701). The button operation effective period is the step B6502 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 195).
Or the operation valid period set in step B1722 of the prefetching variable system command processing (FIG. 196). If the button operation is not valid (the result of B6701 is "N"), the button operation (
The detection of the effect button switch 25a) is set to be invalid (B6702), and the effect button input process is ended. In this case, if the operation prompting display is being displayed and the operation request sound is being generated (being output), the operation prompting display and the operation request sound are ended. It should be noted that the operation request sound may end within the button operation valid period after the second period described later has elapsed.

If it is during the button operation valid period (result of B6701 is “Y”), detection of button operation is set to be valid (B6703). That is, the operation prompting display and the operation request sound are started or continued.

Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a button operation has been detected (B670).
4). When there is no button operation (the result of B6704 is "N"), the effect button input processing is ended. When the button operation is detected (the result of B6704 is "Y"), the button operation type is determined and stored for the button operation of the effect button switch 25a (B6705).

The button operation types include single-press operation, long-press operation, continuous hit operation, and the like. Methods for determining these operations are known, but for example, a single-press operation can be determined when the effect button switch 25a is pressed and turned on only once in a predetermined short time. For example, the long press operation can be determined when the pressed state (ON state) of the effect button switch 25a is maintained for a predetermined long time. For example, the continuous hitting operation can be determined when the effect button switch 25a is turned on/off a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. The effect button switch 25a is detected by an optical sensor or a magnetic sensor to be turned on when it is pushed and moved, and is kept off when it is not pushed.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation valid period of step B6701 (B6706).
.. In steps B6502 and B1722 described above, the button operation valid period and the button operation type are set in association with each other. When the determined button operation type is not the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation effective period (the result of B6706 is “N”), the effect button input process is ended.

When the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation valid period (the result of B6706 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs the button operation (operation of the effect button switch 25a). Set the execution information for executing the accompanying operation corresponding effect (B
6707), the detection of the button operation is set to be invalid, and the operation prompting display and the operation request sound are ended (
B6708). For example, the operation corresponding effect here is the display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 (
It includes the change of the hold display related to the hold change notice) and the operation of the movable accessory. Then, the effect button input process is ended.

In the effect button input process (FIG. 197) described above, the button operation is the operation of the effect button switch 25a (the main body of the effect button), but the button operation is the touch panel 25.
The operation (b) (such as a swipe operation) may be performed.

[Screen transition diagram]
198A and 198B are an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the nineteenth embodiment.

In (MA) of FIG. 198A, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is the identification information.
↓↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol (first symbol A) and the right symbol (decorative first), respectively.
The design B) and the middle design (decorative first design C) are changing.

In (m), as a no-operation effect, a moving effect in which the character image 761 simulating a tank moves is started. This no-operation effect is executed only for a predetermined first period. Note that the operation of the operation means is invalid during the non-operation effect. A speaker (sound output means) is used for the no-operation effect here.
It includes generating (outputting) a sound effect from to notify the expectation of a big hit. Further, the sound effect here is of a type different from that of BGM (music).

For example, as the moving sound of the character image 761 simulating a tank, the expectation of the jackpot is different for each sound effect, such that the sound effect “go” has high expectation and the sound effect “carara” has low expectation. Therefore, the expectation can be notified by the sound effect. The expectation (reliability) of the big hit corresponds to the probability of a big hit when the notice (sound effect here) appears, and the selection rate of the notice in the case of a big hit and the selection rate of a notice in the case of a big hit Can be calculated by

The effect control device 300 causes the notice effect (B2006 selected in the variation effect process (FIG. 195) to be selected by lottery.
, B2009, B2011, B2014), the non-operation effect can be displayed and set. In addition, there are reach effects, pseudo continuous effects, cut-in effects, and the like as non-operation effects that generate sound effects.

Further, in (m), the changing pending display 63 showing the pending relating to the special figure changing display game being executed.
3a is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. A hold display 633 (first hold display) corresponding to the hold generated by the winning at the start winning hole 36 is displayed on the first hold display portion 630a. Then, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41.
On the number-of-holds display section 660, a number “1” indicating the number of to-be-holded special maps 1 and a number “0” indicating the number of to-be-holded special maps 2 are displayed, respectively.

Then, in (M), the hold display 63 is displayed as a hold change notice (B1716) when the hold occurs.
Immediately after the occurrence of the hold, 3 changes from the normal hold display (circle) to the hold display 633b having a shape (mode) imitating the effect button 25. Note that the hold display 633 may be displayed as the hold display 633b having a shape imitating the effect button 25 from the time when (H) is generated.

Thereafter, in (m), the character image 761 simulating a tank is stopped, the non-operation effect accompanied by the sound effect “go” is ended, and the operation effect is started. An operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) that prompts the player to perform an operation is displayed as a pre-operation effect of the operation effect. The operation prompting display 636 is an image display 6 that requests the player to press the effect button 25.
36a, and a gauge 636b representing the operation valid period. The image display 636a includes a character display such as "press button" or "PUSH". In addition, as a pre-operation effect of the operation effect, an operation request sound “BeeB” that requests the player to operate is generated (output) from the speaker. The effect control device 300 can set the operation prompting display 636 and the operation request sound of the operation effect as the advance notice drawn in the variable effect process (FIG. 195) (B6501-
B6505). It should be noted that the operation request sound may be a voice notifying the player of the operation type (“press,” “continuous hit,” “long press,” etc.).

The effect control device 300 sets the second period during which the operation request sound can continue to be shorter than the first period during which the no-operation effect (that is, the sound effect) continues. The second period is set, for example, when the operation request sound is set in the change effect setting process or the prefetch change type command process (B6504, B1723). In this way, by changing the mode of the operation request sound and the effect sound, the player can
The operation request sound and the sound effect are not confused with each other, the operation request sound can be easily recognized, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
Moreover, the effect control device 300 sets the operation request sound to a high sound and the sound effect to a low sound, for example, so that the operation request sound and the sound effect have different modes. Also by this, the player can easily distinguish the operation request sound and the sound effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the operation button 25 is operated within the set second period, the period during which the operation request sound actually continues is the period from the start of the operation valid period to the operation, and the set first period is set. Two
It will be shorter than the period. The period during which the operation request sound continues is equal to the second period when there is no operation during the operation valid period. Rendering control device 300 sets the second period to be equal to or shorter than the operation valid period. Then, the effect control device 300 sets the second period shorter than the first period by setting the operation effective period (operation detectable period) shorter than the first period during which the no-operation effect (that is, the sound effect) continues. Can be set.

Next, in (M), when the player performs a button operation corresponding to the set operation type (B6502) (B6706), an image 762 (here, cloud or smoke) is displayed as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation. It is displayed (B6505, B6707). In addition to the display of the image 762, a sound may be generated (output) from the speaker as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation.

Subsequently, in (M), as an operation-corresponding effect corresponding to the operation, another image 763 (here, a character image of a dialogue) is displayed after the image 762 to notify the expectation degree of the big hit. For example, if the dialogue is “chance”, the degree of expectation is low, and if “serious fever” is high, the degree of expectation is high. In addition, the degree of expectation may be notified by a voice (speech reading, etc.) accompanying the image 763.

It should be noted that, in the pre-operation effect, a vague expectation level may be informed in an unclear manner by an image or an operation request sound before the operation-responsive effect clearly informs the expectation degree (two-step expectation notification). ). For example, a plurality of types of operation request sounds that are difficult to discriminate unless carefully listened to are provided, and different expectations are reported for each type of operation request sound. In this way, the player's expectations are gradually increased, and the player's motivation to operate the effect button 25 can be improved.

Next, in (YA), after the special figure variation display game is finished and the off-stop symbol is displayed,
The next special map variation display game starts. Here, the hold display 633b of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the hold exhaustion area 640 of the rectangular frame (hold shift).

Then, in (Y), the hold display 633 is generated immediately after the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in (Y), immediately after (Y), the hold display 633 has a mode (color) different from the normal hold display (for example, white) as the hold change notice (B1716) when the hold occurs.
3c (for example, red). The hold change notice when the hold occurs is a non-operation effect in which the operation of the operation means is invalid. Note that the hold display 633c (for example, red) different from the normal hold display (for example, white) may be displayed from the time when (Y) is held. Further, a hold change sound "Queen" indicating that the hold has been changed is generated (output). The expectation level of the big hit may be set to be different for each type of the hold change sound, and the hold expectation level may be notified by the hold change sound.

After that, in (a), the operation effect related to the notice of the pending change at the time of the pending shift is started. Therefore, similar to (M), the operation prompting display 636 (image display 636a, gauge 636b).
) Is displayed, and the operation request sound “beep” is generated (output) from the speaker. In addition,
The timing of generation of the hold is random, and the generation timing of the hold change sound and the operation request sound may overlap, but in order to prevent confusion, in this case, only one of them is generated with priority.

The effect control device 300 sets the second period during which the operation request sound can continue to be shorter than the first period during which the no-operation effect (that is, the hold change sound) continues. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the operation request sound without confusing the operation request sound with the sound effect. Moreover, the effect control device 300 sets the operation request sound to a high sound and the sound effect to a low sound, for example, so that the operation request sound and the sound effect have different modes. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the operation request sound and the sound effect.

Next, in (i), when the player performs a button operation corresponding to the set operation type (B1722) (B6706), the pending digestion area 640 is provided as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation.
The mode of the pending display 633a during change is changed. For example, the shape of the changing pending display 633a changes from a button shape (a shape imitating the effect button 25) to a round shape, and
For example, the color of the pending-change display 633a changes from white (normal color) to green. Further, here, a new hold display 633 is generated.

Then, immediately after (i), the hold display 633 changes to a hold display 633c (for example, blue) in a mode (color) different from the normal hold display (for example, white) as a hold change notice (B1716) when the hold occurs. .. It should be noted that from the time the (i) hold occurs, the hold display 633c (eg, blue) having a mode (color) different from the normal hold display (eg, white) may be displayed. In addition, a hold change sound (explosion sound "Dokan") indicating that the hold is changed is generated (output). In addition, the holding change sound here (explosion sound "Dokan") is more than the holding change sound "Queen" in (Yo)
The expectation of a big hit is low. The first period in which the hold change sound as the no-operation effect continues is longer than the second period in which the operation request sound can continue.

Next, in (Le), after the special figure variation display game ends and the off stop symbol is displayed,
The next special map variation display game starts.

Note that the screen transition diagram of FIG. 198 is merely an example, and for example, (Yu) and (Yo) are deleted, and the operation production of (La) and (Li) is executed immediately after the special figure variation display game starts. May be done.
Also, an example has been shown in which the notice of change of the hold during the hold shift is executed in the hold exhaustion area 640.
It may be executed by the first hold display unit 630a and the second hold display unit 630b.

In addition, in (Ma) and (Mi) of FIG. 198, the movement effect in which the character image 761 moves is executed as a no-operation effect. However, when a lottery is selected with a predetermined probability and there is an operation effect, only when there is a loss. It may be executed as a no-operation effect. That is, in the same kind of effect (moving effect), the same effect sound may be output by providing the operated effect and the non-operated effect at a predetermined ratio (appearance rate). In this way, the variation of the production is increased and the enjoyment of the game is improved.
In the case of a big hit, the ratio (appearance rate) of the operated effect may be increased more than in the case of a big hit.
Further, the ratio (appearance rate) of the operated effect and the non-operated effect may be changed according to the gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, time saving state, latent probability variation state, etc.). Even in this case, the variation of the production is increased and the interest of the game is improved.

〔Timing chart〕
FIG. 199 is a timing chart illustrating the no-operation effect and the operated operation effect according to the nineteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 199, in one special figure variation display game, it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the expectation that the special figure variation display game will be a big hit, a plurality of times. The multiple-time production includes non-operation production and operation production.

At time T1, the special figure variation display game starts. Thereafter, at time T2, the no-operation effect starts. In the no-operation effect, a sound effect (or a hold change sound) is generated (output) from the speaker in the first period (T4-T2). The sound effect (or the hold change sound) notifies the degree of expectation that the special figure variation display game of this time or the next time will be a big hit. Even if the effect button 25 (operation means) is operated at time T3 while the non-operation effect is performed, the operation is invalid because the operation effective period (operation detectable period) is not set. .. At time T4, the no-operation effect ends.

Then, at time T5, the operated operation effect starts. In the operation effect, the operation request sound can be generated (output) from the speaker in the second period. The operation request sound prompts the player to operate the effect button 25 (operating means). Since the second period is the same as or shorter than the operation valid period and the operation valid period is shorter than the first period (second period≦operation valid period<first period), the second period is Shorter than one period.

In the period (T7-T5) in which the operation request sound actually continues, when the effect button 25 is operated within the set second period, the operation is performed from the start of the second period (start of the operation valid period). However, if there is no operation within the second period, it is equal to the second period. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the operation request sound is continued for the set second period regardless of whether or not the operation is performed.

When the effect button 25 is operated, the operation request sound ends at time T7.
At the end of the operation request sound (at the end of the second period), the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 25 is started.

In addition, even after the operation request sound is ended by the elapse of the set second period, if it is within the operation valid period, the operation corresponding effect is started when the effect button 25 is operated.

[Operation/Effect of 19th Embodiment]
According to the nineteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display device, and the stop result of the variable display game is special. When the result is obtained, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. Further, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) capable of outputting sound, and operation means (effect button 25) operable by the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a plurality of effects in the variable display game that can inform the degree of expectation that the variable display game is a special result, and the operation of the operation means is invalid as the effect of a plurality of times. It is possible to execute the non-operation effect that is performed and the operation effect that the operation of the operation means is valid. In the non-operation effect, the sound output unit outputs a sound (for example, a sound effect or a hold change sound) in the first period to notify the expectation level. In the operation effect, the second period that is shorter than the first period. In, the sound output means (speaker) outputs a sound (operation request sound) to prompt the operation of the operation means (effect button 25), and when the operation means is operated, the degree of expectation is notified.

Therefore, since both the operated effect and the non-operated effect can be executed in one variation display game, the effect is diversified and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In addition, a sound (
The second period during which the operation request sound) continues becomes shorter than the first period during which the no-operation effect continues, and the player outputs the sound (operation request sound) prompting the operation of the operation means and the no-operation effect. Sounds (that is, sound effects, hold change sounds, etc.) are not confused with each other, and it becomes easier to recognize the operation request sound. in this way,
It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the output modes of the operation request sound and the sound output in the non-operation effect different so that they can be distinguished.

According to the nineteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory which is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition.
Prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining execution information of the variable display game regarding the starting memory before the variable display game based on the starting memory stored by the starting storage means is executed. The effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies the determination result of the pre-determination means as the non-operation effect and the operation effect. Therefore, the notification of the determination result of the preliminary determination means (pre-reading effect) such as the notice of the pending change can be executed by both the non-operation effect and the operation effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 Ordinary variation prize winning device (second starting prize area)
39 special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 42 setting change device 44 board production device 44a, 44b internal accessory (inner movable member)
46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
51 1st special map fluctuation display section (1st special display)
52 Second special map change display section (Special map 2 display)
80 lamp display device 82 lucky number display device 93 setting key switch 95a external accessory (outer movable member)
102 setting value change switch 143 probability setting value display device 150 driver 152 status display device 153 LED driver 100 game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply device 510 parts 513 identification board 516 parallel-to-serial converter 519 wiring (electric wire)
530 Touch sensor 630 Hold display unit 640 Hold hold area 640A Start memory display background 641 Performance display area 815 I2CI/O expander

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed,
Operation detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player,
Start storage means capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition;
Predetermination means for determining execution information of the variable display game regarding the starting memory before the variable display game based on the starting memory stored by the starting storage means is executed,
Equipped with
The effect control means,
An operation value calculation means for calculating an operation value as a value that changes in response to the operation detection means detecting the operation of the player;
When the operation detection means detects an operation of the player, a prediction effect execution means capable of executing a prediction effect for predicting and informing the content of the predetermined effect, and
The predictive effect execution means,
Changing the execution ratio of the prediction effect according to the operation value,
As the predictive effect, a first predictive effect that predicts and notifies the content of the predetermined effect related to the variable display game being executed, and the predetermined effect that appears in at least one of the plurality of variable display games. A second prediction effect of predicting and informing the content of the above based on the determination result of the advance determination means, and a gaming machine. The predictive effect execution means,
When the second predictive effect is executed, the fact that the second predictive effect is executed is stored as a predictive effect executed flag,
The stored predictive effect execution flag is erased when a variable display game based on a starting memory determined by the advance determination means is executed as a target of the second predictive effect. The gaming machine described in 1. The predictive effect execution means,
When the second predictive effect is executed, the fact that the second predictive effect is executed is stored as a predictive effect executed flag,
The stored predictive effect execution flag is erased when all of the variable display games based on the starting memory stored when the second predictive effect is executed are executed. Gaming machine described in.

Images